TWI253105B - Projection optical system adjustment method, prediction method, evaluation method, adjustment method, exposure method, exposure device, recording medium, and device manufacturing method - Google Patents

Projection optical system adjustment method, prediction method, evaluation method, adjustment method, exposure method, exposure device, recording medium, and device manufacturing method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TWI253105B
TWI253105B TW092104373A TW92104373A TWI253105B TW I253105 B TWI253105 B TW I253105B TW 092104373 A TW092104373 A TW 092104373A TW 92104373 A TW92104373 A TW 92104373A TW I253105 B TWI253105 B TW I253105B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
optical system
pattern
projection optical
image
line
Prior art date
Application number
TW092104373A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TW200400540A (en
Inventor
Shigeru Hirukawa
Toshiharu Nakashima
Kenji Higashi
Original Assignee
Nikon Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Nikon Corp filed Critical Nikon Corp
Publication of TW200400540A publication Critical patent/TW200400540A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI253105B publication Critical patent/TWI253105B/en

Links

Landscapes

  • Exposure And Positioning Against Photoresist Photosensitive Materials (AREA)
  • Exposure Of Semiconductors, Excluding Electron Or Ion Beam Exposure (AREA)

Abstract

A wavefront aberration of a projection optical system is measured and information on the wave aberration is acquired (step 102). Moreover, a reticle pattern is transferred onto a wafer via the projection optical system (steps 104 to 108). Next, the wafer having the transferred pattern is developed, a line width of a resist image formed on the wafer is measured, and an image line width difference between the first line pattern extending in a predetermined direction and the second line pattern orthogonally intersecting the first line pattern is measured (steps 112 to 118). The projection optical system is adjusted so that the size of the ninth term (lower degree spherical aberration) is controlled according to the value of the twelfth term (higher degree astigmatism) of the Zernike multi-nominal in which the wave aberration is expanded and the aforementioned line width difference (steps 120 to 124).

Description

1253105 玫、發明說明: 【發明所屬之技術領域】 七西本發明係關於投影光學系統之調整方法、預測方法、 法凋整方法、曝光方法及曝光裝置、程式以及元 2化方法’進—步詳言之,係關於將第1面上之圖案像 與在第2面上之投景> 光學系統之調整方法,透過投影光 系、先來預測圖案像之特性的預測方法,利用該預測方法 來評價圖案像之特性的評價方法,利用該評價方法來調整 :案像之形成狀態的調整方法,利用該調整方法或前述投 影=學系統之調整方法將圖案形成在物體上的曝光方法及 料適合實施該曝光方法或投影光學系統之調整方法的曝 光I置,使電腦執行前述預測方法的程式,以及使用前述 曝光方法或曝光裝置的元件製造方法。 【先前技術】 -般而言,在製造半導體元件、顯示元件、薄膜剌 、微機等微元件之微影製程中,係使用將形成在遮光罩号 標線片(以下,總稱為「標線片」)之圖案,透過投影光辱 ^統,轉印在晶圓或玻璃板等感應物體(以下’總稱為「羞 :V上’所謂之步進器或所謂之掃描器(也稱為掃描步线 器)專投影曝光裝置。 習知,這種曝光裝置’當量測藉由曝光形成在晶圓上 之縱線圖案與橫線圖案之轉印像(光阻像等)之線寬差時, 投影光學系統之縱線圖案像與橫線圖案像之對比差之:因 1253105 係:為慧形像差等非對稱像差為其主因。因此,量測結 果田無去1測出慧形像差等非對稱像差成份時,不易修 正線寬差。 R P取近,在組裝投影光學系統時,係使用干涉計來量測 IV光予系統之視野内(或曝光範圍内)各位置之波面像差 ’使二查沒克(Zernike)多項式(例如,條紋查淫克多項式) =該量測之波面像差(像差函數)予以級數展開,並進行調 整,以使所得到級數各項(各查淫克項)之各係數⑷里克係 ,)之大小分別為目標值以下。進行這種調整係因為前述級 各項(各查〉圼克項)分別表示特定波面像差成份,各項係 數係表示各像差成份大小之故。 取近,投影光學系統(投影透鏡)之像差控制精度,係 對上述投影光學系統之製程導入波面像差量測,藉由使用 波面像差之查埋克多項式之級數展開之控制而快速提高。 又’根據使用查埋克多項式將波面像差(像差 開各項…克項)之大小(查淫克係數)、與查埋克感度 (z⑽lke Sensitlvlty)表之線性結合,來求出投影光學系统 之成像性能,例如’像差(或該指標值),藉由所謂查 感度法’關於像差之影響’也能針對簡易者用簡單之方、去 來判斷。此處’所謂查淫克感度表係指由分別相里之择光 條件、即光學條件(曝光波長、最大财、使用NA、照明 NA、照明糸統開口光圈之開σ形狀等)、評價項目(遮光罩 種類、線寬、評價量、圖案之資訊等)、在藉由這些光學产 件與評價項目之組合所規定之複數個曝光條件下,: 1253105 求出之投影光學系統之成像性能,例如,各種像差(或該指 標值)之各查淫克項之每1又之變化量所構成之計算表。 但是,亦有未必能適用所謂查涅克法的評價量,其係 線寬變化。關於該線寬變化,係如Pr〇c SpiE ν〇1·4346之 第713頁所揭示,根據像差之旋轉對稱成份(〇0成份” 2 階旋轉對稱成份(2 Θ成份),線寬成為最大之聚焦位置變化 ,且其線寬之最大值也變化。而且,亦存纟2個像差⑽ 成份、2Θ成份)之相互作用。因此,所謂查淫克感度法不 適用線寬之推定。 在使用條、紋查 >圼克多項式,將波面像差級數展開之上 ㈣轉對稱成份(0Θ成份)項中,包含表示散焦之低階項, 即弟4項魏ζ4)或表示低階球面像差之第9項(係數& ’這些⑼成份項之波面變化係等方性,因此,對V線(縱 線)、Η線(橫線)之圖案成像狀態之影響相等。&,2階旋 轉對稱成伤(2Θ成份)項有表示低階像散像差之第$項(係 =表示高階像散像差之第12項(係數… 像狀 =;縱:^ , ' ,、付旎雖相反,但其大小相等。因此,以 在兩因該"成份項與20成份項之兩者存在(即 ,兩者之係數(成份)都不是零)所造成 ( 像線寬之像差影響的差。 了蜿線榼線圖案 由於這種愔、V 0a ,目前並無簡易且確實^㈣案與橫線圖案像之線寬差 。 、"彳疋方法,因此,其調整亦困難 1253105 本發明係在上述情况 系統之調整方法,特另”甘…目的係提供投影光學 案像彼此間之線寬差。、係能自由控制相互正交之線圖 本發明之第2目的後& 度的預測透過投影光學率:預測方法’其能簡易且高精 /兀子糸統之圖案像之特性。 本發明之第3目的係提供評價方法, 度的評價透過投影光學系統之圖案像之特性、。且南知 本發明之第4目的係提供調整方法 度的調整透過投影光學系統之圖案像之特性。^ 月匕 本發明之第5目的係提供曝光方法及曝 透過投影光學系統將圖案形成在物體上。 - 本發明之第6目的係提供程式,其 統’能用短時間且高精度執行圖案轉印特性之預^。予糸 【發明内容】 乍看之下會認為在使用查埋克多項式(例如,條紋查淫 克多項式)進行級數展開之旋轉對稱成份㈣成份)項與2 階旋轉對稱成份(2Θ成份)項中,並無相互關聯性。作是, 發明人等重複各種實驗(包含模擬)之結果,實際上,笋現 因光瞳面内(向徑多項式之獨立變數p,為同—階數㈣成 份與2Θ成份之各成份)之相位分布之相互作用,光瞳面内 之波面錯乱有時在縱方向與橫方向上有所不同。例如,當 1253105 將波面像差級數展開之第12項( 使用條紋查涅克多項式 係數Z,2)之成份不是零時,發現藉由構成投影光學系統之 光學元件之移動與交換來變更球面像差成份之第9項(係數1253105 玫,发明说明: [Technical field to which the invention pertains] Seventh aspect of the invention relates to an adjustment method, a prediction method, a method of fading, an exposure method, an exposure apparatus, a program, and a method for the projection optical system. In other words, a method for predicting the characteristics of a pattern image by first shifting a pattern image on the first surface and a projection method on the second surface to the optical system through the projection light system is used. An evaluation method for evaluating characteristics of a pattern image, and an adjustment method for adjusting a formation state of a scene image, and an exposure method and material for forming a pattern on an object by the adjustment method or the adjustment method of the projection/learning system An exposure method suitable for implementing the exposure method or the adjustment method of the projection optical system, a program for causing a computer to execute the above-described prediction method, and a component manufacturing method using the above-described exposure method or exposure device. [Prior Art] In general, in the lithography process for manufacturing micro-elements such as semiconductor elements, display elements, thin films, and micro-computers, the use of hood marks (hereinafter, collectively referred to as "reticles" is used. ”), through the projection of light, transferred to the wafer or glass plate and other sensitive objects (hereinafter referred to as 'shame: V on the so-called stepper or so-called scanner (also known as scanning step) a linear projection device. It is known that such an exposure device is equivalent to measuring the line width difference between a vertical line pattern formed on a wafer and a transfer image (photoresist image, etc.) of a horizontal line pattern by exposure. The vertical line pattern of the projection optical system is inferior to the horizontal line pattern image: due to the 1253105 system: the asymmetrical aberration such as coma aberration is the main cause. Therefore, the measurement result has no 1 to detect the cilia When the asymmetric aberration component is poor, it is not easy to correct the line width difference. When the RP is close, when using the projection optical system, the interferometer is used to measure the wavefront of the IV light to the position of the system (or within the exposure range). Aberrations make Zernike polynomials (for example Stripe check positivity polynomial) = The wavefront aberration (aberration function) of the measurement is expanded by the series and adjusted so that the coefficients of each series (the suffix items) are obtained (4) , the size of the) is below the target value. This adjustment is made because the above-mentioned items (each check) represent the specific wavefront aberration components, and the coefficients represent the size of each aberration component. Recently, the aberration control precision of the projection optical system (projection lens) is introduced into the wavefront aberration measurement of the process of the projection optical system, and is rapidly improved by using the control of the level expansion of the wavefront aberration burying polynomial And 'based on the use of the burial gram polynomial to determine the size of the wavefront aberration (the aberrations of the ... gram) and the linear sensitivities (z (10) lke Sensitlvlty) table to determine the projection The imaging performance of the optical system, such as 'aberration (or the value of the index), can also be judged by the simple side of the simple effect by the so-called sensitivity method "About the influence of aberrations". Sensation The table refers to the selection conditions of the respective phases, that is, the optical conditions (exposure wavelength, maximum profit, use NA, illumination NA, opening σ shape of the aperture of the illumination system, etc.), evaluation items (hood type, line width, Evaluation amount, pattern information, etc.) Under the plurality of exposure conditions defined by the combination of these optical products and evaluation items, the imaging performance of the projection optical system obtained by 1253105, for example, various aberrations (or The calculation table consisting of the amount of change in each of the indicators of the index value. However, there is a possibility that the evaluation amount of the so-called Chanek method may not be applied, and the line width varies. As disclosed on page 713 of Pr〇c SpiE ν〇1·4346, according to the rotationally symmetric component of the aberration (〇0 component), the second-order rotationally symmetric component (2 Θ component), the line width becomes the maximum focus position change, And the maximum value of the line width also changes. Moreover, there are also two interactions of aberration (10) components and 2 components. Therefore, the so-called sensitization method does not apply to the presumption of line width. In the use of strips, textures > gram polynomials, the wavefront aberration series is expanded (4) into the symmetrical component (0 Θ component), including the low-order term representing defocus, ie, the 4th Wei Wei 4) or representation The ninth item of the low-order spherical aberration (coefficient & 'the (9) component wavefront variation is equal, so the effect on the pattern imaging state of the V line (vertical line) and the squall line (horizontal line) is equal. &, the second-order rotational symmetry into the injury (2Θ component) term has the first term representing the lower-order astigmatic aberration (system = the 12th term representing the higher-order astigmatic aberration (coefficient...image-like; longitudinal: ^, ' , ,付付, but the opposite is equal. Therefore, it is caused by both the "component" and the 20 component (that is, the coefficient (component) of both is not zero). The difference in the influence of the aberration of the line width. Because of this 愔, V 0a , there is currently no simple and true ^ (4) case and the horizontal line pattern image line width difference. , "彳疋 method, therefore The adjustment is also difficult. 1253105 The present invention is a method for adjusting the system in the above situation, and the other purpose is to provide a projection optical case. The line width difference between each other. The line can be freely controlled to be orthogonal to each other. The second object of the present invention is the prediction of the & degree through the projection optical ratio: the prediction method 'it can be simple and high precision / 兀 之The third object of the present invention is to provide an evaluation method, the degree of which is evaluated by the characteristics of the pattern image of the projection optical system, and the fourth object of the present invention is to provide an adjustment method adjustment adjustment through the projection optical system. The fifth aspect of the present invention provides an exposure method and an exposure through projection optical system to form a pattern on an object. - The sixth object of the present invention is to provide a program that can be used for a short period of time. And high-precision execution of the pattern transfer characteristics of the pre-^. [Abstract] At first glance, it is considered that the use of the gram-check polynomial (for example, the fringe polynomial) for the series expansion of the rotationally symmetric component (four) components) There is no correlation between the term and the second-order rotationally symmetric component (2Θ component). As a result, the inventors repeated the results of various experiments (including simulations), in fact, the bamboo shoots are now due to the light surface. The interaction of the inner (the independent variable p of the polynomial, the phase distribution of the same-order (four) component and the two components), the wavefront disorder in the pupil plane sometimes differs in the longitudinal and lateral directions. For example, when the component of the 12th item of the wavefront aberration series (using the stripe Chankov polynomial coefficient Z, 2) is not zero, it is found that the movement and exchange of the optical elements constituting the projection optical system are changed. Item 9 of the spherical aberration component (coefficient)

Zg)之大小’措此能控制光瞳面内之 叫Η您上下、左右方向之相位 分布,能調整前述縱橫線之線寬差。 本發明係根據發明人等所得到之ρ^ Μ于4之上述新穎想法來進行 ,採用以下之方法及構成。 若從第1觀點來看的話, 統之調整方法,該系統係將第 面上’其特徵在於,包含: 第1製程,係取得包含前 特性之資訊; 則本發明係第1投影光學系 1面上之圖案像投影在第2 述才又影光學系統之第1光學 …~ τ不抓,將丽述第1 6 上所配置之既定方向延伸之第 正交之第h…甲之弟1線圖案、和與第i線圖f /之弟2線圖案之像形成在前述第2面上,並且 第前述第1線圖案像之線寬)與第2線寬(係二 線圖案像之線寬)之線寬差;以及 學特係根據前述第1製程所得収前述第u 、之值與前述線寬差,為了控制因與前述第 之相互作^使前述線寬差受影響之第2光學特性干' Μ,調整前述投影光學系統。 于、之大 点?b處’在第2製程中,也可使用投影光學李统士 成第1線圖幸i筮。A @ h 兀予糸統,來形 前述第1線:宰=像,並叫^ 像之線幻與第2線寬(其係前述第2線圖 1253105 案像之線寬)之線寬差,也可在形成第i線圖案_ 案之像後,來量測前述線寬差。 Θ 若依此的話,例如,為了控制容易調整之第 性之大小’調整投影光學系、統,藉此能控制前 二 其係因投影光學系統之調整困難?差( 因而產生)。因此,能自由……:予特时子在所起 之線圖案像彼此間線寬差之控制。订*知不易相互正交 在這種情況下,當前述第i製q 投影先學系統之波面像差資訊時,在前述帛3製程中% :查淫克多項式,將前述第1製程所得到之波面像差級^ 變㈣數為4階以上)之任意2階旋轉對稱成份 :疋零時,根據前it 2階旋轉對稱成份項之大小 寬差’為了控制前述2階旋轉對稱成 ^二 轉對之大小,能調整前述投影光學二;— 在這種情況下,俞1 β成份項之第12項/ 0%轉對稱成份項係4階cos2 項之第9項二:述旋轉對稱成份項係4階。"份 份項… 之 第9項。 讀對稱成份項係”身0Θ成份項 所-至广月之第1投影光學系統之調整方法係告第1制r 所付到之資訊為投^㈣ 二,1衣红 第1製程係直接量測〜、 面像差之η時’前述 到前述波面像差之資“投影光學系統之波面,藉此能得 、成,或前述第1製程係在各組量測複 1253105 異)與前:第?:圖圖案案(其係配置在前述第1面上,大小相 據該量测結果,也能推之定像二成時之最佳聚焦位置之差’根 來作為前述波面像差之=述2階旋轉對稱成份項之資訊 本發明之第丨投影 程所得到之資m 統之調整方法,係當第1製 述第3製程伟前比^光學系統之波面像差之資訊時,前 2階旋轉對稱成份項;m寬差不是零時,係根據前述 寬差趨近設計值,調整十,十、;;、:述線寬差,為了使前述線 旋轉對稱成份項斑同―:數投影光學系統’以使前述2階 化。 ^ 自數之旋轉對稱成份項之大小最佳 本發明之第1投影弁與 中’透過投影光學系統,:第;之調整方法係在第2製程 投影像)形成在第2面上 之線圖案之空間像( 間像,也能求…線圖案 限於士 _ x ^ 弟2線圖案像之線寬,但不 於此,月1J述第2製程係包含有: 前述Π=,係將前述第第2線圖案之像形成在 边弟2面上所配置之物體上;以及 之前程,係量測第1線寬(係形成在前述物體上 :=線圖案像之線寬)與第2線寬(係形成在前述物 準 像之線見)。即,使用曝光裝置之調 :、、、.先或SEM等,來量測形成在物體上之第丨線圖 線圖案之潛像、光阻像、或㈣像等,能求出該線寬。 12 1253105 ,本I月之第1投影光學系統之調整方法,在前述第3 . 製私中’係藉由構成前述投影光學系統之至少丄個光學元 件之至J 1自由度方向之位置控制及部份光程中之氣體壓 力控制之至少一方,來控制前述第2光學特性之大小。 本發明之第i投影光學系統之調整方法,前述第^線 圖案係縱線圖案’前述第2線圖案係橫線圖案,前述第1 光干特性與第2光學特性係經由對前述縱線圖案像與前述 橫線圖案像分別之線寬變化之查淫克項組合之交叉項中求 出查〉圼克感度之製程、及求出該交叉項中之查淫克感度冑多 號在縱橫線相異之查淫克項彼此項之組合之製程來決定。 本發明之第1投影光學系統之調整方法,前述第】製 :所得到之資訊係前述投影光學系狀波面U之資訊衣 削述第1及第2光學特性係使用查淫克多項式,在將前述 第1製程所得到之波面像差級數展開之複數個查涅克項中 ,係同一階數,且種類相異成份之項。 若從第2觀點來看的話,本發明之第丨曝光方法,係 透過投影光學系統,將第丨面上之電路圖案轉印在第2面春 上所配置之物體上,其包含有: 調整製程,係使用本發明之第丨投影光學系統之調整 方法,來調整前述投影光學系統;以及 正 轉印製程,其係使用前述調整後之投影光學系統,將 如述電路圖案轉印在前述物體上。 若依此的話,因使用本發明之第丨投影光學系統之調 整方法,來調整投影光學系統,故為了使縱線圖案與橫線 , 13 !2531〇5 圖案像之線寬差確實成為設計值,調整投影光學系統。例 ‘ 如,调整投影光學系統,以使同一線寬之縱線圖案與橫線 圖案像之線寬差最小(例如,零)。又,因使用該調整之投 影光學系統,使電路圖案轉印在物體上,故能實現減低縱 線圖案與橫線圖案線寬差之高精度圖案之轉印。 若從第3觀點來看的話,本發明之第丨曝光裝置,係 透過曝光用光學系統,將形成在遮光罩之圖案轉印在物體 上,其特徵在於,備有將使用本發明之第丨投影光學系統 之調整方法來調整之投影光學系統作為前述曝光用光學系、φ 統。 右依此的話,因備有將使用本發明之第丨投影光學 統之調整方法來調整之投影光學系統作為_光用光學系 ’故使用該投影光學系統,將形成在遮光罩之圖案轉印 物體上,藉此能實現減低縱線圖案與橫線圖案線寬差之 精度圖案之轉印。 右從弟4觀點來看的話,本發明係投影光學系統之The size of Zg) can control the phase distribution in the upper and lower directions in the pupil plane, and can adjust the line width difference of the above-mentioned vertical and horizontal lines. The present invention has been made in accordance with the above novel idea of ρ^ Μ 4 obtained by the inventors, and the following methods and configurations are employed. According to the first point of view, the adjustment method of the system is characterized in that the first aspect is characterized in that: the first process includes obtaining information including the former characteristics; and the present invention is the first projection optical system 1 The pattern image on the surface is projected in the first optical of the second optical system... The τ does not grasp, and the eleventh of the orthogonal direction is extended in the predetermined direction arranged on the 16th of the Lishu. The line pattern and the image of the 2-line pattern of the i-th image f/the second line are formed on the second surface, and the line width of the first line pattern image is the same as the second line width (the second line pattern image) Line width); and the difference between the value of the above u and the line width obtained according to the first process, in order to control the influence of the line width difference caused by the interaction with the foregoing 2 Optical characteristics dry ' Μ, adjust the aforementioned projection optical system. What is the big point? b at 'in the second process, you can also use the projection optics Li Tongshi into the first line map. A @ h 兀 糸 , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Alternatively, the line width difference may be measured after the image of the i-th line pattern is formed. Θ If this is the case, for example, in order to control the size of the easily configurable size, the projection optics and system can be adjusted, so that it is possible to control the adjustment of the first two systems due to the projection optical system. Poor (and thus generated). Therefore, it is possible to freely control the line width difference between the line patterns of the special time. In the case where the aforementioned i-th q projection is the wavefront aberration information of the system, in the above-mentioned 帛3 process, %: the singularity polynomial, which is obtained by the first process Any two-order rotational symmetry component of the wavefront aberration level (fourth number is 4 or more): when 疋zero, according to the width difference of the front-order second-order rotational symmetry component term, in order to control the aforementioned second-order rotational symmetry into two The size of the pair can be adjusted to the aforementioned projection optics 2; in this case, the 12th item of the β 1 component item / 0% of the symmetry component is the ninth item of the 4th order cos2 term: the rotationally symmetric component The item is 4th order. "Parts... Item 9. Reading the symmetrical component system "body 0 Θ component item - to the adjustment method of the first projection optical system of Guangyue is the first system r information is the investment ^ (four) two, one clothing red first process direct quantity When measuring η and η of the aberration, the above-mentioned wavefront of the wavefront aberration of the projection optical system can be obtained, or the first process can be measured in each group and the previous measurement: The first? : The pattern pattern (which is arranged on the first surface, and the size can be compared with the measurement result, and the difference between the best focus positions at the time of fixing the image can be pushed as the root wave aberration) Information on the second-order rotationally symmetric component term The adjustment method of the second-order projection process obtained by the third projection process of the present invention is the first one when the information of the wavefront aberration of the third process is compared with that of the optical system. The order of the rotationally symmetric component; when the m-width difference is not zero, the tenth, ten, and;;;: the line width difference is adjusted according to the width difference approaching the design value, in order to make the line rotationally symmetric component item The projection optical system 'is to be 2nd-ordered. ^ The size of the rotationally symmetric component of the number is optimal. The first projection of the present invention and the 'transmission projection optical system: the adjustment method is based on the second process projection. Like the space image of the line pattern formed on the second surface (interimage, the line pattern can also be determined by the line width of the line pattern of the _x^^2 line, but this is not the case, the second process system is described in the month 1J. The method includes: the foregoing Π=, wherein the image of the second line pattern is formed on the side of the two brothers On the object; and the previous process, measuring the first line width (formed on the object: = line width of the line pattern image) and the second line width (formed on the line of the aforementioned object image). The line width can be obtained by measuring the latent image, the photoresist image, or the (four) image of the imaginary line pattern formed on the object using the adjustment of the exposure device: , , , , or SEM. 12 1253105, the method for adjusting the first projection optical system of the first month, in the third aspect of the invention, is to control the position of the at least one optical element of the projection optical system to the J 1 degree of freedom direction and At least one of the gas pressure control in the partial optical path controls the magnitude of the second optical characteristic. In the method of adjusting the i-th projection optical system of the present invention, the second line pattern is a longitudinal line pattern of the second line pattern. In the line pattern, the first light-drying characteristic and the second optical characteristic are obtained by the intersection of the combination of the vertical line pattern and the transverse line pattern image. Process, and find the degree of sensation in the cross The plurality of numbers are determined by a process in which the vertical and horizontal lines are different from each other. The first projection optical system adjustment method of the present invention is the first system: the obtained information is the projection optical system wavefront U The first and second optical characteristics of the information clothing are based on the singularity polynomial, and the plurality of Chanek terms in which the wavefront aberration series obtained in the first process is developed are the same order and the type According to the second aspect, the ninth exposure method of the present invention transfers the circuit pattern on the second side to the object disposed on the second surface through the projection optical system. The method includes: adjusting a process, using the adjustment method of the second projection optical system of the present invention to adjust the projection optical system; and a positive transfer process, which uses the adjusted projection optical system, and the circuit is as described The pattern is transferred onto the aforementioned object. According to this, since the projection optical system is adjusted by using the adjustment method of the second projection optical system of the present invention, in order to make the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line, the line width difference of the 13 ? 2531 〇 5 pattern image becomes a design value. , adjust the projection optical system. Example ‘ For example, adjust the projection optical system so that the line width difference between the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line pattern of the same line width is the smallest (for example, zero). Further, since the circuit pattern is transferred onto the object by using the projection optical system of the adjustment, the transfer of the high-precision pattern which reduces the line width difference between the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line pattern can be realized. According to the third aspect, the third exposure apparatus of the present invention transmits the pattern formed on the hood to the object through the optical system for exposure, and is characterized in that the third embodiment of the present invention is used. The projection optical system adjusted by the adjustment method of the projection optical system is used as the optical system for exposure and the φ system. In this case, since the projection optical system to be adjusted by the adjustment method of the ninth projection optical system of the present invention is used as the optical system for optical use, the projection optical system is used to transfer the pattern formed on the hood. On the object, the transfer of the precision pattern which reduces the line width difference between the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line pattern can be realized. From the point of view of the brother 4, the present invention is a projection optical system.

:調整方法’係將第丨面上之圖案像投影在第2面上; 特徵在於,包含: =製程,係取得包含前述投影光學系統之第^ 符性之貧訊;以及 學特程’係根據前述第1製程所得収前述第 方值、與第i線圖案(係在前述第i面上所配置U 交Η二伸差寬與第2線圖案(係與前述第1線圖案』 為了控制由於與前述第1光學特性之相互子 14 1253105 用而使前述第2面上所形成之前述第i線圖案像線寬與前 述第2線圖案像線寬之線寬差受影響之第2光學特性之大 小’調整前述投影光學系統。 若依此的話,則根據第丨光學特性之值、與第丨線圖 案與第2線圖案線寬之差,為了控制第2光學特性(係由於 弟1光學特性之相互作用,而影響線寬差,其係藉由投影 光學系統,形成在前述第2面上之前述第i線圖案像之線 寬與前述第2線圖案線寬之差)之大小,調整投影光學系統 ,因此,It由投影光料、統,形成在第2面上之第i線圖 案像之線寬與第2線圖案線像線寬之差(線寬差),因第玉 面上之第1線圖案線寬與第2線圖案線寬之差而產生時, 例如,因遮光罩上圖案之描晝誤差等起因而產生時,能自 由控制正交線圖案彼此之線寬差。 在這種情況下,前述第1線圖案係縱線圖案,前述第 2線圖案係橫線圖案,前述第i光學特性與第2光學特性 係經由對前述縱線圖案像與前述橫線圖案像 查淫克項組合之交又項中求出查^感度之製程、、: = 違义又項中之查涅克感度符號在縱橫線相異之杳涅克項彼 此組合之製程來決定。 一見員彼 ,,2第5觀點來看的話’本發明之第2曝光方法,係 透U又〜光予系統’將第!面上之電路圖案轉印在第2面 上所配置之物體上,其特徵在於,包含有: 調整製程,係使用本發明之第 方法’來調整前述投影光’、^糸統之調整 15 1253105 轉印製程,係使用前述調整後之投影光學系統,將前 述電路圖案轉印在前述物體上。 ^ 若依此的話,因使用本發明第2投影光學系統之調整 方法,來调整投影光學系統,例如,因遮光罩上圖案之护 畫誤差等起因而產生藉由投影光學系統,形成在前述第1 面上之前述第1線圖案像之線寬與前述第2線圖案線寬之 差(線寬差)時,進行投影光學系統之調整,以使自由=制 正交線圖案彼此之線寬差,因使用該調整之投影光學系統: The adjustment method 'projects the pattern image on the second surface on the second surface; and the feature includes: = the process, the acquisition of the first part of the projection optical system; and the special course ' According to the first process, the first square value and the i-th line pattern (the U-intersection width and the second line pattern (the first line pattern) are arranged on the ith surface. The second optical which is affected by the line width between the i-th line pattern image line formed on the second surface and the line width of the second line pattern image is used for the mutual optical element 14 1253105 of the first optical characteristic. The size of the characteristic 'adjusts the projection optical system. According to this, the second optical characteristic is controlled according to the difference between the value of the second optical characteristic and the line width of the second line pattern and the second line pattern. The interaction of the optical characteristics affects the line width difference, which is the difference between the line width of the i-th line pattern image and the line width of the second line pattern formed on the second surface by the projection optical system) , adjusting the projection optical system, therefore, It is projected light The difference between the line width of the i-th line pattern image on the second surface and the line width of the second line pattern line (line width difference), the first line pattern line width on the first jade surface and the second line When the difference in line width of the line pattern occurs, for example, when a trace error of the pattern on the hood is generated, the line width difference between the orthogonal line patterns can be freely controlled. In this case, the first line is The pattern is a vertical line pattern, and the second line pattern is a horizontal line pattern, and the ith optical characteristic and the second optical characteristic are combined with each other by the combination of the vertical line pattern image and the horizontal line pattern image. Find the process of checking the sensitivity, and: = The sign of the Chanek sensitivity in the violation of the term is determined by the process of combining the Nike items with each other in the vertical and horizontal lines. See you, 2, 5 points In the second exposure method of the present invention, the circuit pattern on the second surface is transferred to the object disposed on the second surface by the U-lighting system, and includes: an adjustment process, The method of the present invention is used to adjust the aforementioned projection light, and the adjustment of the system 15 1553105 In the transfer process, the circuit pattern is transferred onto the object by using the adjusted projection optical system. ^ According to this, the projection optical system is adjusted by using the adjustment method of the second projection optical system of the present invention. For example, the difference between the line width of the first line pattern image formed on the first surface and the line width of the second line pattern by the projection optical system due to an image error or the like of the pattern on the hood (line In the case of the width difference, the adjustment of the projection optical system is performed so that the line width of the free-form orthogonal line patterns is different from each other due to the use of the adjusted projection optical system

將電路圖案轉印在物體上,故能實現減低縱線圖案與橫線 圖案線寬差之高精度圖案轉印。 若從第6觀點來看的話,本發明之第2曝光裝置,係 透過曝光用光學系統,將形成在遮光罩之圖案轉印在物體 上其特彳玫在於,備有:係將使用本發明第2投影光學系 統之調整方法來調整之投影光學系統作為前述曝光用光學 糸統。 若依此的話,因備有將使用本發明第2投影光學系統 之調整方法來調整之投影光學系統作為曝光用光學系統, 故使用投影光學系統,將形成在遮光罩之圖案轉印在物體 上 精此此實現減低縱線圖案與橫線圖案線寬差之高精度 之圖案之轉印。 若從第7觀點來看的話,本發明之第3投影光學系統 之調整方法,係將第1面上之圖案像投影在第2面上,其 特徵在於,包含有: 取得前述投影光學系統之波面像差資訊之製程; 16 l253l〇5 取得有關前述圖案之投影像資訊之製程’ ·以及 调整製程,係使用杳 級數展n I 一 夕項式,在將前述波面像差 投$ # # 一 項之中,該相互作用係在使前述 杈衫像特性受影響之任咅 牡仗則述 慮杳涅声戌声f + ^ “ /克項之組合之交叉項中,考 一圼克感度對則述投影像 光學系統。 7 , I交化來调整丽述投影 右依此的話,目I丨台t p f , ,日& 仔到投影光學系統波面像差之資m ,且能得到有關圖案投影像 之貝。扎 ,來哨单iR旦/上 ' 並且,根據這些資訊 來调整投影先學系統之際 述波面像差級數展門„ 克多項式’將前 作用而使前述投影像特性受影響之任意 = 交又項中,考慮杳、、 見員之、、且^之 ^ 一 /克感度對前述投影像特性之變化,% 整前述投影光學系統。 〜之-化肩 方法中,習知所未考廣 ^ 广衫光學系統之調整 特性受影響之任意查-克項之組合之交又項中=! 克感度對前述投影像特性之變化,碉整_ 一土 ,故習知調整困難之像w述投影光學系統 成份等,能,整浐- ”’例如’也能調整高階像差 = 使圖案像之形成狀態更 像=::::=包,*時,投影 若觀點來看的話=本發明 係透過投影光學系統,將第丨 W弟1面上之電路圖案 面上所配置之物體上,其特徵在於,包含: 弟2 17 1253105 调整製程,係使用本發明之帛3投影光學系統之調整 方法,來調整前述投影光學系統;以及 轉印製程,係使用#述調整後之投影光學系統,將前 述電路圖案轉印在前述物體上。 若依此的話,因使用本發明之第3投影光學系統之調 整方法’來調整前述投影光學系統,故進行投影光學系統 之調整,以使圖案像之形成狀態更佳,因使用該調整之投 影光學系、统’將電路圖案轉印在物體上,故能實現高精度 圖案之轉印。 若從第9觀點來看的話,本發明之第3曝光裝置,係 透過曝光用光學系統,將形成在遮光罩之圖案轉印在物體 上,其特徵在於,備有:將使用本發明第3投影光學系統 之調整方法來調整之投影光學系統作為前述曝光用光學系 統。 若依本發明的話,因備有將使用本發明第3投影光學 系統之調整方法來調整之投影光學系統作為前述曝光用光 學系統,故使用該光學系統,將形成在遮光罩之圖案轉印 在物體上,藉此能實現高精度圖案之轉印。 若從第10觀點來看的話,本發明係第4曝光裝置,係 用能ϊ束來照明第丨面上所配置之圖案,透過投影光學系 統,將前述圖案轉印在f 2面上所配置之物體上,其特徵 在於,備有: ' 光學特性量測裝置,係、量測光學特性(包含前述投Μ 學糸統之弟1光學特性); 18 1253105 1⑥次見里測裝置,係分別量測第1線圖案(兑俜在^叶一 1面上所配置 口未匕、係在刖述弟 與前述第^= 伸)之線寬與第2線圖案(其係 1弟1線圖案正交)之線寬之差; 像形成狀態調整裝置,係調 案像之形成狀態;以及 “这技“學糸統之圖 控制裝置’係根據前述光 述第1光學特性之值、盘第破置所$測之前 所量測之m 。弟1線寬(係用前述線寬量測裝置 、則迷第1線圖案像之線寬)盘筮9綠々 2綠Ft安A 深見)與弟2線寬(係前述第 辑二線寬)之差,使用前述像形成狀態調整裝置來 2光學特性(係由於與前光學㈣之相互作用 而使則述線寬差受影響)之大小。 作用 光學::ΓΛΒ:的話,則能藉由光學特性量測震置來量測 2 投影光㈣&至少帛^光學特性)。又, 耩由線丸量測裝置,分別量測 與㈣“ 弟1線圖案(其係藉由投影光 子糸統’在苐2面(像面) )所化成之苐1面(物體面)上,在 =向延伸)與第2線圖案(與第1線圖案正交)像之線寬 二…使用線寬量測裝置之線寬量測也可量測形成在第 面上所配置之物體上之縱線圖案與橫線圖案之轉印像(潛 阻像、蝕刻像)之線寬,也可將縱線圖案與橫線圖案 之空間像形成在第2面上,來量測該空間像之線寬。 , k制哀置’當用光學特性量測裝置所量測第i光 學特性存在時,係根據該第1光學特性之值、及第i線寬( 係::寬量測裝置所量測之前述第1線圖案像之線寬)與第 2線寬U逑第2線圖案像之練寬)之差(線寬差),使用像形 19 1253105 成狀恶凋整裝置,來控制因與第 線寬差受影響先子特性相互作用而使 罘2九學特性之大小。 因此,例如,即使係第丨 性之情形,你丨a 先子特性调整困難之光學特 調整容易之第2光=::::繼態調整裝置,來控制 性之存在所起因而產生之^差藉此能控制fl光學特 口此,用能量束來照明第丨面 投影光學李續—丄 上所配置之圖案,透過 糸、、先(係稭由像形成狀離 特性後),將j m φ ^ 〜、凋查裒置,調整第2光學 將该圖案轉印在第2面上 能實現有效減低正交之線圖案轉印像# 體上,藉此 好曝光。 〃轉P像彼此間之線寬差之良 在這種情況下,前述光 影光學系統之波面像差之波 '里測裳置係量測前述投 面像差置测裝置。 在延種情況下,前述第丨 式係將前述波面像差量測農置所量 使用查淫克多項 之查涅克項中”皆以上之任▲ 川之波面像差級數展開 述第2光學特性係前述2階::;::轉對稱成份項,前 旋轉對稱成份項。 褥對無成份項與同一階數之 成二稱成份項係…Θ 係4階0Θ成份之第9項。壬項,前述旋轉對稱成份項 本發明之第4曝光妒f 儿 空間像量測器,係量測;=線2寬量測裝置也能包含 之投影像,且前述線寬量剛裝面上之則述各圖案 也此包含攝影裝置,係拍 20 1253105 攝形成在前述第2面上所配置之物體上之像。 · 本t明之第4曝光裝置,前述像形成狀態調整裝置係 處在構成前述投影光學系統之至少i個光學元件之至少1 ▲又方向之位置调整、_部份光程中之氣體壓力之調整 /述肊!束之波長偏移量之調整、以及有關前述圖案所 :成之圖案形成構件及前述物體之至少一方之前述投影光 予糸:::軸方向之調整中,至少進行一種調整。 心“右^第1 1觀點來看的話,係一種預測方法,係透過投 ^學系統來預測圖案像之特性,其特徵在於,包含預測參 ^ 係根據複數項(係分別包含使用既定之式,將前述投 =予系統之波面像差級數展開所得到之各像差成份)之線 生:合,在既定曝光條件下,算出變動曲線(係表示有關透 過前述投影光學系統所投影之既定圖案之像,前述像之大 對來自取佳聚焦位置之散焦量之變動),根據前述所算出 之移動量來預測前述變動曲線。 當透過投影光學系統來轉印圖案時,可以瞭解該圖案 ^大小係根據來自該轉印位置之最佳聚焦位置之散焦4籲 \麦動,表示该變動之變動曲線(即,所謂之CD-聚焦曲線 二口技衫光學系統之波面像差而變化。又,投影光學系統 ^波面像差係使用既定之式(例如,查涅克多項式),來進 订級數展開,藉此在複數個查涅克項(像差成份項),能加 以分解。 從兔明者等專心研究之結果可瞭解,在分別包含上述 查/里克項之係數(即,像差成份)之複數項線性結合之值、 21 1253105 與^關透過投影光學系統所投影之圖案像之前述變動曲線 之變化(即,把散隹|月闰安 ^ …、及圖案像大小當作各座標轴之座標系 、、先上之散焦量方向及傻女士 a 像大小方向之該變動曲線之平行移動) ’有密切之關係。 右依本發明之預測方法的話,則利用上述之關 係’不必使用需要許多 ,,—丄 。十汁時間之複雜計算所帶來之成像 項線性結合之值),在透;包含像差成㈣ 透α 4又影光學系統(處於既定像差狀 恶)之既定曝光條件下, Γη ^ ^ 此用紐時間來預測有關該圖案之 ^ ^ 頂則、、、口果,能用短時間預測圖案之 才又衫像(或轉印像)之特性。 在這種情況下,能 ^ 此進一步包含使所求出之變動曲線 似咼階函數之製程,1传义 定曝光條件下,假定前1迷預測製程之前,在前述既 出,係藉由模擬來求出表mu n差之形求 動之變動曲線。 •之大小對前述散焦量變 ::種情況下,前述預測製程係根據 係在則述既定曝光條件下, 成知( 量之感度當作各係數)之線性結合: :: =述散焦 之前述散焦量方向之蒋韌旦± 4欠轫曲綠 里’根據前述各像差成 述既定曝光條件下, 1差成知(係在則 小變化之感度當作各係數)平方=成伤之平方對前述像大 )十方之線性結合,管屮古1弓"^丄 變動㈣之前述像大小變化方向之移動量。有關則述 如“ ’變動曲線之移動能分解為有關表示散焦量之 22 12531〇5 :由:向(散焦量軸方向)曲線之移動、與有關 J、之軸方向(像大小軸方向)之蒋叙女«木像大 變動曲線夕❹+ 有關散焦量軸方向之 像展開投影光學系統之波面像差時之夂 二成㈠,有感度,藉由各像差成份之線性結合; :丨=多動量。X,有關像大小之轴方向變 ‘在 =成份之平方中,有感度,藉由各像差成份平::: 生、、口 s ’能預測該移動量。 、7 在這種情況下,前述預測製程係根據前By transferring the circuit pattern onto the object, it is possible to realize high-precision pattern transfer which reduces the difference in line width between the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line pattern. According to the sixth aspect, the second exposure apparatus of the present invention transmits the pattern formed on the hood to the object through the optical system for exposure, and is provided with the present invention. A projection optical system adjusted by the adjustment method of the second projection optical system is used as the optical system for exposure. According to this, since the projection optical system adjusted by the adjustment method of the second projection optical system of the present invention is provided as the exposure optical system, the projection optical system is used to transfer the pattern formed on the hood to the object. This achieves a high-precision pattern transfer which reduces the line width difference between the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line pattern. According to the seventh aspect, the third projection optical system adjustment method of the present invention projects the pattern image on the first surface onto the second surface, and includes: acquiring the projection optical system The process of wavefront aberration information; 16 l253l〇5 The process of obtaining the image information of the aforementioned pattern's and the adjustment process is to use the 杳 series to display the n I eve item, and cast the wavefront aberration by $## In one item, the interaction is in the cross-term of the combination of the 杳 戌 戌 f + + + + + + + + f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f For the description of the projection optical system. 7 , I Intersection to adjust the projections of the right side of the projection, according to the words, the target tpf, , the day & to the projection optical system wavefront aberration m, and can get the relevant pattern Cast the image of the shell. Tie, come to the whistle iR Dan / on ' And, based on this information to adjust the projection of the system of the first wave of the wavefront aberration series „ 克 polynomial’ will act to make the aforementioned image characteristics Arbitrary influence = in the balance, consider 杳, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 化 ^ ^ ^ 化 化 ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学 光学The whole _ a soil, so the conventional adjustment of the difficulty of the image of the projection optical system, etc., can, the whole 浐 - "for example, can also adjust the high-order aberration = make the pattern like the formation state more like =::::= When the package is *, the projection is based on the viewpoint. The present invention is based on the object disposed on the circuit pattern surface on the first side of the second side through the projection optical system, and is characterized in that: 2: 12,123,105,105 The process is to adjust the projection optical system using the adjustment method of the 投影3 projection optical system of the present invention; and the transfer process, wherein the circuit pattern is transferred onto the object by using the adjusted projection optical system. According to this, since the projection optical system is adjusted by using the adjustment method of the third projection optical system of the present invention, the projection optical system is adjusted so that the pattern image is formed better, and the adjustment is used. The shadow optical system and the system "transfer the circuit pattern on the object, so that the high-precision pattern can be transferred. From the ninth point of view, the third exposure device of the present invention transmits the optical system for exposure. The pattern formed on the hood is transferred onto the object, and the projection optical system adjusted by the adjustment method of the third projection optical system of the present invention is used as the exposure optical system. Since the projection optical system adjusted by the adjustment method of the third projection optical system of the present invention is used as the exposure optical system, the optical system is used to transfer the pattern formed on the hood to the object. The transfer of the high-precision pattern is achieved. According to the tenth point of view, the fourth exposure apparatus of the present invention is capable of illuminating the pattern disposed on the second surface by means of a beam, and transferring the pattern through the projection optical system. It is printed on an object arranged on the surface of the f 2 and is characterized by: ' Optical characteristics measuring device, system, measuring optical characteristics (including the aforementioned brother of the Μ Μ 1 1 Optical characteristics); 18 1253105 16 times to see the measuring device, the first line pattern is measured separately (the 口 俜 ^ ^ ^ ^ 一 一 ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ The line width is different from the line width of the second line pattern (which is orthogonal to the 1st line pattern); the image forming state adjusting device is a state in which the image is formed; and the image control device of the technique 'Based on the value of the first optical characteristic of the above-mentioned optical system, and the measured m before the disk is broken. The line width is 1 line width (the line width measuring device is used, and the line of the first line pattern image is used) Width) 筮 9 green 々 2 green Ft ampere A deep view) and brother 2 line width (the aforementioned second series line width) difference, using the above image formation state adjustment device to 2 optical characteristics (because of the front optical (four) The size of the interaction is such that the line width difference is affected. Function Optics::ΓΛΒ: It can be measured by optical characteristic measurement. 2 Projection light (4) & at least 光学^ optical characteristics). In addition, 耩 is measured by the line pill measuring device, and (4) "1" line pattern (which is formed by the projection photon ' system on the 苐2 surface (image surface)) The line width is equal to the second line pattern (orthogonal to the first line pattern). The line width measurement using the line width measuring device can also measure the object formed on the first surface. The line between the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line pattern (the latent image or the etched image) is wide, and the space image of the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line pattern may be formed on the second surface to measure the space. The width of the image line is the same as the value of the first optical characteristic and the ith line width when the measurement of the ith optical characteristic is performed by the optical characteristic measuring device (system: wide measurement) The difference between the line width of the first line pattern image measured by the device and the width of the second line width U逑 second line pattern image (line width difference) is formed by the image shape 19 1253105 To control the size of the 学2 学 特性 characteristics due to the interaction with the affected line characteristics of the first line width difference. Therefore, for example, even if it is the case of the third degree, you 丨a The first light is easy to adjust the optical characteristics of the first sub-feature adjustment =:::: The state-adjusting device, which is caused by the existence of controllability, thereby controlling the fl-op optical port, using the energy beam To illuminate the plane of the pupil plane projection optical continuation - the pattern arranged on the ,, through the 糸, first (after the straw is formed by the image), the jm φ ^ ~, the inspection, set the second optics The pattern is transferred on the second surface to effectively reduce the orthogonal line pattern transfer image on the body, thereby achieving good exposure. The P-images are good in line width difference between each other. In this case, the aforementioned light and shadow The wavefront aberration wave of the optical system is measured by the above-mentioned projection surface aberration measuring device. In the case of extension, the aforementioned third-order system uses the aforementioned wavefront aberration measurement to measure the amount of use of the device. In the case of a plurality of Chanek items, the above-mentioned two-dimensional optical characteristics are the above-mentioned second order::;:: the symmetrical component, the former rotationally symmetric component.褥 The component of the unordered component and the same order is called the ninth term of the 4th order 0 component. The above-mentioned rotationally symmetric component item is the fourth exposure 妒f spatial image measuring device of the present invention, and is measured; the line 2 wide measuring device can also include the projection image, and the aforementioned line width amount is just mounted on the surface. Each of the patterns also includes a photographing device, and photographs 20 1253105 to form an image formed on the object disposed on the second surface. In the fourth exposure apparatus of the present invention, the image forming state adjusting device is configured to adjust at least one of the at least one optical elements constituting the projection optical system, and to adjust the gas pressure in the partial optical path. Hey! The adjustment of the wavelength shift amount of the beam and the projection light of at least one of the pattern forming member and the object related to the pattern are at least one type of adjustment in the adjustment of the axial direction. The heart "the right ^1 point of view, is a prediction method, is to predict the characteristics of the pattern image through the projection system, which is characterized by including the prediction parameters according to the plural items (the system includes the use of the established formula And calculating the variation curve under the predetermined exposure condition by the projection of each of the aberration components obtained by expanding the wavefront aberration series of the system (refer to the predetermined projection through the projection optical system) The image of the pattern, the larger of the image, the change from the defocus amount of the better focus position, and the change curve is predicted based on the calculated amount of movement. When the pattern is transferred through the projection optical system, the pattern can be known. The size is based on the defocusing of the best focus position from the transfer position, indicating the variation curve of the variation (i.e., the wavefront aberration of the so-called CD-focus curve binocular optical system). Moreover, the projection optical system ^ wavefront aberration system uses a predetermined formula (for example, Chaneco polynomial) to advance the series expansion, thereby using a plurality of Chanek terms (aberration components) Can be decomposed. From the results of intensive research by the rabbit Ming and others, we can understand the value of the linear combination of the complex terms including the coefficients of the above-mentioned check/Rick terms (ie, the aberration components), 21 1253105 and The variation of the aforementioned variation pattern of the pattern image projected by the optical system (that is, the divergence | 闰 闰 ^, and the size of the pattern image as the coordinate system of each coordinate axis, the defocus amount direction and the silly lady a "parallel movement of the variation curve like the size direction" 'has a close relationship. Right according to the prediction method of the present invention, the relationship described above is utilized, and it is not necessary to use a lot, - 丄. Complex calculation of ten juice time The value of the linear combination of the imaging terms) is in the range of exposures; the aberrations are included in the (4) transparent optical system (in the established aberrations), Γη ^ ^ The pattern ^ ^ top, , and the fruit, can predict the pattern of the shirt (or transfer image) in a short time. In this case, it can further include the variation curve obtained. Like order The process of the number, under the condition of 1 set of exposure, assumes that before the previous forecasting process, in the above-mentioned, the simulation is to obtain the variation curve of the shape of the difference of the table mu n. Quantitative change:: In the case of the above, the above-mentioned prediction process is based on the linear combination of the known exposure conditions (the sensitivity of the quantity as the coefficients): :: = Defocusing the above-mentioned defocus amount direction Toughness ± 4 轫 轫 绿 绿 ' 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据 根据The linear combination of the ten parties, the change of the direction of the magnitude of the change in the shape of the above-mentioned changes in the "1" of the bow, and the change in the direction of the change in the magnitude of the image. For example, "the movement of the change curve can be decomposed into the relevant defocus amount 22 12531〇5 : From: the movement of the curve to the direction of the defocusing axis, and the direction of the axis of the axis of J (the direction of the axis of the axis). 20% of the wavefront aberration of the projection optical system (1), with sensitivity By linear combination of various aberration components; : 丨 = multi-momentum. X, the direction of the axis of the image size changes ‘in the square of the component, there is sensitivity, and the amount of movement can be predicted by the aberration components::: raw, and s ’. , 7 In this case, the aforementioned prediction process is based on the former

::前:ί:差r分平方之線性結合,在前述既定: 、則述既疋曝光條件下之前述像之大小變化之方向 ’將彼此相異之像差成份彼此間之交又項 二 之物之線性結合,算出有關前述變動曲線 = 變化之移動量。 像大小 有關像大小軸方向之變動曲線之移動,不僅在各像差 成份平方有感纟,而且在彼此相異之像差成份彼此間之交 ,項:,有感⑨,若進一步考慮這些交叉項之線性結合: 話,就能進一步高精度地預測像大小軸方向之移動量。 在本發明之預測方法中,前述高階函數係只由偶數階 項所構成之函數。 一在本發明之預測方法中,前述預測製程係根據分別包 含前述各像差成份之複數項之線性結合,算出前述變動曲 線之前述波面像差所起因之變形情況,根據前述移動量及 前述變形情況,能預測前述變動曲線。在這種情況下,不 僅能算出變動曲線之移動量,並且根據包含各像差成份項 23 1253105 之線性結合,也能算出投影光學系統之波面像差所起因 變動曲線之變形情況,能更高 之口之 ._ 積度地預測變動曲線。 種情況下,在前述預測製程之前,進一步勺人 所求出之變動曲線近似高階函數之製程, 吏 曝光條件下,假定前述投影 二…、,j^既定 曲線。 幻對則述散焦量變動之變動 社攻禋情況下,在前述預測製 〜w 逆一少R冬::Pre-: ί: The linear combination of the difference r-squares, in the above-mentioned::, the direction of the change of the size of the aforementioned image under the condition of exposure, the difference between the aberration components that are different from each other and the second The linear combination of the objects calculates the amount of movement related to the aforementioned variation curve = change. The movement of the curve of the magnitude of the image in the direction of the size axis is not only the square of each aberration component, but also the intersection of the aberration components that are different from each other. Item:, feel 9, if further consideration of these intersections Linear combination of terms: In this case, the amount of movement in the direction of the size axis can be predicted with higher precision. In the prediction method of the present invention, the aforementioned higher order function is a function composed only of even order terms. In the prediction method of the present invention, the prediction process calculates a deformation caused by the wavefront aberration of the variation curve based on a linear combination of a plurality of items including the aberration components, respectively, based on the amount of movement and the deformation. In the case, the aforementioned variation curve can be predicted. In this case, not only the amount of movement of the variation curve can be calculated, but also the linear combination of the aberration components 23153105 can calculate the deformation of the variation curve of the wavefront aberration of the projection optical system, which can be higher. The mouth of the ._ cumulatively predicts the change curve. In the case of the above-mentioned prediction process, the variation curve obtained by the further scooping person approximates the process of the higher-order function, and under the exposure condition, the aforementioned projections are assumed to be two..., j^. The illusion is the change of the defocus amount. In the case of the social attack, the prediction system is ~w reversed and less R winter.

出裝私,係透過實際像差狀能 在狀心之刖述投影光學系統, 述既定曝光條件下,算出有 山3關被才又影之前述圖案像之 變動曲線;前述預測芻鞀 ' 疋m矛王係在前述波面像差所起因之前 變動曲線之變動情況下’求出高階函數(係使根據前述移 量所移動之移動曲線近似)與差份函數(係表示用前述算 製程所求出之變動曲線函數之差份)。 在這種情況下,前述算出製程係藉由模擬來進行。 本毛明之預測方法係在前述預測製程中,在前述波面In the case of the installation of the private image, the projection optical system can be described in the shape of the actual aberration, and the variation curve of the pattern image with the shadow of the mountain 3 is calculated under the predetermined exposure conditions; the prediction 刍鼗' 疋The m spear king system obtains a high-order function (approximation of the movement curve moved according to the above-mentioned shift amount) and a difference function in the case of the variation of the fluctuation curve before the wavefront aberration occurs (the system represents the calculation by the aforementioned calculation process) The difference between the change curve function). In this case, the aforementioned calculation process is performed by simulation. Ben Maoming's prediction method is in the aforementioned prediction process, in the aforementioned wavefront

像差所起因之前述變動曲線之變動情況下,求出高階函數( 係使根據前述移動量所銘說4 μ π & 軔里所移動之變動曲線近似)與差份函數( 係表示用前述算出製程所求出之變動曲線函數之差份)時, 前述預測製程係根據前述各像差成份(係在前㈣定曝光條 件下將刖述各像差成份之平方對前述差份函數之偶數階 項之感度當作各係數)平方之線性結合,算出有關前述差份 函數之該偶數階項之係數’根據前述各像差成份(係在前述 既定曝光條件下,將前述各像差成份對前述差份函數之奇 24 1253105 數階項之感度當作各係數)之線性結合,算出前述差份函數 之該奇數階項之係數。在這種情況下,表示變動函數之變 形情況之差份函數之偶數階項之係數,在展開投影光學系 統之波面像差時之各像差成份平方中,有感度,藉由各像 f成份平方之線性結合,能預測該係數。又,差份函數之 奇數階項之係數在各像差成份中’有感度’藉由各像差成 份之線性結合,能預測該係數。目此,關於變動曲線之變 形情況’係使用包含投影光學系統之波面像差之各像差成 知項之線性結合等,能用短時間且高精度地進行預測。 一本發明之預測方法,前述既定之式係查涅克多項式, 珂述各像差成份係各查涅克項之係數。 若從第12觀點來看的話,本發明係第i評價方法係 透過投影光學系統來評價圖案像特性,其特徵在於,包含 預測製程’係針對前述投影光學系統之有效視野内之 =少1個= 則點’使用本發明之測測方法,在既定曝光條 關Ui則述投影光學系統,來預測變動曲線(係表示有 ^ d點之既定圖案像,前述像大小 對來自取佳1焦位置之散焦量之變動);以及 評價製程,係根;^ #、+、, 营綠^ 據刖述預測結果,來評價前述既定圖 案像之特性。 右依第1評價方法的 、纟目财& 、 的話’則能針對投影光學系統之有 效視野内之至少丨個 續 〗點’能高精度地預測上述變動曲 線(係有關㈣本發日月之_方法,在既定曝光條件下,透 25 1253105 線 過投影光學系統所投影之既定圖案像),故根據該變動曲深 ’能高精度地評價投影光學系統之有效視野内之既定圖案 像之特性。 在這種情況下,前述既定圖案係對應前述投影光學系、 統之有效視野内之各複數個量測點來配置,前述特性係勺 含剞述投影光學系統之有效視野内之前述像之均句十生 本發明之第1評價方法,前述既定圖案係包含2個線 ㈣’係與前述投影光學系統之光軸方向正交之平面上; 叹置之彼此正交,前述預測製程能在各前述線圖案, 前述變動曲線。 j 在這種情況下’前述評價方法’就前述像之特一 ,能評價線圖案像彼此之線寬差。這種情形,在二 量測點中,就前述特性而言’例>,能評價 :4 差所造成之正交之2個線圖案彼此之線寬差。 政像 至於本發明之第丨評價方法,复 2個線圖t,係與前述投影光學系統之光案嶋 面上所設置之彼此乂 方向正父之平 又置之彼此正父,前述預測製程 案預測前述變動曲線。 ’、此在各前述線圖 ^種情況下,前述評價製程係 之線寬差來作為前述像特性。這 Λ相案像彼此 形像差所造成之線寬異常值等來作為? ’能評價主要因慧 若從第13觀點來看的話,本發明U像特性。 調整透過投影光學系統之圖 ,、弟1調整方法,係 ’包含: 、形成狀態,其特徵在於 26 1253105 應程’係使用本發明之帛1評價方法,來評價對 置:既:二光學系統之有效視野内之至少1個量測點所配 置之既疋圖案像之特性;以及 調 系統, 整製程,係根據前述評價結果’透過前述投影光學 來調整前述既定圖案像之形成狀態。 ’干 右依第1 S周整方法的話,則使用本發明第 ,評價投影光學系統之有效視野内之至少 ;:既 定圖案像特性,根據該評價社果,透過前、κ、έ之既 f U透過則述投影光學系統In the case of the variation of the aforementioned variation curve caused by the aberration, the higher-order function (the approximation of the variation curve of the movement of 4 μ π & 轫 in accordance with the amount of movement described above) and the difference function are obtained. When calculating the difference between the variation curve functions obtained by the process, the prediction process is based on the aforementioned aberration components (the square of each aberration component is described as the even number of the difference function under the pre- (four) exposure conditions. The sensitivity of the order term is linearly combined as the square of each coefficient, and the coefficient of the even-order term of the difference function is calculated. According to the aforementioned aberration components (the aforementioned aberration components are obtained under the aforementioned predetermined exposure conditions) The sensitivity of the odd-order function of the odd-order 24 1253105 is calculated as a linear combination of the coefficients, and the coefficients of the odd-order terms of the difference function are calculated. In this case, the coefficient of the even-order term of the difference function representing the deformation of the variation function has a sensitivity in the square of each aberration component when the wavefront aberration of the projection optical system is developed, and the image f component The linear combination of squares can predict this coefficient. Further, the coefficient of the odd-order term of the difference function can be predicted by linearly combining the components of the aberrations in the respective aberration components by the linear combination of the aberration components. In the case of the deformation of the variation curve, it is possible to perform prediction in a short time and with high precision by using a linear combination of aberrations including the wavefront aberration of the projection optical system. In a prediction method of the invention, the aforementioned formula is a Zernike polynomial, and the coefficients of each of the aberration components are described. According to the twelfth point of view, the ith evaluation method of the present invention evaluates the pattern image characteristics through the projection optical system, and the method includes the fact that the prediction process is one less than the effective field of view of the projection optical system. = Then point 'using the measurement method of the present invention, the projection optical system is described in the predetermined exposure bar Ui to predict the variation curve (representing the image of the predetermined pattern having the dot point, the image size pair is from the preferred 1 focal position) The variation of the defocus amount); and the evaluation process, the root; ^ #, +,, 营绿^ According to the prediction results, the characteristics of the predetermined pattern image are evaluated. According to the first evaluation method, if you can't predict the above-mentioned variation curve with respect to at least one point in the effective field of view of the projection optical system, it is possible to accurately predict the above-mentioned variation curve. According to the method, under the predetermined exposure condition, the 25 1253105 line passes through the predetermined pattern image projected by the projection optical system, so that the predetermined pattern image in the effective field of view of the projection optical system can be accurately evaluated according to the variation curve depth ' characteristic. In this case, the predetermined pattern is arranged corresponding to each of the plurality of measurement points in the effective field of view of the projection optical system, and the characteristic is a sum of the images in the effective field of view of the projection optical system. In the first evaluation method of the present invention, the predetermined pattern includes two lines (four)' on a plane perpendicular to the optical axis direction of the projection optical system; the slant is orthogonal to each other, and the prediction process can be performed in each The aforementioned line pattern, the aforementioned variation curve. j In this case, the above-mentioned evaluation method can evaluate the line width difference between the line pattern images in the above-described image. In this case, in the two measurement points, in terms of the aforementioned characteristics, it is possible to evaluate that the line widths of the two orthogonal line patterns caused by the difference are four. As for the evaluation method of the present invention, the two line graphs t are the same as the positive fathers of the opposite sides of the optical plane on the optical plane of the projection optical system, and the foregoing prediction process is performed. The case predicts the aforementioned change curve. Here, in the case of each of the above-mentioned line graphs, the line width difference of the above-described evaluation process is used as the image characteristics. What is the line width anomaly caused by the aberrations of each other? It can be evaluated mainly because of the characteristics of the U-image of the present invention. Adjusting the image through the projection optical system, and the adjustment method of the younger brother, the 'including:, forming state, which is characterized by the fact that the 26 1253105 process' is evaluated using the 帛1 evaluation method of the present invention: both: two optical systems The characteristics of the 疋 pattern image arranged by at least one measurement point in the effective field of view; and the adjustment system and the whole process process adjust the formation state of the predetermined pattern image by the projection light according to the evaluation result. 'Dry right according to the first S-circumference method, the present invention is used to evaluate at least the effective field of view of the projection optical system;: the predetermined pattern image characteristics, according to the evaluation results, before, κ, έ U through, the projection optical system

t㈣既定圖案像之形成狀態。因此,根據評價結果,能 、既定圖案像之特性調整在所欲狀態。 在這種情況下,前述調整製程係使用 ,調整參數之每單位調整量之前述各像差成份之變化量 :其係調整有關前述量測點之前述既定圖案像之形成狀態 月’J述各像差成份對前述既定圖案像大小變化之感度; 以及 一二有關變動曲線之各階項係數之目標值之偏離,其係表 示鈉述既疋圖案像之大小對前述散焦量之變動; ,算出前述調整參數之調整量,根據所算出之調整量, 來調整前述既定圖案像之形成狀態。 ^量測點之變動曲線係受投影光學系統之像差等影響而 變化。因1^ ’若調整投影光學系統等,使像差成份變:匕的 活,則能使該量測點之變動曲線趨近所欲曲線(目標此 處,本發明係使用 27 1253105 該 調整參數之每單位調整量之前述各像差成份之變化 量; 述各像差成份對前述既定 在前述既定曝光條件下, 圖案像大小變化之感度; 有關變動曲線之各階項係數之目標值之偏離,其係表 示前述既定圖案像大小對前述散焦量之變動; 上异出取消量測點《變動曲線與所欲曲線之偏離所需要 =凋t參數(係5周整圖案像之形成狀態之調整參數)之調整 置,根據所算出之調整量,來調整前述既定圖案像之形成 狀態n能調整圖案像之形成狀態,以使圖案像大小 對散焦量之變動曲線趨近所欲之變動曲線。 运種情形,要將所欲曲始γ n 4 7曲線(目軚)形成哪種曲線,係因 :出之圖案像之调整項目而相$。例如,前述評價製程 ::別評價對應各前述投影光學系統之有效視野内之複數 -„ _ 圖案像之特性,前述調整製程係使 有關前述變動曲@ > n Rth ^ ^ 門如η 項係數之目標值在前述量測點 間相同。這種情形,能提高投 圖宰ϋ $ % +Α & 先予統之有效視野内之 系像之面内均勻性。又, ,於/ _、+、 田既疋圖案包含複數個圖案時 匕月丨J ^圖案間,使有關前 數之目標值相這種情形,心線之"項之係 像盥橫唆R安# 例如,此儘可能將縱線圖案 整相同。 丁圖案像彼此間之線寬等調 本發明之第丨調整方法係 調整量。 吏用取小平方法來求出前述 28 I253l〇5 若從第u觀點來看的話,本發明係第4曝光方法 過投影光學系統,將第丨 “ 上所舾要您包路圖案轉印在第2面 上所配置之物體上,其特徵在於,包含: 面 凋整製程,係使用本發明 投景彡弁興备姑 示1凋整方法,透過前述 〜子糸、,充,調整前述圖案圖像之形成狀態;以及 ”轉印製私’係在前述調整像之形成狀態下,透過前述 X衫光學系統,將前述電路圖案轉印在前述物體上。- 若依第4曝光方法的話,則使 法係透過投影弁風έ„ Μ # 知月之弟1凋整方 ^ 先予系統,調整電路圖案像之形成狀態,/ 所凋整像之形成狀態下,因電路gΜ 处膝分❿士 u 4路圖案係轉印在物體上,故 月b : ^電路圖案高精度形成在物體上。 #畔2弟15觀點來看的話,本發明係第2評價方法,, 含》.貝、過投影光學系統之圖案像特性,其特徵在於,包 取得前述投影光學系統之波面像差資訊之製程; ”關前述圖案之投影像資訊之製程;以及 杳、、S Γ t % #考慮查淫克感度對前述投影像(其係使用 =項式’將前述波面像差級數展開之複數個查淫克 ^八’/、相互作用對前述投影像特性影響之任意查淫克項 組合之交叉頂夕乂、4_、、 、則述4又影像特性之變化)之特性變化,來坪 價前述圖案像特性。 ° 2評價方法的話’則能得到投影光學系統之波 _ A ’進—步得到有關圖案投影像之資訊。並且, ^ 貝Λ在使用查涅克將前述波面像差級數展複數 29 1253105 個查涅克項中,在該相互作用對前述 意查沒克項組合之交又項卜考^、’㈣之任 像特性之變化,來呼 俊…克感度對前述投影 ,俨士 果汗扬則述圖案像之特性。即,在該第 汗“方法t,在習知所未考慮之 特性影塑夕扛立太 々立作用對則逑投影像 感度對前述投影料性之變化、4慮一〉土克 ,故处之交化米^貝前述圖案像之特性 文月b更南精度評價圖案像之特性。 与傻2種情況下’當前述圖案係包含線圖案時,前述投 〜像特性係包含該線圖案之線寬。 =第16觀點來看的話,則本發明之第2調整方法, 二透過投影光學系統之圖案像之形成狀態,其 於,包含: 評價製程,係使用本發明第2評價方法,來評價對岸 前述㈣光學系統之有效視野内之至少、!個量測點所配置 之既疋圖案像之特性;以及 凋整製程’係根據前述評價結果,透過前述投影學系 統,來調整前述既定圖案像之形成狀態。 右依第2调整方法的話,則使用本發明之第2評價方 法,,高精度評價對應投影光學系統之有效視野内之至少 1個量測點所配置之既定圖案像特性,根據該評價結果, it過投影光學系統’調整前述既定圖案像之形成狀態。因 此,:::價結果,圖案像之形成狀態能調整最佳。 右仗第17觀點來看的言舌,則本發明係帛5種曝光方法 ,係透過投影光學系統,將第i面上之圖案轉印在第2面 30 1253105 上所配置之物體上,其特徵在於,包含·· 調整製程’係使用申請專利範圍第57項之調整方法, 透過投影光學系統,來調整前述圖案像之形成狀態;以及 轉印製程,係在前述調整像之形成狀態下,透過前述 技心光學系統’將前述圖案轉印在前述物體上。 若從第18觀點來看的話,則本發明係一種程式,其係 透過奴衫光學系統,用電腦來執行圖案像特性之預測,其 特徵在於,t (4) The state of formation of a given pattern image. Therefore, according to the evaluation result, the characteristics of the predetermined pattern image can be adjusted to the desired state. In this case, the adjustment process is used to adjust the amount of change of each of the aberration components per unit adjustment amount of the parameter: the adjustment state of the predetermined pattern image of the measurement point is adjusted. The sensitivity of the aberration component to the change of the size of the predetermined pattern image; and the deviation of the target value of each of the coefficient coefficients of the variation curve, which indicates the variation of the size of the sodium image and the defocus amount; The adjustment amount of the adjustment parameter adjusts the formation state of the predetermined pattern image based on the calculated adjustment amount. ^ The variation curve of the measurement point is affected by the aberration of the projection optical system and the like. If the aberration component is changed by adjusting the projection optical system, etc., the variation curve of the measurement point can be approximated to the desired curve (the target here, the invention uses 27 1253105, the adjustment parameter The amount of change of each of the aforementioned aberration components per unit adjustment amount; the sensitivity of each aberration component to the target image size determined under the predetermined exposure condition; the deviation of the target value of each of the coefficient coefficients of the variation curve The system indicates the change of the predetermined pattern image size to the defocus amount; the upper dissociation cancellation measurement point "the deviation of the variation curve from the desired curve is required = the t parameter (the adjustment parameter of the formation state of the 5-week pattern image) The adjustment is performed, and the formation state of the predetermined pattern image is adjusted according to the calculated adjustment amount, so that the formation state of the pattern image can be adjusted so that the variation curve of the pattern image size and the defocus amount approaches the desired fluctuation curve. In this case, it is necessary to form which curve is formed by the curve of the desired γ n 4 7 curve (the target), because the pattern is like the adjustment item and the value is $. For example, the foregoing evaluation process:: The price corresponds to the characteristic of the complex image in the effective field of view of each of the above-mentioned projection optical systems, and the adjustment process is such that the target value of the above-mentioned variational song @ gt; n Rth ^ ^ gate such as the η term coefficient is at the aforementioned measurement point The same is true. In this case, it is possible to improve the in-plane uniformity of the image in the effective field of view of the projected image. Also, the / _, +, and 疋 疋 patterns contain plural When the pattern is between the ^J丨 patterns, the target value of the previous number is compared with this case, and the line of the heart line is like the R&#; The fourth embodiment of the present invention is a fourth embodiment of the present invention. Through the projection optical system, the second image of the above-mentioned package is transferred to the object disposed on the second surface, and is characterized in that it includes: a surface finishing process, which is based on the use of the present invention. Prepare a method of dying, through the aforementioned ~ 糸,, charge, adjust a state in which the pattern image is formed; and a "transfer system" in which the circuit pattern is transferred to the object through the X-shirt optical system in a state in which the adjustment image is formed. - According to the fourth exposure method If you let the legal system through the projection 弁 έ Μ Μ 知 知 知 知 知 知 知 知 知 知 知 知 知 知 知 知 知 知 知 知 知 知The gentleman u 4 road pattern is transferred onto the object, so the month b: ^ The circuit pattern is formed on the object with high precision. #畔2弟15 The point of view, the present invention is the second evaluation method, including "." a pattern image characteristic of a bezel and an over-projection optical system, characterized in that a process for acquiring wavefront aberration information of the projection optical system is acquired; "a process of projecting image information of the aforementioned pattern; and 杳,, S Γ t % # Checking the sensation of the sensation of the above-mentioned projection image (the use of the term item = the above-mentioned wavefront aberration series to expand the number of 淫 克 ^ 八 八 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 Crossing the top of the night, 4_ ,, Said change in the characteristic properties of the image and 4) of the change to the plateau value characteristic pattern image. If the evaluation method is '2', the wave of the projection optical system can be obtained. The information about the pattern projection image is obtained. And, in the use of Chanek, the above-mentioned wavefront aberration series is shown in the number of 29,123,105 Zagnek items, in the interaction of the above-mentioned intentions, the combination of the two items, the test, ^, '(4) The change of the image characteristics, to Hu Jun ... grams of sensitivity to the aforementioned projection, gentleman Khan Yang said the characteristics of the pattern. That is, in the "Khan" method t, in the characteristics of the conventionally unconsidered characteristics of the shadow of the 扛 扛 々 々 々 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像 影像The characteristics of the pattern of the above-mentioned pattern of the rice, the characteristics of the pattern, and the characteristics of the pattern are more accurate. In the case of two kinds of silly, when the pattern includes a line pattern, the image-forming characteristics include the line pattern. In the case of the 16th point of view, the second adjustment method of the present invention is a state in which the pattern image of the projection optical system is formed, and the evaluation process is performed by using the second evaluation method of the present invention. Evaluating the characteristics of the 疋 pattern image disposed at least at the measurement points in the effective field of view of the (4)th optical system on the opposite side; and the grading process is based on the foregoing evaluation result, adjusting the predetermined pattern through the projection system described above When the second adjustment method is used, the second evaluation method of the present invention is used to accurately evaluate at least one measurement point in the effective field of view of the corresponding projection optical system. According to the evaluation result, the it over-projection optical system 'adjusts the formation state of the predetermined pattern image. Therefore, the price of the pattern image can be adjusted optimally. In other words, the present invention is a five-exposure method in which a pattern on the i-th surface is transferred onto an object disposed on the second surface 30 1253105 through a projection optical system, and is characterized in that it includes an adjustment process. 'Adopting the adjustment method of the 57th application patent, adjusting the formation state of the pattern image through the projection optical system; and the transfer process, in the formation state of the adjustment image, through the aforementioned optical system The foregoing pattern is transferred onto the object. From the 18th point of view, the present invention is a program for performing prediction of pattern image characteristics by a computer through a slave shirt optical system, characterized in that

、根據複數項(包含使用既^式,將前述投影光學系統之 波面像差加以級數展開所得到之各像差成份)之線性結合, ^既定曝光條件下,透過前述投影光學系统,算出有關所 =衫之既定圖案像,表示前述像之大小對來自前述最佳聚 焦位置:散焦量之變動之變動曲線之前述波面像差所起因 :移動量,用前述電腦來執行根據前述所算出之移動量, 來預測前述變動曲線之預測程序。And linearly combining the plurality of aberration components obtained by the series expansion of the wavefront aberration of the projection optical system by using the equation, and calculating the relevant optical system through the projection optical system under the predetermined exposure condition The predetermined pattern image of the shirt indicates the wavefront aberration caused by the magnitude of the image on the variation curve from the best focus position: the defocus amount: the amount of movement is calculated by the computer described above. The amount of movement, to predict the prediction process of the aforementioned variation curve.

—"^式安裝在電腦中,電腦便執行上述各程片 :此’本發明之預測方法係藉由電腦來執行。目此,與 傻=樣,Γ使用需要魔大計算時間之複雜計算所帶來之 雜:Lt精由非常單純之運算(求出分別包含像差成份之 =線性結合值),在透過處於既定像差狀態之投影光 =既定曝光條件下,能在短時間内來預測有關cd_ 性。、根據其結果,能在短時間内來預測圖案之轉印 在這種情況下 在前述預測程序之前 假定前述投影 31 1253105 光學系統無像差時,進一步用前述電腦來執行使變動曲線(_ 表示前述像大小對前述散焦量之變動)趨近於高产 白^^ 之程 序。 在這種情況下,前述預測程序係使前述電腦執行以下 之程序: 其係根據前述各像差成份(其係在前述既定曝光條件下 ,將前述各像差成份對前述散焦量之感度當作各係數)之線 性結合,來預測有關前述變動曲線之散焦量方向之移動量 的程序;以及 | 其係根據前述各像差成份(其係在前述既定曝光條件下 ’將前述各像差成份對前述像大小變化之感度當作各係數) 平方之線性結合,來預測有關前述變動曲線之前述像大小 之變化方向之移動量的程序。 本發明之程式,前述預測程序係使前述電腦執行下列 矛序其係包含剛述各像差成份平方之線性結合,根據前 述各乂又項(其係在前述既定曝光條件下,將彼此相異像差 成份彼此間之交叉項對前述像大小之變化當作各係數)之線籲 性結合’來預測有關前述變動曲線之前述像大小變化方向 之移動量的程序。 本I明之矛王式,W述高階函數係僅由偶數階項所構成 之函數。 本^明之私 <,前述預測程序係根據分別包含之前述 :差成份稷數項之線性結合,來算出前述變動曲線起因 ;如述波面像差之響形壯 况’根據前述移動量及前述變形 32 1253105 狀況’使電腦執行預測前述變數曲線的程序。 在這種情況下,在前述預測程序之前, 電腦執行算出程庠, 史則逃 序,、係在别述既定曝光條件下,假定 前述投影光學系統|像差产 在 、, …、彳豕圭之情形下求出,使表示前述像夫 小對則述散焦量之變動之變動曲線趨近於高階函數。 在這種情況下,在前述預測步驟之前,進一 電腦來執行算出藉皮 甘少 月j述The -"^ type is installed in the computer, and the computer executes the above-mentioned various programs: This 'the prediction method of the present invention is executed by a computer. This is the same as silly =, the use of complex calculations that require the calculation of the time of the magic big: Lt fine by a very simple operation (to find the difference component = linear combination value), in the established Projection light in the aberration state = Under the given exposure conditions, the cd_ property can be predicted in a short time. According to the result, it is possible to predict the transfer of the pattern in a short time. In this case, before the aforementioned prediction procedure, assuming that the projection 31 1253105 optical system has no aberration, the computer is used to perform the variation curve (_ indicates The above image size changes to the aforementioned defocus amount) to approach the procedure of high yield whiteness. In this case, the predictive program causes the computer to execute the following procedure: based on the aforementioned aberration components (which are based on the predetermined exposure conditions, the sensitivity of each of the aberration components to the defocus amount is a linear combination of coefficients) for predicting the amount of movement in the direction of the defocus amount of the aforementioned variation curve; and | based on the aforementioned aberration components (which are under the aforementioned predetermined exposure conditions) The sensitivity of the component to the magnitude change of the image is linearly combined with the square of each coefficient to predict the amount of movement of the aforementioned change in the image size of the aforementioned variation curve. In the program of the present invention, the foregoing predicting program causes the computer to execute the following sequence, which includes a linear combination of the squares of the aberration components, and according to the foregoing items (which are different under the aforementioned exposure conditions) A program in which the cross-term of the aberration components is a linear combination of the change in the image size as a coefficient is used to predict the amount of movement of the aforementioned image size change direction of the aforementioned variation curve. In the case of the Spear King of this I, the high-order function is a function consisting only of even-order terms. In the private program of the present invention, the prediction program calculates the cause of the fluctuation curve based on the linear combination of the difference components of the difference component included in the above; and the waveform of the wavefront aberration as described above. Deformation 32 1253105 Status 'Enables the computer to execute the program for predicting the aforementioned variable curve. In this case, before the aforementioned prediction procedure, the computer executes the calculation process, and the history is evaded. Under the predetermined exposure conditions, it is assumed that the projection optical system | aberration is produced in, ..., 彳豕圭之In the case, the variation curve indicating the variation of the defocus amount indicating the aforementioned small pair is approached to the higher order function. In this case, before the aforementioned prediction step, a computer is executed to calculate the borrowing

丁介出&序’其係在前述既定曝絲件下,读、M 貫際像差狀態之前述投参. 十 ^ 义杈衫先學糸統,算出有關所投影 參 定圖案像’前述像大*對前述散;t量之變動。 前述預測料係用前述電腦來執行求出高階函 據前述移動量來銘裔ϊ、伽尚^ U糸根 >動里來移動)與變動函數(其係用上述算出步 求出)之差份函數,來作或义、+、 來作為則述波面像差所起因之前述 曲線之變動情況的程序。Ding Jie & Preface 'The system is under the above-mentioned established wire-drawing parts, reading and M-internal aberration state of the above-mentioned investment. Ten ^ Yiyi shirt first learns the system, and calculates the relevant projection pattern like 'the aforementioned Like the big * on the aforementioned scattered; t amount of change. The prediction material is calculated by the computer to obtain the difference between the movement amount of the high-order letter and the movement amount of the eigen 伽, 伽 ^ 糸 & & 动 动 与 与 与 与 与 与 与 与 与 与 与 与 与 与 与 与 与 与 与 与 与 与 与The function of the part, the right or the right, the +, is used as a procedure for describing the variation of the aforementioned curve caused by the wavefront aberration.

在沒種情況下,前述預測程序係用前述電腦來 下之程序, T 根據刖述各像差成份(在前述既定曝光條件下,將前述 各像差成份平方對前述差份函數之偶數階項之感度當作各 係數)平方之線性結合,來預測前述前述差份函數之該偶數 階項之係數的程序;以及 根據前述各像差成份(在前述既定曝光條件下,將前述 各像差成份對前述差份函數之奇數階項之感度當作各係數) 之線性結合,來預測前ϋ #、+、 木頂州則述則述差份函數之該奇數階 數的程序。 、 本發明之程式,前述既定之式係查淫克多項式,前述 33 1253105 各像差成份係各查涅克項之係數。 本發明之程式,在記錄於資訊記錄媒體之狀能下,能 :為販賣等對象。因此,若從第19_看的:,則本 么明之程式係藉由所記錄之電腦來讀取之資訊記錄媒體。 ,又,右從第20觀點來看的話,本發明係—種曝光裝置 之製造方法,係製造曝光裝置,透過投影光學“,將形 :在遮光罩之圖案轉印在物體上;其係包含使用本發明之 第1〜3㈣光學系統之調整方法之任一方法,來調整前 述投影光學系統之製程。 又,在微影製程中,係使用本發明第丨〜第4曝光裝 置,任-裝置來進行曝光,能將圖案高精度形成在物體: ,藉此,能高良率製造更高積體度之微元件,能提高其生 產性。同樣地,在微影製程中,係使用本發明第丨〜第5 曝光方法之任—方法來進行曝光,藉此能將圖案高精度形 成在物體上,藉此,能高良率製造更高積體度之微元件, 能提高其生產性。因此,若從其他觀點來看的話,本發明 係使用本發明第i〜第4曝光裝置之任一裝置之元件^迭 方法,或使用本發明m 5曝光方法之任—方法:元 件製造方法。In the absence of such a case, the aforementioned prediction procedure is performed by the aforementioned computer, and T is based on the description of each aberration component (the square aberration component is squared to the even-order term of the difference function under the predetermined exposure conditions described above). The sensitivity is a linear combination of the squares of the coefficients to predict the coefficients of the even-order terms of the aforementioned difference function; and the aberration components (the aforementioned aberration components under the predetermined exposure conditions described above) The linear combination of the sensitivity of the odd-order terms of the difference function as the coefficients is used to predict the program of the odd-order order of the difference function of the front ϋ #, +, and 木顶州. According to the program of the present invention, the predetermined formula is a polynomial, and the aberration components of the above-mentioned 33 1253105 are the coefficients of the respective Zernike terms. The program of the present invention can be used for the purpose of selling, etc., under the condition of being recorded on the information recording medium. Therefore, if viewed from the 19th page, then the program of the program is the information recording medium read by the recorded computer. Further, when viewed from the 20th point of view, the present invention relates to a method of manufacturing an exposure apparatus which is an exposure apparatus that transmits a pattern of a hood to an object through projection optics; The process of the projection optical system is adjusted by any of the methods of adjusting the optical systems of the first to third (fourth) of the present invention. Further, in the lithography process, the fourth to fourth exposure devices of the present invention are used. By performing exposure, the pattern can be formed on the object with high precision: thereby, it is possible to manufacture a higher-complexity micro-component at a high yield, and the productivity can be improved. Similarly, in the lithography process, the invention is used.丨 ~ The fifth exposure method - the method of exposure, whereby the pattern can be formed on the object with high precision, thereby enabling the production of higher-capacity micro-components at a high yield, thereby improving productivity. The present invention is a method of using any of the devices of the first to fourth exposure apparatuses of the present invention, or a method of manufacturing the element using the m 5 exposure method of the present invention, from another viewpoint.

【實施方式】 以下,根據第1圖〜第12圖,說明本發明 第1圖係表示一實施形態之曝光裝置1〇〇 之一實施形 之概略構成 34 1253105 。該曝光裝置100係在曝光用光源(以下,稱為「光源) 中,使用脈衝雷射光源之步進掃描方式之縮小投影曝光裝 置(所謂掃描器)。 曝光裝4 100係備有:照明系統(其係由光源16及照 明光學系統12所構成)、標線片台RST(其係當作遮光罩台 ,保持當作遮光罩之標線片自R,係藉由來自該照明系: 之能量束之曝光用照明光EL來照明)、投影光學系統pL( 其係將從標線片R射出之曝光用照明光EL投射在當作物 體之晶圓上(像面上))、晶圓台WST(保持晶圓w)、及這些 . 控制系統。 一 就前述光源1 6而言,此處係使用KrF準分子雷射(輸 出波長為248nm)。又,就光源16而言,也可使用輸出I 田射(輸出波長為157nm)或ArF準分子雷射(輸出波長為 193nm)等真空紫外線領域之脈衝紫外光源。 前述光源16,實際上,容納曝光裝置(由照明光學系 統12之各構成要素及標線片台rST、投影光學系統、 以及晶圓台WST等所構成)本體之室n係設置在與所設置春 之潔淨室另外潔淨度低之服務室,其係透過至少一部份包 3未圖不之送光用光學系統,將稱為光束匹配單元光軸調 整用光學系統連接在室n中。該光源16係根據來自主控 制裝置50之控制資訊ts,藉由内部之控制器,來控制雷 射光束LB輸出之開/關、雷射光束lb之1脈衝之能量、 蓋頻率(重複頻率)、中心波長及頻譜半值寬(波長寬)等。 前述照明光學系統12,具備:光束整形照度均勻化光 35 1253105 學系統20(包含柱型透鏡、光束放大器(皆未圖示)及光學積 · 分器(均質器)22等)、照明系統開口光圈板24、第i中繼 透鏡28A、第2中繼透鏡28B、固定標線片遮簾3〇A、可 動標線片遮簾30B、光程彎曲用反射鏡μ及聚光透鏡32 等。又,就光學積分器而言,能使用複眼透鏡、桿型積分 器(内面反射型積分器)、或繞射光學元件等。因本實施形 態係使用複眼透鏡來作為光學積分器22,故以下也稱為複 眼透鏡22。 前述光束整形/照度均勻化光學系統2〇,係透過設置 · 在室11之光透過窗17,連接在未圖示之送光用光學系統 。該光束整形/照度均勻化光學系統20,例如,係使用柱 型透鏡或光束放大器,將用光源16透過脈衝發光之光透 過窗17所射入之雷射光束lb之截面形狀加以整型。又, 在該光束整形/照度均勻化光學系統20中,雷射光束lB 係經由能量粗調器(未圖示,備有ND濾波器,能等比級數 地用複數階段或連續變更透射率)、可交換配置之複數個繞 射光學元件、沿著照明光學系統光軸之可動稜鏡(圓錐稜鏡鲁 、多面體稜鏡等)、及光學單元(未圖示,其係包含變焦光 學系統之至少1個),到達光學積分器22。上述光學單元 係當光學積分器22為複眼透鏡時,可變化該射入面上之 照明光之強度分布,當光學積分器22為内面反射型積分 器時,可變化照明光對該射入面之射入角廣範圍等,藉此 變更照明光學系統光瞳面上之照明光之光量分布次光源 大小與形狀),即變更標線片R之照明條件。又,該照明 ’ 36 1253105 單元係在變更該照明條侔 你仵之際,極力抑制光量損失。 又,位於光束整形昭择仏 仏…、度均勻化光學系統2〇内部之射 端側之複眼透鏡22,係a τ田认a ’、马了用均勻之照度分布來照明標線 片R,藉由前述截面形妝姑敕^ i狀破整形之雷射光束之射入,在邀 照明光學系統12之光暗而| l 、 少、 里面大致一致配置之該射出側焦點 面’形成由多數個點光源(光源像)所構成之面光源(2次光 源)。以下,將從該2次光源所射出之雷射光束稱為「照明 光EL」者。 又,在複眼透鏡22之射出側焦點面之附近,也可配置 用大致等角度間隔配置複數個開口光圈(例如,由一般之圓 形開口所構成之開口光圈(_般光圈));也可配置用來縮小 由小的圓形開口所構成之之相干係數(σ )值之開口光圈㈠、 α光圈);環帶照明用之環帶狀之開口光圈(環帶光圈)及變 形光源法用,使複數個開口偏心配置所構成之變形開口光 圈等圓板狀構件所構成之照明系統開口光圈。這種情形, 係與前述之光學單元同時使用該照明系統開口光圈板,在 照明光EL之光程上,能選擇性地設定任一個開口光圈, _ 藉此’肖b進行照明光學系統之光瞳面上之照明光之光量分 布(2次光源之大小與形狀),即能進行標線片R之照明條 件之變更。特別係即使是只用前述之光學單元不能設定之 照明條件,也能設置照明系統開口光圈,能減少光量損失 ’且能簡單設定該照明條件。 在從複眼透鏡22(或照明系統開口光圈板)所射出之昭 4 明光EL之光程上,配置了中繼光學系統(由第1中繼透鏡 ; 37 1253105 2 8 A及弟2中繼透鏡2 8 B所構成,該中繼透鏡係介於固定 標線片遮簾30A與可動標線片遮簾3〇B之間)。固定標線 片遮簾30A係從共軛面對標線片r之圖案面,稍散焦地配 置,形成規定標線片R上之矩形照明領域IAR之矩形開口 。又’在该固定標線片遮簾30A之附近,對應掃描方向(γ 軸方向’即第1圖中之紙面内左右方向)之方向之位置及寬 ,配置了具有可變開口部之可動標線片遮簾3〇B,在開始 及結束掃描曝光時,係透過可動標線片遮簾3〇b,進一步 限制照明領域,藉此來防止不要部份之曝光。又,可動標 線片遮簾30B關於對應與掃描方向正交之非掃描方向(乂軸 方向’即_ 1圖中之紙面正交方向)之方向,開口部之寬也 是可變,能根據要轉印在晶圓上之標線片R之圖案,調整 照明領域之非掃描方向之寬。 在構成中繼光學系統之第2中繼透鏡28b後方之照 光EL之光程上,g己置f曲反射鏡M(用以將通過該第2 繼透鏡28Β之照明光m反射向標線片r),在該彎曲反 鏡Μ後方之照明光虹之光程上,配置聚焦透鏡仏 構成中,複眼透鏡22之射人面、可動標線 風… 及钛線片尺之圖案面,係設定成在 “二ΓΓ22之射出側焦點面所形成之光⑽ '、、、 光瞳面)、投影光學系統PL之傅立葉轉 面(射出光瞳面),係設定成光學上此 (Kohler)照明系統。 、已,形成柯 用的話,則從[Embodiment] Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figs. 1 to 12, and a schematic configuration of an exposure apparatus 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention is shown. The exposure apparatus 100 is a reduction projection exposure apparatus (so-called scanner) using a stepping scanning method of a pulsed laser light source in an exposure light source (hereinafter referred to as a "light source"). The exposure apparatus 4 100 is provided with an illumination system. (This is composed of the light source 16 and the illumination optical system 12), the reticle stage RST (which acts as a hood, and holds the reticle as a hood from R, by the illumination system: The exposure of the energy beam is illuminated by the illumination light EL, and the projection optical system pL (which projects the exposure illumination EL emitted from the reticle R onto the wafer as the object (image surface)), the wafer The WST (holding wafer w), and these control systems. For the aforementioned light source 16, a KrF excimer laser (output wavelength of 248 nm) is used here. Also, as for the light source 16, A pulsed ultraviolet light source in the vacuum ultraviolet field such as an output I field (output wavelength of 157 nm) or an ArF excimer laser (output wavelength of 193 nm) is used. The foregoing light source 16 actually accommodates an exposure device (by each of the illumination optical systems 12) Components and reticle stage rST, projection The chamber n of the optical system and the wafer table WST is disposed in a service room having a lower cleanliness than the installed spring clean room, and is transmitted through at least a portion of the package 3 without the optical light for transmission. The system, which is called an optical system for adjusting the optical axis of the beam matching unit, is connected to the chamber n. The light source 16 controls the output of the laser beam LB by an internal controller based on the control information ts from the main control device 50. On/off, energy of one pulse of the laser beam lb, cover frequency (repetition frequency), center wavelength and spectrum half value width (wavelength width), etc. The illumination optical system 12 includes: beam shaping illuminance uniformization light 35 1253105 System 20 (including a cylindrical lens, a beam amplifier (none of which is shown), an optical product/splitter (homogenizer) 22, etc.), an illumination system aperture plate 24, an i-th relay lens 28A, and a second relay lens 28B, fixed reticle blind 3〇A, movable reticle blind 30B, optical path bending mirror μ and concentrating lens 32, etc. Also, for optical integrators, it is possible to use a fly-eye lens or a rod type Integrator In the present embodiment, a fly-eye lens is used as the optical integrator 22, and therefore, it is hereinafter referred to as a fly-eye lens 22. The beam shaping/illuminance equalizing optical system 2 is configured to transmit through The light transmitting optical system (not shown) is connected to the light transmitting window 17 of the chamber 11. The beam shaping/illuminance equalizing optical system 20, for example, uses a cylindrical lens or a beam amplifier to transmit the light source 16 through the pulse. The light beam is shaped by the cross-sectional shape of the laser beam lb incident through the window 17. Further, in the beam shaping/illuminance equalization optical system 20, the laser beam 1B is passed through an energy coarse adjuster (not shown). , with ND filter, can use a complex phase to change the transmittance in a complex phase), a plurality of diffractive optical elements that can be exchanged, and a movable 沿着 along the optical axis of the illumination optical system (cone The optical unit (not shown, including at least one of the zoom optical systems) reaches the optical integrator 22. The optical unit can change the intensity distribution of the illumination light on the incident surface when the optical integrator 22 is a fly-eye lens. When the optical integrator 22 is an inner reflection type integrator, the illumination light can be changed to the incident surface. The angle of incidence of the illumination light on the pupil plane of the illumination optical system is changed to the size and shape of the secondary light source of the illumination light, that is, the illumination condition of the reticle R is changed. In addition, the illumination ' 36 1253105 unit is trying to suppress the loss of light amount when changing the lighting strip. Further, the fly-eye lens 22, which is located at the end of the beam on the inner side of the beam-shaping optical system 2, is a τ田 recognize a ', and the illuminating reticle R is illuminated with a uniform illuminance distribution. By the above-mentioned cross-sectional shaped makeup, the laser beam of the illumination optical system 12 is intruded, and the light-emitting side of the illumination optical system 12 is densely arranged. A surface light source (secondary light source) composed of a point light source (light source image). Hereinafter, the laser beam emitted from the secondary light source will be referred to as "illumination light EL". Further, in the vicinity of the exit side focal plane of the fly-eye lens 22, a plurality of aperture stops (for example, an aperture stop (_-like aperture) formed by a general circular opening) may be disposed at substantially equal angular intervals; An aperture aperture (a), an alpha aperture configured to reduce the coherence coefficient (σ) formed by a small circular opening; an aperture aperture (ring aperture) for ring illumination and a variant light source method An aperture opening of an illumination system formed by a disk-shaped member such as a deformed aperture stop formed by eccentrically arranging a plurality of openings. In this case, the aperture plate of the illumination system is used simultaneously with the optical unit described above, and any aperture aperture can be selectively set on the optical path of the illumination light EL, thereby illuminating the illumination optical system The light distribution of the illumination light on the surface (the size and shape of the secondary light source) enables the illumination condition of the reticle R to be changed. In particular, even if only the illumination conditions that cannot be set by the optical unit described above can be used, the aperture of the illumination system can be set, the amount of light loss can be reduced, and the illumination condition can be easily set. A relay optical system (by the first relay lens; 37 1253105 2 8 A and the second relay lens) is disposed on the optical path of the illuminating EL from the fly-eye lens 22 (or the aperture plate of the illumination system) 2 8 B, the relay lens is between the fixed reticle blind 30A and the movable reticle blind 3 〇 B). The fixed reticle blind 30A is disposed from the conjugate surface facing the pattern surface of the reticle r, and is slightly defocused to form a rectangular opening of the IAR of the rectangular illumination field on the predetermined reticle R. Further, in the vicinity of the fixed reticle blind 30A, a movable target having a variable opening portion is disposed corresponding to the position and width of the scanning direction (the γ-axis direction 'that is, the left-right direction in the paper surface in the first drawing). The wire curtain 3〇B, when starting and ending the scanning exposure, further restricts the illumination field through the movable reticle blind 3〇b, thereby preventing unnecessary exposure. Further, the movable reticle blind 30B has a width corresponding to the non-scanning direction orthogonal to the scanning direction (the y-axis direction 'that is, the direction orthogonal to the plane of the paper in the _1 diagram), and the width of the opening is also variable, The pattern of the reticle R transferred onto the wafer adjusts the width of the non-scanning direction of the illumination field. On the optical path of the illumination EL behind the second relay lens 28b constituting the relay optical system, the optical mirror m is set to reflect the illumination light m that has passed through the second relay lens 28 toward the reticle. r), in the optical path of the illumination light rainbow behind the curved mirror ,, the focus lens 配置 is arranged, the face of the fly-eye lens 22, the movable marking wind... and the pattern surface of the titanium ruler are set The light (10) ', and the pupil plane formed by the exit side focal plane of the second 22, and the Fourier plane of the projection optical system PL (the exit pupil plane) are set to optically (Kohler) illumination system. , already, if it is used, then from

若簡單說明這樣所構成之照明系統之作 38 1253105 光源1 6脈衝發光之雷射光束LB射入光束整形照度均勻化 光學系統20,截面形狀被整形等後,再射入到複眼透鏡 22。藉此,在複眼透鏡22之射出側焦點面,形成前述2 次光源。A brief description of the illumination system constructed in this manner 38 1253105 The laser beam LB of the light source 16-pulse illumination is incident on the beam shaping illuminance uniformizing optical system 20, and the cross-sectional shape is shaped and the like, and then incident on the fly-eye lens 22. Thereby, the secondary light source is formed on the exit side focal plane of the fly-eye lens 22.

從上述2次光源射出之照明光eL,經由第1中繼透鏡 28A 到達固定標線片遮簾3〇A,進一步通過該固定標線 片遮簾30A之開口及可動標線片遮簾3〇B、以及第2中繼 透鏡28B,藉由反射鏡M,使光程在垂直下方彎曲後,經 由聚光透鏡32 ’用均勻之照度分布來照明標線片纟RSTThe illumination light eL emitted from the secondary light source reaches the fixed reticle blind 3A via the first relay lens 28A, and further passes through the opening of the fixed reticle blind 30A and the movable reticle blind 3〇 B and the second relay lens 28B, the optical path is bent vertically downward by the mirror M, and the reticle 纟RST is illuminated by the illuminating lens 32' with a uniform illuminance distribution.

所保持之標線片R上之矩形照明領域iar。 /在前述標線片台RST上,裝載標線片r,透過未圖元 之靜電夾頭(或真空夹頭)等來吸附保持。標線片纟咖儀 藉=圖:之驅動系統,在水平面(χγ平面)内,形編 小驅動(“旋轉)之構成。標線片台RST,例如,係藉由 包含線性馬達等夫R -々挪a u 货精庄 之光軸ιχ〜έ 驅動部,在與照明系絲 之二平二影光學系統PL之光軸AX -致)垂直The rectangular illumination field iar on the reticle R that is held. / On the aforementioned reticle stage RST, the reticle r is loaded and sucked and held by an electrostatic chuck (or vacuum chuck) of a non-primitive element. The reticle 纟 仪 = = = 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图 图-々诺au The fine axis of the goods is ιχ~έ The driving part is perpendicular to the optical axis AX-induced) of the optical system with the lighting system

月b姣小驅動(包含z軸周 ,能用指定既定固轉),亚且 速度來驅動。“方向(此處,係指Y轴方向)之掃描 形成在標線片台RST 丁間之位置’係透過設置在或 以下,稱為「掉二之反射面’藉由標線片雷射干涉計( 。線片干涉計」)54R,例如, 程度之解析度隨時 乂 〇·5〜lnm 子檢測。來自標線片干涉計 台RST之位置| ^ t 54R之標線片 巩,供應至本體室11之外部所設置之主 39 1253105The month b姣 small drive (including the z-axis circumference, can be fixed with the specified fixed rotation), sub-speed drive. "The direction of the direction (here, the Y-axis direction) is formed at the position of the reticle stage RST. The transmission is set to or below, and is called "the reflection surface of the two" by the laser interference of the reticle. The meter (.m. interferometer) 54R, for example, the degree of resolution is always 乂〇·5~lnm sub-detection. From the position of the reticle interferometer RST | ^ t 54R reticle, supplied to the main body outside the body room 11 39 1253105

根據標線片台RST之位置 圖示),來驅動控制標線片 控制裝置50。主控制裝置50, 資訊,透過標線片台驅動部(未 台 RST。 、 1月%少只囚尸便用之光源而t 以區分。即,當把KrF準分子雷忘 + 壮、 卞笛射、ArF準分子雷射當々 光源時’能使用合成石英、f石等氣化物結晶、或摻敗; 英等,但當…2雷射時,必須用螢石等氟化物結晶、, 摻氟石英等來形成。The control reticle control unit 50 is driven in accordance with the position of the reticle stage RST. The main control device 50, the information, passes through the reticle stage drive unit (not RST. In January, only a few of the prisoners use the light source and t to distinguish. That is, when the KrF excimer is forgotten + strong, flute When shooting, ArF excimer lasers can be crystallized or blended with synthetic quartz or f-stone when used as a light source; etc., but when ... 2 lasers, they must be crystallized with fluoride such as fluorite, and doped Fluorine quartz or the like is formed.

前述投影光學系統PL,例如,係使用兩側遠心之缩, 糸統。該投影光學系統PL之投影倍率,例如,係ι/4 1/5或W6#。因此,如前述,若藉由照明光孔,使桿* 片R上之照明領域IAR受到照明的話,則透過投影光學, 統PL,使該照明領域IAR内之標線片r之電路圖案等< 縮小像形成在與該照明領域IAR共輛之晶圓w上之照印 光EL之照射領域(曝光領域)IA。The aforementioned projection optical system PL, for example, uses a telecentric contraction on both sides. The projection magnification of the projection optical system PL is, for example, ι/4 1/5 or W6#. Therefore, as described above, if the illumination area IAR on the rod* piece R is illuminated by the illumination aperture, the projection pattern, the PL, and the circuit pattern of the reticle r in the illumination area IAR are controlled. The illuminating field (exposure field) IA of the photolithographic EL formed on the wafer w shared with the IAR of the illumination field is reduced.

就投影光學系統PL而言,係使用折射系統(只由複數 片,例如,10〜20片程度之折射光學元件(透鏡元件)13所 構成在構成該投影光學系統PL之複數片透鏡元件13 中,物體面側(標線片R側)之複數片(為了簡化說明,此處 係5片)之透鏡元件13l、U2、Π3、134、135、係藉由成像 性能修正控制器48 ’從外部形成可驅動之可動透鏡。透鏡 元件1 3!〜1 35分別透過未圖示之雙重構造之透鏡保持器, 保持在鏡筒。這些1 3 i〜1 3 5係分別保持在内側透鏡支持器 這些内側透鏡保持器係藉由未圖示之|區動元件,例如, 40 Ϊ253105 [π:對外側透鏡保持器,用3點支撐在重力方向 各透卜:?些驅動元件獨立調整施加電壓,藉此形成使 ’’兄兀 3丨〜13s能在z軸方向(投影光學系統 車由方向)及對 、、光 f χγ面之傾斜方向(即,X車由周圍之旋轉方向( 軸肖圍之旋轉方向(0y))驅動(能傾斜)之構成。 其他之透鏡^件13係透過通常之透鏡保持器,保持在 :二又,不限於透鏡元件131〜135,也可構成能驅動像 >、反(光學板,係修正配置在投影光學系統PL之光曈In the case of the projection optical system PL, a refractive system (only a plurality of sheets, for example, a refractive optical element (lens element) of 10 to 20 degrees) is formed in a plurality of lens elements 13 constituting the projection optical system PL. The lens elements 13l, U2, Π3, 134, 135 of the plurality of sheets on the object side (the reticle R side) (for the sake of simplicity of explanation, here are 5) are externally controlled by the imaging performance controller 48' A movable lens that can be driven is formed. The lens elements 1 3 to 1 35 are respectively held by a lens holder having a double structure (not shown) and held in the lens barrel. These 1 3 i to 1 3 5 are respectively held by the inner lens holder. The inner lens holder is separated by an illuminating element (not shown), for example, 40 Ϊ 253105 [π: for the outer lens holder, the three points are supported by the three points in the direction of gravity: some of the driving elements independently adjust the applied voltage, This formation enables ''brothers 3丨~13s to be in the z-axis direction (the direction of the projection optical system vehicle) and the direction of the opposite direction of the light f χ γ plane (ie, the X-vehicle is rotated by the surrounding direction (axis Direction of rotation (0y) The other lens elements 13 are transmitted through a normal lens holder, and are not limited to the lens elements 131 to 135, and can also be configured to drive the image > Correct the configuration of the projection optical system PL

別:近或像面側之透鏡、或投影光學系統PL t像差、特 糸°亥非方疋轉對稱成份)等。並且,可驅動這些光學元件之 由度(可移動之方向)不限於3個,也可 個以上。 W 4 4 定 該 一又在投影光學系統PL·之光瞳面附近,設置了在既 範圍内能連續變更數值孔徑(NA)之光㈣口光目15。就 光瞳開π光圈15而言’例如,係使用所謂的彩虹光圈 該光瞳開口光圈15係藉由主控制裝置50來控制。Don't: near or image side lens, or projection optical system PL t aberration, special 糸 亥 非 非 非 对称 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 Further, the degree of driving of these optical elements (the direction in which they can be moved) is not limited to three, and may be more than one. W 4 4 In the vicinity of the pupil plane of the projection optical system PL, light (four) light source 15 which can continuously change the numerical aperture (NA) in the range is provided. For example, a so-called rainbow aperture is used to open the π aperture 15. The aperture aperture aperture 15 is controlled by the main control unit 50.

田使用KrF準分子雷射光、ArF準分子雷射光來 4乍為昭明T7 T l ^ # 日守’也能使用螢石等氟化物結晶或前述摻 —英之其他合成石英來作為構成投影光學系統PL之各 、、兄凡件®使用匕雷射光時,該投影光學系統Pl所使 :透鏡之材質係全部使用螢石等氟化物結晶或前述摻氟 >5 〇 日日目W係透過未圖示之晶圓保持器,藉由靜電吸附 ’真空吸附)等,保持在前述晶圓台WST上。 41 1253105 晶圓台WST,係配置在投影光學系統PL之下方,藉 v 由未圖示之晶圓台驅動部(其係由線性馬達、音圈馬達 (VCM)等所構成),能在XY平面内方向及z軸方向驅動,The field uses KrF excimer laser light and ArF excimer laser light to make Zhaoming T7 T l ^ #日守' can also use fluoride crystals such as fluorite or other synthetic quartz synthesized as the projection optical system PL. In the case of the use of 匕 laser light, the projection optical system P1 is such that the material of the lens is all crystallized using fluoride such as fluorite or the fluorine-doped >5 〇日目W system is not shown The wafer holder shown in the figure is held on the wafer table WST by electrostatic adsorption 'vacuum adsorption' or the like. 41 1253105 Wafer table WST is placed under the projection optical system PL, and is used by a wafer stage drive unit (which is composed of a linear motor or a voice coil motor (VCM)) (not shown). In-plane direction and z-axis direction drive,

對XY面之傾斜方向(其係X軸周圍之旋轉方向及Y 轴周圍之旋轉方向(0y))也能稍微驅動。即,晶圓台wst 不僅能移動掃描方向(Y軸方向),而且能使晶圓w上之複 數個照射領域對各曝光領域IA相對移動,來進行曝光, 構成也能在與掃描方向正交之非掃描方向(χ軸方向)移動 ,藉此能重複使晶圓W上之各照射領域進行掃描曝光之動 · 作、與移動到用來下一照射曝光之加速開始位置之動作之 步進掃描動作。 晶圓台WST之XY平面内之位置(包含z軸周圍之旋 轉(0z)旋轉),係透過設置或形成在晶圓台wst之反射面 ,藉由晶圓雷射干涉計(以下,簡稱為「晶圓干涉計」 )54W,例如,以〇·5〜lnm程度之解析度來進行隨時檢測 。晶圓干涉計54W,包含複數個多軸干涉計(具有複數個測 長軸),藉由這些干涉計,能量測晶圓台WST之旋轉(0 ζ φ 旋轉(yawing)、0 y旋轉(pitching)(Y軸周圍之旋轉)、及θ X旋轉(r〇lling)(x軸周圍之旋轉)。 藉由晶圓干涉計54W所檢測之晶圓台WST之位置資 訊(或速度資訊),供應至主控制裝置50。主控制裝置5〇 根據晶圓台WST之上述位置資訊(或速度資訊),透過未圖 不之晶圓台驅動部,來控制晶圓台WST之位置。 又’在晶圓台WST上,形成後述之調準系統ALG之 42 1253105 基線量測用基準記號等之基準記號所形成之基 FM,其表面係祐 化板 係被固疋成大致與晶圓W之表面同高。 又’晶圓台WST之+Y你丨α】同七Μ 而总—壯 (弟圖之紙面内右側)之側 面係女裝作為裝卸自如择 傻菩旦心 式先學特性量測裝置之波面 像差里測裝置8〇。 該波面像差量測裝置80,如第2圖所示,具備中空框 體82、文光光學系統84(由複數個光學元件所構成,該光 子兀件係以既定之關係位置,配置在該框冑Μ之内部)、 以及j光部86(配置在框體82内部之_χ側端部)。 . 前述框體82係由構件(用χζ截面L字狀,在内部形 成空間)所構成,在其最上部(+ζ方向端部),形成俯視(從 上方看)圓形開口 82a,以使來自框體82上方之光向框體 82之内部空間射入。又,為了從框體82之内部側被覆該 開口 82a,設置了玻璃蓋88。在玻璃蓋88之上面,藉由鉻 等金屬之蒸鍍,在中央部形成具有圓形開口之遮光膜,藉 由該遮光膜,在量測投影光學系統PL之波面像差之際, 遮蔽來自周圍所不需要之光射入到受光光學系統84。 籲 前述受光光學系統84,係由在框體82内部之玻璃蓋 88之下方’從上往下依序配置之物鏡84a、中繼透鏡84b 、彎曲反射鏡84c、準直透鏡84d(其係依序配置在該彎曲 反射鏡84c之一X側)、及微透鏡陣列84e所構成。彎曲反 射鏡84c係以45°斜度設定,藉由該彎曲反射鏡84c,從 上方垂直向下對物鏡84a射入光之光程係向準直透鏡84d 彎曲。又,構成該受光用光學系統84之各光學構件係在 43 1253105 ’分別加以固 (透鏡元件)係 框體82壁之内側,透過未圖示之保持構件 定。前述微透鏡陣列84e之複數個小凸透鏡 在對光程正交之面内,陣列狀配置來構成。 前述受光部,係由受光元件(由2維CCD等所構成)逾 電荷傳送控制電路等電氣電路所構成。受光元件射入到物 鏡84a,因接收從微透鏡陣列84e所射出之所有光束,故 具有充分之面積。又,受光部86之量測資料係透過未圖 示之信號線,或用無線發射,往主控制裝置5〇輸出。The tilt direction of the XY plane (which is the direction of rotation around the X-axis and the direction of rotation around the Y-axis (0y)) can also be slightly driven. That is, the wafer table wst can move not only the scanning direction (Y-axis direction) but also a plurality of irradiation fields on the wafer w to relatively move the respective exposure areas IA to perform exposure, and the configuration can also be orthogonal to the scanning direction. The non-scanning direction (the x-axis direction) is moved, thereby repeating the steps of scanning and exposing the respective illumination areas on the wafer W and moving to the acceleration start position for the next illumination exposure. Scan action. The position in the XY plane of the wafer table WST (including the rotation around the z-axis (0z)) is transmitted or formed on the reflective surface of the wafer table wst by a wafer laser interferometer (hereinafter, abbreviated as The "wafer interferometer" 54W, for example, is detected at any time with a resolution of about 5 to 1 nm. The wafer interferometer 54W includes a plurality of multi-axis interferometers (having a plurality of length measuring axes). With these interferometers, the energy measurement wafer table WST rotates (0 ζ φ ywing, 0 y rotation ( Pitching) (rotation around the Y-axis) and θ X rotation (r〇lling) (rotation around the x-axis). The position information (or speed information) of the wafer table WST detected by the wafer interferometer 54W, It is supplied to the main control device 50. The main control device 5 controls the position of the wafer table WST through the above-described position information (or speed information) of the wafer table WST through the wafer table drive unit not shown. On the wafer table WST, a base FM formed by a reference mark such as a reference mark such as a baseline measurement is formed in the alignment system ALG 42 to be described later, and the surface of the wafer is fixed to substantially the surface of the wafer W. The same height. Also 'wafer station WST + Y you 丨 α】 with the same seven Μ and the total - Zhuang (the younger side of the paper on the right side of the side) is the women's clothing as a loading and unloading silly Bodhi heart-style learning characteristics measurement The wavefront aberration measuring device 8〇 of the device. The wavefront aberration measuring device 80, as shown in Fig. 2 The present invention includes a hollow frame 82, a wenguang optical system 84 (consisting of a plurality of optical elements, the photonic element is disposed inside the frame in a predetermined relationship), and a j-light portion 86 (arrangement) The frame body 82 is formed of a member (an L-shaped cross section and a space formed therein), and is formed at the uppermost portion (the end portion in the +ζ direction). The circular opening 82a is viewed in plan view (from above) so that light from above the frame 82 is incident into the internal space of the frame 82. Further, in order to cover the opening 82a from the inner side of the frame 82, a glass cover 88 is provided. On the upper surface of the cover glass 88, a light-shielding film having a circular opening is formed in the center portion by vapor deposition of a metal such as chrome, and the light-shielding film is used to measure the wavefront aberration of the projection optical system PL. The light that is not required from the surroundings is incident on the light receiving optical system 84. The light receiving optical system 84 is called the objective lens 84a and the relay lens which are disposed from the top to the bottom of the glass cover 88 inside the frame 82. 84b, curved mirror 84c, collimating lens 84d The curved mirror 84c is disposed on the X side of the curved mirror 84c and the microlens array 84e. The curved mirror 84c is set at a 45° slope, and the curved mirror 84c is used to vertically and downwardly face the objective lens 84a. The optical path of the light entering is curved toward the collimator lens 84d. Further, the optical members constituting the optical system for receiving light 84 are internally fixed to the wall of the frame member 82 at 43 1253105', and are not shown. The plurality of small convex lenses of the microlens array 84e are arranged in an array in a plane orthogonal to the optical path. The light receiving unit is overcharged by a light receiving element (consisting of a two-dimensional CCD or the like). It is composed of an electrical circuit such as a transmission control circuit. The light-receiving element is incident on the objective lens 84a, and has a sufficient area since it receives all the light beams emitted from the microlens array 84e. Further, the measurement data of the light receiving unit 86 is transmitted through a signal line not shown or wirelessly, and is output to the main control unit 5〇.

使用上述之波面像差量測裝置80,藉此能用本體(即 ,投影光學系統PL組裝在曝光裝置之狀態)來進行投影光 學系統PL之波面像差之量測。又,針對使用該波面像差 量測裝置80之投影光學系統PL之波面像差之量測方法加 以後述。 第1圖中,在本實施形態之曝光裝置1〇〇中,設置有 射入方式之多焦點位置檢測系統(以下簡稱為「焦點檢測系 統」)。該焦點檢測系統係由照射系統60a(具有藉由主控制 裝置50來控制開/關之光源,向投影光學系統pL之成^面 ,對光軸AX,從斜方向照射用來形成多數個針孔或縫隙 像之成像光束)、與受光系統6〇b(接收這些成像光束之晶 圓W表面之反射光束)。又,與本實施形態之焦點位置檢 測系統(60a、60b)同樣之多點焦點位置檢測系統之詳細構 成,例如,已揭示在日本特開平6_2834〇3號公報及對應該 公報之美國專利第5,448,332號等,本案引用上述公報及 美國專利之揭示,作為本說明書記載之一部份。 44 1253105 /又,上述公報及美國#利所記載之多點焦點位置檢測 糸統’不僅檢測晶圓w之位置f訊(其係在曝光領域ia内 =f在離非掃描方向所設定之複數點,有關分別與投影光 +系統P L之光轴a X承—七a / ▽ + +仃方向(Ζ軸方向)),而且具有先讀 Γ描方向之晶圓w之起伏之功能,但即使不具有這些功 σ 、又被照射系統60a照射之光束之形狀也可是 平行四邊形或其他形狀。 主控制裝i 5G,係在掃描曝光時等,來自受光系統 1之焦點偏移信號(散焦信號),例如,根據s曲線信號 ’·、、、了使焦點偏移成為零或成為焦點深度内,透過晶圓台 驅動部(未圖示),來控制對晶圓%之z位置及XY面之: 此來執行自動聚焦及自動平準。又,主控制裝置5。 (60 ' 6:?波:像差之量測之際,使用焦點位置檢測系統 L二 行波面像差量測袭置8〇之Z位置之量測 及對位。此時,韻雲φ , 之斜度量測。 可進行波面像差量測裝置80 +光4置100係備有偏轴方式之調準系統ALG。 該離轴(°ff_aX1S)方式之調準^ ALG,係使用在晶圓台 WST上所料之晶E w上之财記號及 置量測等。就該調準系統AW: 吕,列如,係將使晶圓上之光阻不感光之寬波帶之檢測光 束對象§己號,藉此來自該對象記號之反射光,使用攝 影元件(⑽等)來攝影成像於受光面之對象記號之像^ 圖…標像’使用輸出這些攝影信號之影像處理;式 45 1253105 FIA(Field Image Alignment)系統之感測器。又,不限於 FIA系統,當然也能單獨或用適當組合來使用調準感測器 ,其係將相干(coherence)之檢測光照射對象記號,檢測從 该對象記號所產生之散射光或繞射光,干涉檢出從該對象 吕己5虎所產生之2個繞射光(例如,同階數)。 參 又,本實施形態之曝光裝置100 ’雖省略圖示,但在 標線片R之上方,設有一對標線片調準檢測系統,其係由 TTR(Thr〇Ugh The Reticle)調準系統所構成,該TTR調準系 統係使用曝光波長(透過投影光學系統PL, 標線片R上之標線片記號與對應之基準記號板上之 號),就這些標線片調準檢測系統而言,例如,係使用與曰 本特開+ 7-176468 ?虎公報及對應該公報之美國專利第 5,646,413號等所揭示者同樣之構成者 指定國家或所選擇之選擇國家之國内法令允申=二 案引用上述公報及美國專利之揭當作本說明書記載之 一部份。 第1圖中W述控制系統主要係由前述主控制裝置π 所構成。主控制裝置50係由工作站(或稱為微電腦 由CPU、ROM、RAM等所構 /、尔 风)寺所構成,除了進行前述 之各種控制動作之外,也控制整個裝置。主控制 例如,為了確實進行曝光動作,例如,整 WST之照射間步進、曝光時序等。 】日日W 口 又’主控制裝置50,例如,係連接記憶 由硬碟所構成)、輸入裝置(八係 匕、係由鍵盤、滑鼠等指向元 46 1253105 件等所構成)及CRT顯示器(或液晶顯示器)等之顯示裝置 又,主控制裝置50係通過LAN等通訊網路,連接工 作個人電腦等模擬用電腦46。在該模擬用電腦46中 凌了曝光凌置100之光學模型所設定之成像模擬軟體( 即,成像模擬器)。The above-described wavefront aberration measuring device 80 is used, whereby the measurement of the wavefront aberration of the projection optical system PL can be performed by the body (i.e., the state in which the projection optical system PL is assembled in the exposure device). Further, a method of measuring the wavefront aberration of the projection optical system PL using the wavefront aberration measuring device 80 will be described later. In the exposure apparatus 1A of the present embodiment, a multifocal position detecting system (hereinafter simply referred to as "focus detecting system") of an injection system is provided in the first embodiment. The focus detection system is composed of an illumination system 60a (having a light source that is controlled to be turned on/off by the main control device 50, and is formed on the surface of the projection optical system pL, and is irradiated from the oblique direction on the optical axis AX to form a plurality of needles. The aperture or slit image is an imaging beam, and the light receiving system 6〇b (the reflected beam of the surface of the wafer W that receives the imaging beams). Further, the detailed configuration of the multi-point focus position detecting system similar to the focus position detecting system (60a, 60b) of the present embodiment is disclosed, for example, in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. Hei. No. Hei. No., the disclosure of the above-mentioned publication and the U.S. Patent is incorporated herein by reference. 44 1253105 / Again, the above-mentioned bulletin and the multi-point focus position detection system described in the US #利利's not only detect the position of the wafer w, but also in the field of exposure ia = f is set in the non-scanning direction. Point, respectively, with the projection light + system PL optical axis a X bearing - seven a / ▽ + + 仃 direction (Ζ axis direction), and has the function of reading the wrap of the wafer w in the scanning direction, but even The shape of the light beam that does not have these work σ and is illuminated by the illumination system 60a may be a parallelogram or other shape. The main control unit i 5G is a focus shift signal (defocus signal) from the light receiving system 1 during scanning exposure, for example, based on the s-curve signal '·, , , to make the focus shift zero or become the depth of focus. The wafer position drive unit (not shown) controls the z position and the XY plane of the wafer %: This performs auto focus and automatic leveling. Further, the main control device 5. (60 '6:? Wave: When measuring the aberration, use the focus position detection system L two-way wavefront aberration measurement to measure the position and the alignment of the Z position of 8〇. At this time, Yunyun φ, The slanting measurement can be performed. The wavefront aberration measuring device 80 + the light 4 is set to 100. The alignment system ALG is provided with the off-axis mode. The off-axis (°ff_aX1S) mode alignment A ALG is used in the crystal The sign and the measurement of the crystal Ew on the WST of the round table. The alignment system AW: Lu, column, is the detection beam of the wide band that will make the photoresist on the wafer not sensitive. The object § is used to image the object mark on the light-receiving surface using the photographic element ((10) or the like) from the reflected light of the object mark. The image is processed using image processing for outputting these photographic signals; 1253105 FIA (Field Image Alignment) system sensor. Further, not limited to the FIA system, it is of course also possible to use the alignment sensor alone or in a suitable combination, which is to illuminate the object mark with coherence detection light. Detecting scattered light or diffracted light generated from the object mark, interference is detected from the object Lü Ji 5 Two diffracted lights (for example, the same order) are generated. Further, although the exposure apparatus 100' of the present embodiment is omitted, a pair of reticle alignment detecting systems are provided above the reticle R. It is composed of a TTR (Thr〇Ugh The Reticle) alignment system that uses an exposure wavelength (through the projection optical system PL, the reticle mark on the reticle R and the corresponding reference mark plate). In the case of these reticle alignment detection systems, for example, the same composition as disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,646,413, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. The domestic law of the designated country or the selected country of choice. The second case refers to the above-mentioned bulletin and the disclosure of the US patent as part of the description of this specification. The control system in Figure 1 is mainly controlled by the aforementioned main control. The main control device 50 is constituted by a workstation (or a microcomputer, a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, etc.), and controls the entire device in addition to the various control operations described above. Master control example In order to perform the exposure operation, for example, the step of the whole WST irradiation, the exposure timing, etc.] the daily W port and the 'main control device 50, for example, the connection memory is composed of a hard disk), and the input device (eight systems)匕, which is composed of a keyboard, a mouse, etc., and a display device such as a CRT display (or a liquid crystal display), and the main control device 50 is connected to a working personal computer or the like through a communication network such as a LAN. Computer 46. In the simulation computer 46, the imaging simulation software (i.e., the imaging simulator) set by the optical model of the ping 100 is exposed.

、/、次,針對維護時等所進行之曝光裝置 100之波面4 f之量測方法加以說明。又,在以下之說明中,為了簡4 α兄明,波面像差量測裝置8〇内之受光光學系統84之像』 係當作小到能加以忽視者。 在通常之曝光時,波面像差量測裝置80係從晶圓g WS^拆下’在量測波面之際,首先,係藉由作業者或服矛 %師等(以下,稱為「作業者等」),對晶圓台WST之你 面’進行安裝波面像差量測裝置8G之作業。t安裝波茂 像差量測裝置80之際’在量測波面時,波面像差量測累 置80為了涵蓋在晶圓台術之移動行程内,係透過螺招 或磁鐵等,固定在既定之基準面(此處係指+γ側之面)。The method of measuring the wavefront 4f of the exposure apparatus 100 performed during maintenance or the like will be described. Further, in the following description, the image of the light receiving optical system 84 in the wavefront aberration measuring device 8 is considered to be small enough to be ignored for the sake of simplicity. In the normal exposure, the wavefront aberration measuring device 80 is detached from the wafer g WS^' at the time of measuring the wavefront, firstly, by the operator or the lancer, etc. (hereinafter, referred to as "job (etc.), the operation of mounting the wavefront aberration measuring device 8G on the wafer table WST. t When installing the Pomao aberration measuring device 80' When measuring the wavefront, the wavefront aberration measuring and accumulating 80 is fixed in the predetermined stroke in order to cover the moving stroke of the wafer table. The reference plane (here, the surface on the +γ side).

上述之安裝完成後’藉由作業者等,來應答開始量測 之命令之輸入,主控制裝置50,其波面像差量測裝置8〔 為了定位在調準系,统ALG之下方,係透過晶圓台驅㈣( ^ 期並且,主控制裝置50藉由 调準糸統ALG來檢測設置於波面像差量㈣置之未圖 不之對位記號,根據該檢測結果與此時之晶圓干涉計5轉 之量測值,算出對位記號之位置座栌 屋铩求出波面像差量測 衣置80之正確位置。並且,在量測波面像差量測裝置8〇 47 1253105 之位置後,主控制裝置5〇係如以下所述,執行波面像差 之量測。 首先’主控制裝置5 0係藉由未圖示之標線片承载器, 將’十孔圖案所形成之未圖示之量測用標線片(以下,稱為「 針^標線片」)承載在標線片台RST上。該針孔標線片係 在/圖案面之複數點形成針孔(大致成為理想點光源,產生 球面波之針孔)之標線片。又,例如,中心為了與投影光學 系統PL之光軸Αχ 一致,當設定針孔標線片時,複數個After the above installation is completed, the operator inputs the response command to start the measurement, and the main control device 50, the wavefront aberration measuring device 8 (for positioning under the ALG system) Wafer drive (4) (^), the main control device 50 detects the wavefront aberration amount (4) by adjusting the ALG to adjust the alignment mark according to the detection result and the wafer at this time. The measured value of the interferometer 5 turns, the position of the registration mark is calculated, and the correct position of the wavefront aberration measuring device 80 is obtained. Moreover, the position of the measuring wavefront aberration measuring device 8〇47 1253105 is measured. Thereafter, the main control unit 5 performs the measurement of the wavefront aberration as described below. First, the main control unit 50 is formed by a ten-hole pattern by a reticle carrier (not shown). The measurement reticle (hereinafter referred to as "needle reticle") is carried on the reticle stage RST. The pinhole reticle forms a pinhole at a plurality of points on the / pattern surface (roughly Become the ideal point source, produce the reticle of the spherical wave pinhole. Also, for example, the center is Αχ coincides with the optical axis of the projection optical system PL, the pinhole reticle is set when the sheet, a plurality of

針孔係配置在照明領域IAR Θ,且該投影像係分別形成在 投影光學系統PL之視野内’量測波面像差之複數點(後述 之第1〜第η量測點)。The pinhole system is disposed in the illumination field IAR Θ, and the projection image system is formed in the field of view of the projection optical system PL to measure the complex point of the wavefront aberration (the first to the nth measurement points to be described later).

又,在此處所使用之針孔標線片中,係在上面設置擴 政面等,在投影光學系統PL之光瞳面之大致全面,使來 自針孔圖案之光分布,藉此在投影光學系、统pL之光瞳面 之全面’纟量測波面像差者。又,本實施形態中,因在投 影光學系統PL之光瞳面附近設置開口光圈15,故實質上 係在開口光圈丨5所規定之該光瞳面量測波面像差。見、 承載針孔標線片後,主控制裝置5G使用前述標線片調 準檢測系統,來檢測形成於針孔標線片之標線片調準記號 ,根據該檢測結果,使針孔標線片調準既定之位置。藉此 ,針孔標線片之中心即與投影光學系統pL之光軸大致一 致0 然後,主控制裝置50將控制資訊Ts供應至光源16, 使雷射光束LB發光。藉此’來自照明光學系統12之照明 48 !2531〇5 光EL照射在針孔標線片。並且’從針孔標線片之複數個 · 針孔射出之光透過投影光學系統PL,聚光在像面上,針孔 像成像在像面上。 其次,主控制裝置50在針孔標線片上之任一針孔(以 下’稱為所著眼針孔)像成像之成像點,為了與波面像差量 測裝置80之開口 82a之大致中心一致,—面監控晶圓干涉 計54W之量測值,一面透過晶圓台驅動部(未圖示),來移 動晶圓台WST。此時,主控制裝置5〇根據焦點位置檢測 系統(60a、60b)之檢測結果,在針孔像成像之像面,使波馨 面像差量測裝置80之玻璃蓋88之上面—致,透過晶圓台 驅動部(未圖示),將晶圓台WST向Z軸方向稍微驅動。此 時,亦視需要進行調整晶圓台WST之傾斜角。藉此,所 著眼針孔之像光束係透過玻璃蓋88之中央開口,射入到 受光光學系統84,藉由構成受光部< %之受光元件來接 收光。 詳言之,係從針孔標線片上之所著眼針孔產生球面波 ’該球面波係透過投影光學系統PL、物鏡⑷(構成波面像# 差量測裝置80之受光用光學系統84)、中繼透鏡_、反 射鏡㈣、準直心84d而成為平行光束,照射於微透鏡 陣列84e藉此,投影光學系統pL之光瞳面中繼在微透鏡 陣歹J 84e ’並被分割。而且,藉由該微透鏡陣列84e之各 透鏡件’各別之光被聚朵力為^ 饭灰尤在欠先凡件之受光面,分別在 該受光面成像出針孔像。 此寺右技衫光學系統PL係無波面像差之理想光學 49 1253105 系統的話,則投影光學系統PL光瞳面之波面成為理相之 波面(此處係平面),其結果,射入微透鏡陣列84e之平行 光束成為平面波,該波面係理想之波面。這種情形,如第 3A圖所示,在構成微透鏡陣列…之各透鏡元件之光轴上 之位置,成像出點像(以下,也稱為「點」)。Further, in the pinhole reticle used herein, a plane of expansion or the like is provided thereon, and the light from the pinhole pattern is distributed substantially in the pupil plane of the projection optical system PL, whereby the projection optics are used. The overall surface of the system and the pL's light surface is the same as the measurement of the wavefront aberration. Further, in the present embodiment, since the aperture stop 15 is provided in the vicinity of the pupil plane of the projection optical system PL, it is substantially the aperture plane aberration measured by the aperture stop 丨5. After seeing and carrying the pinhole reticle, the main control device 5G uses the aforementioned reticle alignment detection system to detect the aligning mark formed on the pinhole reticle, and according to the detection result, the pinhole mark The line is aligned to the established position. Thereby, the center of the pinhole reticle is substantially identical to the optical axis of the projection optical system pL. Then, the main control unit 50 supplies the control information Ts to the light source 16 to cause the laser beam LB to emit light. Thereby, illumination from the illumination optical system 12 is applied to the pinhole reticle. And 'from the plurality of pinhole reticle sheets, the light emitted from the pinhole passes through the projection optical system PL, condensed on the image plane, and the pinhole image is imaged on the image plane. Next, any pinhole of the main control device 50 on the pinhole reticle (hereinafter referred to as the eyelet hole) is imaged at an image point, in order to coincide with the approximate center of the opening 82a of the wavefront aberration measuring device 80, The wafer monitor WST is moved through the wafer stage drive unit (not shown) while monitoring the measured value of the wafer interferometer 54W. At this time, the main control device 5 使 based on the detection result of the focus position detecting system (60a, 60b), on the image plane of the pinhole image imaging, causes the top surface of the glass cover 88 of the wave surface aberration measuring device 80 to be The wafer table WST is slightly driven in the Z-axis direction by a wafer stage driving unit (not shown). At this time, the tilt angle of the wafer table WST is also adjusted as needed. Thereby, the image beam of the eyelet hole is transmitted through the center opening of the cover glass 88, and is incident on the light receiving optical system 84, and the light is received by the light receiving element constituting the light receiving portion <%. More specifically, a spherical wave is generated from the eyelet hole on the pinhole reticle. The spherical wave transmits through the projection optical system PL and the objective lens (4) (the light receiving optical system 84 constituting the wavefront image difference measuring device 80). The relay lens _, the mirror (4), and the collimation center 84d become parallel beams, and are irradiated to the microlens array 84e, whereby the pupil plane of the projection optical system pL is relayed in the microlens array J 84e ' and divided. Further, each of the lens members of the microlens array 84e is condensed into a light receiving surface of the lens member, and a pinhole image is formed on the light receiving surface. This temple right technology shirt optical system PL is the ideal optics without wavefront aberration 49 1253105 system, then the wave surface of the PL optical plane of the projection optical system becomes the wavefront of the phase (here, the plane), and as a result, the microlens is injected. The parallel beams of array 84e become plane waves, which are ideal wavefronts. In this case, as shown in Fig. 3A, a point image (hereinafter also referred to as "point") is formed at a position on the optical axis of each of the lens elements constituting the microlens array.

然而,在投影光學系統PL巾,通常,因波面像差存 在’故射入微透鏡陣列84e之平行光束之波面係從理想波 面偏移,根據該偏移(即,波面對理想波面之傾斜卜如第 3B圖所示’各點之成像位置從微透鏡陣列84e之各透鏡元 件之光軸上之位置偏移。這種情形,纟自各點之基準:(各 透鏡元件⑽上之位置)位置之偏移,係對應波面之斜度。 又,射入構成受光部86之受光元件上之各聚光點之光 (點像光束),係用受光元件分別加以光電轉換,該光電轉 換信號係透過電氣電路,傳送到主控制裝^ 5〇。主控制裝 置50根據該光電轉換信號,算出各點之成像位置,且使 用該算出結果與已知之基準點位置資料,算出位置偏移…However, in the projection optical system PL, generally, the wavefront of the parallel beam incident on the microlens array 84e is shifted from the ideal wavefront due to the wavefront aberration, according to the offset (i.e., the wave faces the slope of the ideal wavefront) As shown in Fig. 3B, the position of the image at each point is shifted from the position on the optical axis of each lens element of the microlens array 84e. In this case, the reference from each point: (the position on each lens element (10)) The offset of the position corresponds to the slope of the wavefront. Further, the light (the spot beam) incident on each of the light collecting points on the light receiving element of the light receiving unit 86 is photoelectrically converted by the light receiving element, and the photoelectric conversion signal is used. The main control device 50 calculates the imaging position of each point based on the photoelectric conversion signal, and calculates the positional offset using the calculated result and the known reference point position data.

卜△々)’然後儲存在RAM中。此時,在主控制裝置5〇 中,係供應晶圓干涉計54W此時之量測值(Xi、Yi)。 如上述,若藉由1個所著眼針孔像之成像點之波面像 差量測裝S 80,量測點像位置偏移完成的話,則主控制裝 置50係在下一針孔像之成像點,移動晶圓台WST,以使 波面像差量測裝置80之開口 82a之大致中心一致。該移動 結束後,與前述同樣的,藉由主控制裝置5〇,從光源i 6 進行雷射光束LB之發光,同樣地,藉由主控制裝置5〇, 50 !2531〇5 异出各點之成像位置。然後,在其他針孔像之成像點,依 序進行同樣之量測。 又 廷稼一米,在完成 ―工投剌裒置5< ^ RAM巾,料了前述各針㈣之成像點之位置偏移資 料(△ f、△ )與各成像點之座標資料(其係進行各針孔像 之成像點之量測之際,晶圓干涉計54W之量測值(χ、Y)〕Bu △ 々)' is then stored in RAM. At this time, in the main control unit 5, the measured value (Xi, Yi) of the wafer interferometer 54W at this time is supplied. As described above, if the wavefront aberration measurement S 80 is formed by the image point of one of the eye-hole images, and the measurement of the spot image position is completed, the main control device 50 is at the imaging point of the next pinhole image. The wafer table WST is moved so that the approximate centers of the openings 82a of the wavefront aberration measuring device 80 coincide. After the end of the movement, in the same manner as described above, the light source LB is emitted from the light source i 6 by the main control unit 5, and similarly, the main control unit 5 〇, 50 ! 2531 〇 5 Imaging position. Then, the same measurement is performed sequentially at the imaging points of the other pinhole images. In addition, one meter of the crop, in the completion of the "work-injection set 5" ^ RAM towel, the positional offset data (△ f, △) of the imaging points of the aforementioned needles (four) and the coordinate data of each imaging point (the system When measuring the imaging point of each pinhole image, the measured value of the wafer interferometer 54W (χ, Y)]

。又’在上述量測時’也可將照明光EL肖時照射在所有 之針孔,也可使用可動標線片遮簾3〇B,例如,在各針孔 ,變更標線片上照明領域之位置與大小等,用照明光π 來只照明標線片上之所著眼針孔或部份領域(至少包含所著 眼針孔)。 其次’主控制裝置50根據RAM内所儲存之各針孔像 之成像點之位置偏移資料(△卜△ β )與各成像點之座標 責料’依照以下所說明之原理,對應針孔像之成像點,亦 即,對應投影光學系統PL之視野内之第丄量測點(評價點) 〜第η量測點(評價點)之波面(波面像差),此處,此處係根 據,換程式來運算後述之式(3)之條紋查涅克多項式(以下· ,簡%為「查〉圼克多項式」)之各項⑷圼克項)之係數(例如 ’第1項之係數Ζ,〜第37項之係數A?)。本實施形態係 :吏用條紋查涅克多項式來作為查涅克多項式,進行以下之 况明者。 ^實施形態係根據上述位置偏移(△卜△ ”),根據 轉換耘式來進仃運算’藉此求出投影光學系統pL之波面 亦P位置偏移(△ f、△ 7?)成為仍然反映波面對理想 51 1253105 波面之斜度值,相反地,能根據位置 ’、U 占、△ ”)使 波面復原。又,由上述之位置偏移(△卜△々)與與波面 之物理性關係可知,本實施形態之波面算二 , ττ 王你周知之. Also, 'in the above measurement', the illumination light EL can be irradiated to all the pinholes, or the movable reticle blinds 3〇B can be used. For example, in each pinhole, the illumination field on the reticle is changed. Position and size, etc., use illumination light π to illuminate only the eye pinholes or parts of the eye on the reticle (at least including the eye hole). Next, the main control device 50 according to the positional deviation data of the imaging points of each pinhole image stored in the RAM (Δ Δ Δ β ) and the coordinates of each imaging point ′ according to the principle described below, corresponding to the pinhole image The imaging point, that is, the wavefront (wavefront aberration) of the third measurement point (evaluation point) to the ηth measurement point (evaluation point) in the field of view of the projection optical system PL, here, , the program is used to calculate the coefficient of the (3) gram term of the stripe Chanek polynomial (hereinafter, s% is "Check > 多项 polynomial") of the formula (3) (for example, the coefficient of the first term) Hey, ~ coefficient 37 of item 37?). In the present embodiment, the stripe Chanek polynomial is used as the Chanek polynomial, and the following is explained. ^The embodiment is based on the above-mentioned positional shift (Δ △ Δ), and the operation is performed according to the conversion formula ', thereby obtaining the wavefront of the projection optical system pL and the positional shift (Δf, Δ7?) The reflected wave faces the slope value of the ideal 51 1253105 wavefront, and conversely, the wavefront can be restored according to the position ', U occupies, △ ′). Further, from the above-described positional deviation (Δ △ 々 々) and the physical relationship with the wavefront, it can be seen that the wavefront of the present embodiment is second, and ττ Wang is well known.

Shack-Hartmami之波面算出原理者。 其次,針對根據上述之位置偏移,算出波面之方法, 加以簡單說明。 ’ ’ 如上述,位置偏移(△ $、△ 係對應波面之斜度, 將位置偏移(△ I:、△ ”)積分葬此、复 ,、 _ 積刀猎此求出波面之形狀(嚴格 而言,係來自基準面(理想波面)之偏移)。設波面(其係來自 基準面之偏移波面)之式為w(x,y),比例係數為k,則下 式(1)、(2)之關係式成立。 △卜令…(1) .⑺Shack-Hartmami wave surface calculation principle. Next, a method of calculating the wavefront based on the above-described positional shift will be briefly described. ' ' As described above, the positional deviation (Δ $, △ corresponds to the slope of the wavefront, the positional deviation (△ I:, △ ”) is integrated and buried, and the _ accumulated tool is used to determine the shape of the wavefront ( Strictly speaking, it is the offset from the reference plane (ideal wavefront). The wavefront (which is the offset wavefront from the reference plane) is w(x, y) and the scale factor is k. The relationship between (2) and (2) is established. △ Bu Ling...(1) .(7)

dW 、因仍然不易積分僅表示點位置之波面斜度,故將面形 '、及數展開’來適合此式者。這種情形,級數係選擇正交 系統者。查涅克多項式係適合軸對稱面展開之級數,圓周 方向係三角級數展開。即,若用極座標系統(ρ,Θ )來表示 波面W的話,則能如下式(3)般展開。 52 1 因係正交系統,故能獨立決定各項之係數z"用適當 值來限定i係對應進行某種之濾、波。χ,例如,若與係數 同時例示第1項〜第37項之fi(p』)(fcp當作獨立變 1253105 數=向徑多項式)的話,則如下列表i所示。但是,表1中 之弟37項係在實際之查涅克多項式中,相當於第49項’ {在本°兒月曰中,係使用i = 37之項(第37項)。即,在本 U中,查淫克多項式項之數沒有特別限定。 Z!z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6 Z7 Z8z9 Zio z z z z z z z z pcosO psin6 2p2-\ p 2cos2 Θ p 2sin2 Θ (3 p 3-2 /9 )cos 0 (3 p 3-2 p )sin Θ 6 p 4-6 p 2+l p 3cos3 Θ p 3sin3 Θ (4p4-3p2)cos0 (W)sin0 (10 p 5-12 p s+3 p )c〇s 0 (l〇p5-12p3+3p)sin0 20 p 6-30 p 4+12 p 2-l p 4cos4 Θ p 4sin4 Θ 1 Z19 ^20 ^21 Z22 z; z z zSince dW is still difficult to integrate, it only indicates the wavefront slope of the point position, so the surface shape ', and the number expansion' is suitable for this type. In this case, the series is selected as the orthogonal system. The Chanek polynomial is suitable for the progression of the axisymmetric plane, and the circumferential direction is a trigonometric series expansion. In other words, if the wave surface W is expressed by the polar coordinate system (ρ, Θ), it can be developed as shown in the following equation (3). 52 1 Because of the orthogonal system, it is possible to independently determine the coefficient z" use an appropriate value to limit the i-system to perform some kind of filtering and wave. For example, if the fi(p) of the first to the 37th items (fcp is regarded as the independent variable 1253105 = the radial polynomial) is exemplified with the coefficient, the following list i is shown. However, the 37 items in Table 1 are in the actual Chanek polynomial, which is equivalent to the 49th item. {In this period, the item i = 37 (item 37) is used. That is, in the present U, the number of the polynomial items is not particularly limited. Z!z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6 Z7 Z8z9 Zio zzzzzzzz pcosO psin6 2p2-\ p 2cos2 Θ p 2sin2 Θ (3 p 3-2 /9 )cos 0 (3 p 3-2 p )sin Θ 6 p 4-6 p 2 +lp 3cos3 Θ p 3sin3 Θ (4p4-3p2)cos0 (W)sin0 (10 p 5-12 p s+3 p )c〇s 0 (l〇p5-12p3+3p)sin0 20 p 6-30 p 4 +12 p 2-lp 4cos4 Θ p 4sin4 Θ 1 Z19 ^20 ^21 Z22 z; zzz

Fi '23 '24 '25 '26 Z27 (5 p -4 p 3)cos3 Θ (5 p 5-4 p 3)sin3 Θ (15 p 6-20 p 4+6 p 2)cos 0 (15 p 6-20 p 4+6 p 2)sin Θ (35 p 7-60 p 5+30 p 3-4 p )cos Θ (35 p 7-60 p 5+30 p3-4 p )sin Θ 70p8-140p6+90p4-20p2+l p 5cos5 Θ 參 -28 z; Z30 Z31 Z32 Z33 Z34 z '29 35 Z36 z 37 p 5sin5 Θ (6p6-5p4)cos4 0 (6p6-5p4)sin4 0 (21p7-3〇p5+l〇p3)cos3 0 (21p7-3〇p5+l〇p3)sin3 0 (56 p 8-105 p 6+60 p4A0p 2)cos2 Θ (56 p 8-105 p 6+60 pUOp 2)sin2 0 (126 p 9-280 p 7+210 p 5-60 p 5+5 p )cos 0 (126 p 9_280 p 7+210 p 5-60 p 5+5 p )sin 0 252 p 10-630 p 8+560 p 6-210 p 4+3〇 p 2-l 924 p 12-2772 p 10+3150 p 8-1680 p 6+420 p 4-42 p 2+lFi '23 '24 '25 '26 Z27 (5 p -4 p 3)cos3 Θ (5 p 5-4 p 3)sin3 Θ (15 p 6-20 p 4+6 p 2)cos 0 (15 p 6 -20 p 4+6 p 2)sin Θ (35 p 7-60 p 5+30 p 3-4 p )cos Θ (35 p 7-60 p 5+30 p3-4 p )sin Θ 70p8-140p6+ 90p4-20p2+lp 5cos5 Θ -28-28 z; Z30 Z31 Z32 Z33 Z34 z '29 35 Z36 z 37 p 5sin5 Θ (6p6-5p4)cos4 0 (6p6-5p4)sin4 0 (21p7-3〇p5+l〇 P3)cos3 0 (21p7-3〇p5+l〇p3)sin3 0 (56 p 8-105 p 6+60 p4A0p 2)cos2 Θ (56 p 8-105 p 6+60 pUOp 2)sin2 0 (126 p 9-280 p 7+210 p 5-60 p 5+5 p )cos 0 (126 p 9_280 p 7+210 p 5-60 p 5+5 p )sin 0 252 p 10-630 p 8+560 p 6 -210 p 4+3〇p 2-l 924 p 12-2772 p 10+3150 p 8-1680 p 6+420 p 4-42 p 2+l

實際上,該微分係以上述之位置偏移來進行檢 調整必須針對微係數來進行。極座標系統(XI eQs0、故 Sln 0 )係用下式(4)、(5)來表示。 ,卜P dx dp P δθ sin0 •(4) •(5) 因查涅克多項式之微分形不是正交系統,故調整必 53 1253105 法來進行…個點像成像點之資訊(偏移量) 統η視ΛΥ方向,故設針孔數為咖係對應投影光學系 、見予内之量測點(評價點)數’本實施形態為了簡化說 明,例如,設n為33),則上述式 程式之數為2卿 ⑺所表不之觀測方 查淫克多項式之各項係對應光學像差。而且,低階項 (1小之項)係與賽德(Seidel)像差大致對應。使用查^多 項式’藉此能求出投影光學系統PL之波面像差。 夕In fact, the differential system is adjusted for the above-mentioned positional offset and must be performed for the micro-coefficient. The polar coordinate system (XI eQs0, so Sln 0) is expressed by the following equations (4) and (5). , P D d d d P P δθ sin0 • (4) • (5) Since the differential shape of the Chanek polynomial is not an orthogonal system, the adjustment must be 53 1253105 method to perform a point image imaging point information (offset) Since the number of pinholes is the corresponding projection optical system of the coffee system, and the number of measurement points (evaluation points) is seen in the present embodiment, in order to simplify the description, for example, let n be 33), the above formula The number of programs is the corresponding optical aberration of each of the observations of the 2nd (7). Moreover, the low-order term (1 small item) roughly corresponds to the Seidel aberration. The wavefront aberration of the projection optical system PL can be obtained by using the multi-formation. Xi

鐮拖3上述,/、理來決定轉換程式之運算步驟,依據該 、壬,之運异處理,藉此能求出對應投影光學系統孔 視野内之第i量測點〜第n量測點之波面資訊(波㈣差) ’此處’能求出查淫克多項式之各項係數,例如,求出第 1項之係數Zi〜第37項之係數z37。镰 dragging the above 3, /, to determine the calculation step of the conversion program, according to the 壬, 运, the different processing, thereby obtaining the i-th measuring point to the n-th measuring point in the field of view of the aperture of the corresponding projection optical system Wave surface information (wave (four) difference) 'here' can find the coefficients of the singularity polynomial, for example, find the coefficient z37 of the first term and the coefficient z37 of the 37th term.

在前述記憶裝置42内,記憶了投影光學系統pL之波 面像差變化表之資料庫。此處,所謂波面像差變化表係指 由資料組所構成之變化表,該資料組係根據既定之規則^ 排列資料,該資料係表示調整參數之單位調整量之變化(其 係使用與投影光學系統PL實質上之等效模型,進行模擬 ,來知到邊模擬結果,將圖案之投影像之晶圓上之形成狀 態最佳化)、與分別對應投影光學系統PL視野内之複數個 里測點之成像性能(具體而言,其係波面之資料,例如,杳 涅克多項式之第1項〜第37項係數之變動量)之關係。 本實施形態係使用可動透鏡13i、132、133、u 、 4 1 3 5 之各自由度方向(能驅動方向)之驅動量(Ζι、0Χι、Θ 54 1253105 、“2、Ή3、θχ4、θΥ4、Ζ5、“ 、二:5)、日日日® w表面(晶圓台肅)之3自*度方向之驅 動里Wz、w“、W0y)、及照明光EL波長之偏移量△ λ 之合計19個參I ’來作為上述之調整參數。 此處’針對上述波面像差變化表之資料庫之製作步賢 ’簡早加以說明。首I在安裝特定光學軟體之模A 腦中,輸入曝光裝i100之光學條件(例如,投影光學心 PL之設計值(數值孔徑NA、及各透鏡資料等)、相干 σ值m明σ )或照明光學系統之數值孔# NA、及,昭明 EL之波長(曝光波長U等)。其次,在模擬用電腦乜中, 輸入投影光學系統P L視野内之任意第i量測點之資料。 接下來’輸入可動透鏡13l〜135之各自由度方向(可動 方向)、晶圓W&面之上述自由度方向、照明光波長之偏 移量之各單位量之資料。例如,若在z方向偏移之+方向 ,輸入只驅動可動透鏡13l單位量之指令的話,則藉由槿 擬用電腦46,針對投影光學系統pL視野内之預定第】量 測點,算出來自第1波面之理想波面之變化量之資料,: 如,算出查埋克多項式之各項(例如,帛】項〜第37項)之 係數變化量,該變化量之資料係顯示在模擬用電腦邨之 顯示器之畫面上,並且,該變化量係以參數pARAipi記 憶在記憶體中。 其次,若在 Y方向傾斜(X軸周圍之旋轉ΘΧ)之+方向 ,輸入只驅動可動透鏡 擬用電腦46,針對第1In the aforementioned memory device 42, a database of the wavefront aberration change table of the projection optical system pL is memorized. Here, the wavefront aberration change table refers to a change table composed of a data group which arranges data according to a predetermined rule, which indicates a change in the unit adjustment amount of the adjustment parameter (the use and projection thereof) The optical system PL is essentially an equivalent model, and the simulation is performed to know the side simulation result, and the formation state on the wafer of the projected image is optimized, and corresponds to a plurality of fields in the field of view of the projection optical system PL. The imaging performance of the measuring point (specifically, the information of the wavefront, for example, the variation of the coefficient of the first to the 37th of the 杳neg polynomial). In the present embodiment, the driving amounts of the movable lenses 13i, 132, 133, u, and 4 1 3 5 in the direction (the driving direction) are used (Ζι, 0Χι, Θ 54 1253105, "2, Ή3, θχ4, θΥ4, Ζ5, “, 2: 5), day/day® w surface (wafer stage) 3 drive in the direction of W, w “, W0y”, and the offset of the illumination light EL wavelength Δ λ A total of 19 reference I's are used as the above-mentioned adjustment parameters. Here, 'the production of the database of the above-mentioned wavefront aberration change table is explained as follows. First I in the model A of the installation of a specific optical software, input The optical conditions of the exposure device i100 (for example, the design value of the projection optical core PL (numerical aperture NA, and each lens data, etc.), the coherence σ value m σ) or the numerical aperture of the illumination optical system # NA, and, Zhaoming EL Wavelength (exposure wavelength U, etc.) Next, in the analog computer, input data of any i-th measuring point in the field of view of the projection optical system PL. Next, 'the input movable lenses 13l to 135 are each in the direction of the direction (movable) Direction), the above-mentioned degree of freedom direction of the wafer W& face, illumination light wave The data of each unit amount of the offset. For example, if the input of only the unit lens of the movable lens 13l is input in the + direction offset in the z direction, the field of view of the projection optical system pL is simulated by the computer 46 The predetermined measurement point in the inside calculates the amount of change from the ideal wavefront of the first wavefront, for example, the coefficient variation of each of the items (for example, 帛) to 37 (37) of the occlusion polynomial is calculated, The data of the change amount is displayed on the screen of the monitor of the computer village, and the change amount is stored in the memory by the parameter pARAipi. Secondly, if it is tilted in the Y direction (rotation around the X axis) + Direction, input only drives the movable lens to use the computer 46, for the first

131單位量之指令的話,則藉由模 量測點,算出第2波面之資料,例 55 1253105 2异出查涅克多項式之上述各項係數之變化量,該變化 :之資料係顯示在上述顯示器之畫面i,並且,該變化量 係以參數PARA2P1記憶在記憶體中。For the instruction of 131 units, the data of the second wave surface is calculated by the modulus measurement point. Example 55 1253105 2 varies the amount of the above-mentioned coefficients of the Chanek polynomial. The change: the data is shown above. The picture i of the display, and the amount of change is stored in the memory with the parameter PARA2P1.

其次,若在X方向傾斜以軸周圍之旋㈣力之+方向 ’輸入只驅動T動透鏡13l #位量之指令的話,則藉由槿 擬用:腦46,針對第!量測點,算出第3波面之資料,例 L #出查涅克多項式之上述各項係數之變化量,該變化 量之資料係顯示在上述顯示器之畫面i,並且,該變化量 係以參數PARA3P1記憶在記憶體中。 一以後,用與上述同樣之步驟,進行第2量測點〜第『 量測點之各量測點之輸入’在每次分別進行可動透鏡A 之ζ方向移位、γ方向傾斜、χ方向傾斜之指令輸入時, 係藉由模擬用電腦46,算出各量測點之第i波面、第2波 面π第3丨皮面之資料,例如,各變化量之資料係顯示在顯 Λ 旦面上,並且,以 PARA1P2、 PARA2P2、 PARA3P2....... 在記憶體中。 PARAlPn、PARA2Pn、PARA3Pn 記憶Next, if the X-direction is tilted to the direction of the rotation of the T-axis (the + direction) around the axis, the command to drive the T-lens 13l is only used by the brain: 46, for the first! The measurement point is calculated, and the data of the third wavefront is calculated. For example, the change amount of the above-mentioned various coefficients of the binogell polynomial is displayed on the screen i of the above display, and the variation is determined by the parameter. PARA3P1 is stored in memory. After that, the second measurement point to the "input of each measurement point of the measurement point" are performed in the same manner as described above, and the displacement of the movable lens A in the ζ direction, the γ direction inclination, and the χ direction are performed each time. When the command input is tilted, the simulation computer 46 calculates the data of the i-th wave surface and the second wave surface π the third skin surface of each measurement point. For example, the data of each change amount is displayed on the display surface. On, and, in PARA1P2, PARA2P2, PARA3P2....... in memory. PARAlPn, PARA2Pn, PARA3Pn memory

關於,、他之132、i33、i34、135,也用與上述同樣之 步驟,進行各量測點之輸人、與在各自由度方向,分別在 «方向,、驅動單位量之指令輸入,對應此,藉由模擬用電 細46,針對在各自由度方向只驅動可動透鏡132、133、 4 5單位里之際之第1〜第n量測點,算出波面資料 开出查/圼克多項式之各項變化量,參數(pARA4P 1 PARA5P1 , PARA6P1 > ....... PARA15P1)、參數 56 1253105 (PARA4P2、PARA5P2、PARA6P2........PARA15P2)、 參數(PARA4Pn 、PARA5Pn 、 PARA6Pn ........ PARA15Pn)係記憶在記憶體内。 又,關於晶圓 W,係用與上述同樣之步驟,進行各量 測點之輸入、與在各自由度方向,分別在+方向只驅動單 位量之指令輸入,對應此,藉由模擬用電腦46,分別針對 在Z、0 X、0 y自由度方向只驅動晶圓W單位量之際之第 1〜第η量測點,算出波面資料,例如,算出查淫克多項 式之各項變化量,參數(PARA16P1 、PARA17P1 、 PARA18P1)、參數(PARA16P2、PARA17P2、PARA18P2)、 .......參數(PARA16Pn、PARA17Pn、PARA18Pn 係記憶在 記憶體内。 進一步,關於波長移位,也與上述同樣之步驟,進行 各量測點之輸入、與在+方向使波長只移位單位量之指令 輸入,對應此,藉由模擬用電腦4 6,分別針對在+方向只 使波長移位單位量之際之第1〜第η量測點,算出波面資 料,例如,算出查涅克多項式之各項變化量,參數 (PARA19P1、PARA19P2 ....... PARA 1 9Ρη)係記憶在記憶 體内。 此處,上述各參數PARAiPj(i=l〜19,j二1〜η)係37行 1列之列矩陣(縱向量)。即,若η=33的話,關於調整參數 PARA1,貝成為下式(6)。又,參數PARAiPj都是矩陣, 至於下式(6)以下之式,為了方便起見,採用行矩陣般之表 現形式。 12531〇5 PARA\P\ = [zx i Zj 2 ......1 - PARAIP2 = [Z2>1 Z2f2 ·_····2237] : ’ 卜,·(6) PARAlPn = [z331 Z33 2 ......233 37 j 又,關於調整參數PARA2,則成為下式(?)。 PARA2PI = [Ζυ Zl2 …2137] ι ΡΑΜ2Ρ2 = [ζ2λ Z2 2 …···Z2 1 : ,37j …(7)Regarding, his 132, i33, i34, 135, also use the same steps as above to carry out the input of each measuring point, and in the respective direction of the direction, in the direction, drive unit quantity command input, In response to this, the analog power supply 46 is used to calculate the wave surface data for the first to nth measurement points when only the movable lenses 132, 133, and 45 units are driven in the direction of the degree. The variation of the polynomial, parameters (pARA4P 1 PARA5P1 , PARA6P1 > ....... PARA15P1), parameter 56 1253105 (PARA4P2, PARA5P2, PARA6P2........PARA15P2), parameters (PARA4Pn, PARA5Pn, PARA6Pn........ PARA15Pn) is stored in memory. Further, regarding the wafer W, the input of each measurement point is performed in the same manner as described above, and only a unit amount of command input is driven in the + direction in each direction, and the analog computer is used. 46. Calculate the wavefront data for the first to nth measurement points when only the unit quantity of the wafer W is driven in the Z, 0 X, and 0 y degrees of freedom, for example, calculate the variation of the stagnation polynomial , parameters (PARA16P1, PARA17P1, PARA18P1), parameters (PARA16P2, PARA17P2, PARA18P2), ... parameters (PARA16Pn, PARA17Pn, PARA18Pn are stored in memory. Further, regarding wavelength shift, also with the above In the same step, the input of each measuring point is performed, and the command input of shifting the wavelength by only a unit amount in the + direction is performed, and correspondingly, only the wavelength shift unit amount in the + direction is respectively performed by the analog computer 46. At the first to the nth measurement points, the wave surface data is calculated. For example, the variation of the Chanek polynomial is calculated, and the parameters (PARA19P1, PARA19P2 . . . PARA 1 9Ρη) are stored in the memory. Here, the above parameters The number of PARAiPj (i = 1 to 19, j 2 - 1 to η) is a matrix of 37 rows and 1 column (longitudinal quantity). That is, if η = 33, with respect to the adjustment parameter PARA1, Bay becomes the following formula (6). The parameter PARAiPj is a matrix. As for the following formula (6), for the sake of convenience, the matrix matrix is used. 12531〇5 PARA\P\ = [zx i Zj 2 ......1 - PARAIP2 = [Z2>1 Z2f2 ·_····2237] : ' Bu,·(6) PARAlPn = [z331 Z33 2 ......233 37 j Also, regarding the adjustment parameter PARA2, it becomes the following formula (?). PARA2PI = [Ζυ Zl2 ... 2137] ι ΡΑΜ2Ρ2 = [ζ2λ Z2 2 ...···Z2 1 : ,37j ...(7)

PARAlPn = [z33 l Z33 2 ......233 3? J 同樣地,關於其他之調整參數pARA3〜PARA19,也 _ 戍為下式(8)。 PARA3P1 = Kl -· Γ •Μ PARA3P2= :[U2,2 … '^2,37 ] PARAiPn = [^33,1 ^33,2 * · ^33,3?] PARA19P1: [Zi,i Z12 … Γ PARA19P2 = lZ2,l ^2,2 *· 之2,37] PARA19Pn = =[^33,1 ^33,2 · **^33,37PARAlPn = [z33 l Z33 2 ... 233 3? J Similarly, regarding the other adjustment parameters pARA3 to PARA19, _ 戍 is the following equation (8). PARA3P1 = Kl -· Γ •Μ PARA3P2= :[U2,2 ... '^2,37 ] PARAiPn = [^33,1 ^33,2 * · ^33,3?] PARA19P1: [Zi,i Z12 ... Γ PARA19P2 = lZ2, l ^2, 2 *· of 2,37] PARA19Pn = =[^33,1 ^33,2 · **^33,37

因此,這樣一來,列矩陣(縱向量,其係由記憶體内所 圮憶之查涅克多項式之各項係數之變化量所構成)pARAipi 〜PARA19Pn係集中在各調整參數,進行交替並排來作為 19個調整參數之波面像差變化表。其結果,作成以列矩陣 (縱向量)PARA1P1〜PARA19Pn為要素之次式(9)所示之矩 陣(行列)〇。又’在式(9)中,m= 1 9。 58 Ϊ253105 PARAWl PARA2PI PARA1P2 PARA2P2 PARAmPl PARAmPl •⑼ PARAmPn PARAlPn PARAlPnTherefore, in this way, the column matrix (longitudinal quantity, which is composed of the variation of the coefficients of the Chanek polynomial recalled in the memory) pARAipi ~ PARA19Pn is concentrated in each adjustment parameter, and alternately arranged side by side. As a wavefront aberration change table of 19 adjustment parameters. As a result, a matrix (row and column) 所示 represented by the following equation (9) having the column matrix (longitudinal quantity) PARA1P1 to PARA19Pn as an element is created. Further, in the formula (9), m = 1 9 . 58 Ϊ253105 PARAWl PARA2PI PARA1P2 PARA2P2 PARAmPl PARAmPl •(9) PARAmPn PARAlPn PARAlPn

、因此,資料庫(其係由這樣所作成之投影光學系統pL 之波面像差變化表所構成)係儲存在記憶裝置〇之内部。 、其次’關於在本實施形態之曝光裝置⑽《維護時等 斤進订、,用來調整投影光學系統PL《圖案像之成像狀態 可動透鏡等之前述19個之調整參數之設定方 :,即,投影光學系統一般調整方法,包含其原理 呪明加以詳述。 首先1前❹驟,使用波面像差量職置 投影光學系統PL之波面像差。該量測結果十求出對 應“’光學糸統PL視野内之第i量測點(評價點)〜第。量 測點(評價點)之波面(波面像差)之資料,即 項式之各項,例如,求出ρ項係、數Ζι〜帛37;之= z37,記憶在主控制裝置5〇之RAM等之記憶體内。 在以下之說明中’能用下式(1〇)之列矩陣Q來表干對 應第4測點〜第4測點之波面(波面像差_。…'Therefore, the database (which is constituted by the wavefront aberration change table of the projection optical system pL thus formed) is stored inside the memory device. Next, in the exposure apparatus (10) of the present embodiment, the setting parameters of the above-mentioned 19 adjustment parameters for adjusting the projection optical system PL, the imaging state movable lens, etc., are set in the exposure apparatus (10). The general adjustment method of the projection optical system, including its principle and details. First, before the first step, the wavefront aberration of the projection optical system PL using the wavefront aberration amount is used. The measurement result ten finds the data corresponding to the wavefront (wavefront aberration) of the i-th measurement point (evaluation point) to the first measurement point (evaluation point) in the optical field PL field of view, that is, the item type For example, the ρ term system, the number Ζι 帛37, and the z37 are stored in the memory of the RAM of the main control device 5, etc. In the following description, the following equation (1) can be used. The matrix Q of the column corresponds to the wavefront corresponding to the 4th to 4th measuring points (wavefront aberration _....'

Q •(10) 59 1253105 又,在上式(1〇)中,左击 ,^ 陣Q之要素Ρι〜Pn係列矩陣(縱 向置,其係分別由查涅 ^ ~克夕項式之弟1項〜第37項之係 數(Z1〜Z37)所構成)。 其次,藉由主控制奘罢 ]凌置M,如以下所述,運算前述之 可動透鏡^丨〜^,之丄― 各自由度方向之調整量、晶圓w之各 自由度方向之調整量、昭 …、明先EL之波長移位量。 欠 ^對應帛1 $測點〜帛n量測點之波面(波面像差 )貝料Q則述貝料庫(矩陣〇)、前述19個調整量p之間 ’下式(11)之關係成立。 Q = 〇· P ••…(11) 在上式(11)中,P係用下式(12)來表示之m個(即丨9個 )之要素所構成之列矩陣(即縱向量)。Q •(10) 59 1253105 Also, in the above formula (1〇), left click, ^ Array Q elements Ρι~Pn series matrix (longitudinal, which are respectively by the Chane ^ ~ 克夕项之弟1 The coefficient of the item ~37 (composed of Z1~Z37)). Secondly, by means of the main control, the M is operated, and as described below, the above-mentioned movable lens is operated, and the adjustment amount of each degree of freedom and the adjustment amount of the wafer w by the degree of direction are calculated. , Zhao..., Mingxian EL wavelength shift amount.欠^correspond to 帛1 $measuring point~帛n measuring point wavefront (wavefront aberration) bedding material Q is the relationship between the shell library (matrix 〇) and the above 19 adjustment amount p 'the following formula (11) Established. Q = 〇· P • (1) In the above formula (11), P is a column matrix (ie, a longitudinal amount) composed of m (ie, 丨 9) elements represented by the following formula (12). .

ADJV ADJ2 …(12) ADJm 因此,根據上式(12)進行下式(1 3)之運算,即,藉由最 小平方法’旎求出p之各要素Adj i〜adJm,即,可求出 可動透鏡Ul〜135之各自由度方向之調整量(目標調整量) 、晶圓W之各自由度方向之調整量(目標調整量)、及照明 光EL之波長移位量(目標移位量)。 P=(0T· 0)- . 〇T. Q ……(13) 在上式(13)中,〇τ係行列〇之轉置矩陣,(〇τ · 〇)」係 1253105 (〇 · Ο)之反矩陣。 ±因此主控制裝置50係將記憶裝置42内之資料庫依 序讀入^ RAM内’算出調整量伽〜ADjm。 八-人,主控制裝置50係根據記憶裝置42所記憶之 J1 ADJ15,將各自由度方向驅動可動透鏡131〜135之 才"值供應給成像性能修正控制器Μ。因此,藉由成像性 月正控制器48,對各自由度方向驅動可動透鏡13广135 之各驅動元件來控制施加„,可動透鏡A〜A之位置 及方式之至少-方大致同時調整。與此同時,主控制裝置 5〇係在實際掃描曝光時,在ζ、θχ、^之各自由度方向 ’將用來驅動晶圓W之指令值供應給晶圓台驅動部(未圖 不),來驅動晶圓台WST,以使在曝光領域ΙΑ内晶圓W 經常保持與藉由調整量ADJ16〜ADm來調整之值等效之 方式。並且’與上述各動作之同時,主控制裝i 係根 據調整量ADJ19供應指令給光源16,使照明Α虹之波長 移位。藉此,使投影光學系統PL之光學特性,例如^ 變、像面·彎曲、慧形像差、球面像差、及像散像差等受到 修正。又、關於慧形像差、球面像差、及像散像差,其低 階及高階像差都能得到修正。 — 其次’針對投影光學系統PL之調整方法(其係以本實 施形態之曝光裝置⑽所進行之正交2轴方向之線圖案像 :此之線寬差之調整為目的)’順著第4圖之流程圖,且適 當地參照其他之圖面,加以說明。 首先,在第4圖之步驟H)2 t,係用前述步驟,使用 61 1253105 波面像差I、、s i # 差,其量測結果,:,,:量:㈣光學系統^之波面像 個(此處,㈣3) 、出技影光學系、统PL視野内之n Z37,然後記恃乂 、之係數Zl〜第37項< 37項之係數 :° 主控制裝置5〇之RAM等記憶體内。 以下 104中’以下所說明之量測用標線片RT( ^標線片RT」)係承載在標線片台RST上,並 且’量測用晶圓(方# t 、’ .WST ,上(方便上間稱「晶圓W丁」)係承載在晶圓 〇 。该標線片Rt之承載與晶圓WT之承載传在主 控制裝置50之指干下,—丄i 八戰係在主 /下精由未圖示之標線片承載5|、曰 圓承載器來進行。 日日 传二1 ’針對標線片RT,根據第5圖加以說明。第5圖ADJV ADJ2 (12) ADJm Therefore, the operation of the following equation (1 3) is performed according to the above equation (12), that is, the respective elements Adj i to adJm of p are obtained by the least square method '旎, that is, The amount of adjustment of each of the movable lenses U1 to 135 by the degree of direction (target adjustment amount), the amount of adjustment of the wafer W by the degree of direction (target adjustment amount), and the amount of wavelength shift of the illumination light EL (target shift amount) ). P=(0T· 0)- . 〇T. Q (13) In the above equation (13), the 〇τ is the transposed matrix of the rank 〇, (〇τ · 〇) is 1253105 (〇· Ο) The inverse matrix. Therefore, the main control device 50 reads the data banks in the memory device 42 into the RAM in order, and calculates the adjustment amount gamma ~ ADjm. In the eight-person, the main control unit 50 supplies the values of the movable lenses 131 to 135 that are driven by the degree of the direction to the imaging performance correction controller 根据 based on the J1 ADJ15 stored in the memory unit 42. Therefore, the imaging month controller 48 controls the application of each of the driving elements of the movable lens 13 wide 135 in the direction of the degree, and at least the position and the mode of the movable lenses A to A are adjusted substantially simultaneously. At the same time, the main control device 5 is used to supply the command value for driving the wafer W to the wafer table driving portion (not shown) in the respective directions of ζ, θχ, ^ in the actual scanning exposure. To drive the wafer table WST so that the wafer W in the exposure field is always kept equivalent to the value adjusted by the adjustment amounts ADJ16 to ADm, and 'the main control device is simultaneously with the above actions. According to the adjustment amount ADJ19, a command is supplied to the light source 16 to shift the wavelength of the illumination 。 rainbow. Thereby, the optical characteristics of the projection optical system PL, such as change, image plane curvature, coma aberration, spherical aberration, and The astigmatic aberrations and the like are corrected. Further, for the coma aberration, the spherical aberration, and the astigmatic aberration, both the low-order and high-order aberrations can be corrected. - Next, the adjustment method for the projection optical system PL ( It is exposed by this embodiment The line pattern image in the orthogonal two-axis direction performed by the device (10) is used for the purpose of adjusting the line width difference). The flowchart of Fig. 4 is used, and other drawings are appropriately referred to. First, Step H) 2 t of Fig. 4, using the above steps, using 61 1253105 wavefront aberration I, and si # difference, the measurement result, :,,: amount: (4) optical system ^ wavefront image (here (4) 3), the technical shadow optical system, the n Z37 in the PL field of view, and then record the coefficient of Z1~37 item &37; the coefficient of the item 37: ° The main control device 5〇 RAM and other memory. In the following 104, the measurement reticle RT (^ reticle RT) described below is carried on the reticle stage RST, and the measurement wafer (square #t, '.WST, (conveniently referred to as "wafer W") is carried on the wafer. The carrier of the reticle Rt and the carrier of the wafer WT are transmitted under the guidance of the main control device 50. The main/lower fine is carried out by a 5*, a circular carrier carried by a reticle (not shown). The daily transmission 2 1 ' is directed to the reticle RT, and is illustrated according to Fig. 5. Fig. 5

係從圖案面側來看標绩Κ ρ _ τ U 术有才不線片RTi平面圖。如第5 線片RT係形成長方形之圖宰 ^ 口茶7員域PA,其係具有由正方形 之玻璃基板所構成,與在該圖案面之中央部被遮光帶sb 圍住之照明領域IAR大致同樣之形狀。在圖案領域^之 内部形成合計33個之量測用圖案用圖案MPl〜MP。各 量測用圖案MPj(J = 1〜33),例如,當標線片 案3 PA)之中心與投影光學系統-之光轴AX 一致時,传^ 該位置’以使配置在對應量測前述波面像差之投影光學系 統PL有效視野内之各量測點(評價點)之位置。 各量測用圖案MM 系如第5圖所示,包含γ轴方向延 伸之設計上之線寬(例如’600nm)之第丨綠圖案與χ軸方 向延伸之設計上之線寬(例如,6〇〇nm)之第2線圖宰。若將 62 1253105 投影光學系統PL之投影倍率設定為1/4,將第丨線圖案與 ‘ 第2線圖案轉印到晶圓上的話,則在投影光學系統pL上 ,不存在球面像差、像散像差等各像差之理想狀態下,就 第1線圖案與第2線圖案之像而言,分別能得到線寬 150nm之線圖案像。 又’在通過圖案領域PA中心(與標線片中心一致)之χ 軸上之圖案領域p A之兩外側,形成標線片調準記號(M工、 M2)。該標線片Rt係承載在標線片台RST上之狀態下,圖 案面(弟5圖中,紙面前側之面)成為與投影光學系統對 鲁 向側之面。 在第5圖中,在下一步驟丨〇6中進行標線片調準。該 標線片調準,例如,在曰本特開平7_176468號公報及對應 該公報之美國專利5,646,413號等中,為了詳細揭示,主 控制裝置50係使用前述之標線片調準檢測系統,分別檢 測標線片Rt所形成之標線片調準記號(Ml、M2)與對應這 些形成在晶圓台WST上之基準記號板FM上之基準記號之 位置偏移,根據該檢測結果,調整標線片台Rs丁之χγ面 _ 内之位置(包含0 z旋轉),藉此進行以使兩者位置偏移為最 小。藉由泫標線片調準,標線片RT之中心與投影光學系統 P L之光軸大致一致。 在下一步驟108中,係在既定之照明條件下,配置在 照明領域IAR内之標線片Rt之各量測用圖案MPj係透過 投影光學系統PL,將標線片台RST及晶圓台WST靜止地 轉印在晶圓WT上,圖案領域PA内之量測用圖案Mp之像 “ 63 !2531〇5 (壯腎像)係形成在晶® Wt表面所塗佈之光阻層。又,主控制 置50係根據焦點位置檢測系統(術、6仙)之檢測結果, 里測用圖案ΜΡ』之像成像之像面,使晶圓I表面一致 ’透過晶圓台驅動部(未圖示),在2軸方向使晶圓台赠 稍微驅動,視需要,晶圓台職之傾斜角也加以調整。 使曰曰圓口 WST步進移動,在晶圓WT上之複數個領域 上’當然也可以依序轉印標線片Rt之圖案領域PA。From the side of the pattern, the standard score Κ ρ τ τ U is a plan of the RTi. For example, the fifth-line RT is formed into a rectangular figure, which is composed of a square glass substrate and is substantially surrounded by a light-shielding band sb in the central portion of the pattern surface. The same shape. A total of 33 patterns for measurement patterns MP1 to MP are formed in the pattern area ^. Each measurement pattern MPj (J = 1 to 33), for example, when the center of the reticle 3 PA) coincides with the optical axis AX of the projection optical system, the position is transmitted to make the corresponding measurement The position of each measurement point (evaluation point) in the effective field of view of the projection optical system PL of the aforementioned wavefront aberration. Each measurement pattern MM is as shown in FIG. 5, and includes a design of a line width (for example, '600 nm) in the γ-axis direction and a design line width extending in the z-axis direction (for example, 6). The second line of 〇〇nm) is slaughtered. If the projection magnification of the 62 1253105 projection optical system PL is set to 1/4, and the second line pattern and the 'second line pattern are transferred onto the wafer, there is no spherical aberration on the projection optical system pL. In an ideal state of various aberrations such as astigmatic aberration, a line pattern image having a line width of 150 nm can be obtained for each of the first line pattern and the second line pattern. Further, a reticle alignment mark (M work, M2) is formed on both outer sides of the pattern area p A on the 轴 axis of the pattern center PA center (consistent with the reticle center). In the state in which the reticle Rt is carried on the reticle stage RST, the pattern surface (the surface on the front side of the paper in Fig. 5) becomes the ruth side to the projection optical system. In Fig. 5, the reticle alignment is performed in the next step 丨〇6. The reticle alignment is exemplified, for example, in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. Hei 7-176468, and the corresponding Japanese Patent No. 5,646,413, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. The reticle alignment marks (M1, M2) formed by the detection reticle Rt are offset from the position marks corresponding to the reference marks formed on the reference mark plate FM on the wafer table WST, and the adjustment target is adjusted according to the detection result. The position of the yam plane _ γ plane _ in the reticle stage (including 0 z rotation) is thereby performed to minimize the positional deviation between the two. By aligning the reticle, the center of the reticle RT is substantially coincident with the optical axis of the projection optical system P L . In the next step 108, under the predetermined illumination conditions, the measurement patterns MPj of the reticle Rt disposed in the illumination area IAR pass through the projection optical system PL, and the reticle stage RST and the wafer stage WST It is statically transferred onto the wafer WT, and the image of the measurement pattern Mp in the pattern area PA "63!2531〇5 (strong kidney image) is formed on the photoresist layer coated on the surface of the wafer Wt. According to the detection result of the focus position detection system (shen, 6 sen), the main control unit 50 is used to image the image surface of the image, so that the surface of the wafer I is aligned 'through the wafer stage drive unit (not shown) ), the wafer table is given a slight drive in the 2-axis direction, and the tilt angle of the wafer stage is also adjusted as needed. The WST is moved step by step in the multiple fields on the wafer WT. It is also possible to sequentially transfer the pattern area PA of the reticle Rt.

在下一步驟110中,上述標線片1上之量測用圖宰 MP,斤轉印之晶圓W“系根據來自主控制裝置50之指示:、 從晶圓台WST下載,在曝光裝置1〇〇巾,用線内―) 連接之未圖示之光阻塗佈顯影裝置W devel〇per)中, 藉由未圖示之搬送系統來傳送。 在下一步驟112中,主控制裝置50係將指示供應給塗 佈顯影裝置之控制系站 40 ^ t 糸、、先,根據该指示,藉由未圖示之塗佈 顯影裝置,在晶圓W卜,你士曰、,In the next step 110, the measurement on the reticle 1 is performed, and the wafer W is transferred according to the instruction from the main control device 50: downloaded from the wafer table WST, in the exposure device 1 The wiper is conveyed by a transport system (not shown) by using a photoresist coating developing device (not shown) connected in the line -). In the next step 112, the main control device 50 is used. Directing the instruction to the control system of the coating and developing device 40 ^ t , first, according to the instruction, by applying a developing device (not shown), in the wafer W, you,

Wt上形成1測用圖案ΜΡ」之光阻像 在下γ驟1 U巾,該顯影後之晶圓wt係與前述同 樣,再承載在晶圓台WST上。 在下一步驟116中’進行晶圓Wt上之量測用圖案 MP』之光阻之線寬量測。該線寬量測,紗,係藉由主控 制裝置50 ’在χγ面内移動晶圓自WST,使用調準系統 ALG,依序攝影晶圓Wt上之至少i個量測用圖案Mpj之 光阻像才艮據n亥攝影之結果所得到之攝影信號,來進行既 定之處理(包含運算)。其結果,在各投影光學系統PL之評 64 1253105 仏點(量測點),即,各量測用圖案 像(這種情形係、指光阻像)線寬之^線寬線圖案 像(這種情妒孫 、、 ,、第2線圖案 ΡΛ 係&光阻像)線寬之第2線E L2,缺德針产 RAM等之計憶體β。 …、後儲存在 之二I:: "8中’主控制裝置5°係根據上述所求出 圖案ΜΡ』之線寬U與線寬以, 測用圖案MP.之缘實# Λ T T i τ 欠出有關各f 之記憶體内 見^ U — L2,然後儲存在⑽等 =針對晶之複數個領域,當進行上述之 領域,來I 之形成時,係針對各複數個 ,^ 仃上述線寬量測、線寬差之算出。這種情形, 二將從各複數個領域所得到之各量測用圖案 =列产如,單純平均值)當作各量測用圖案MPJ之線寬差見 产心出各:由千均化效果,使量測誤差減低,能更高精 ^宰广測用㈣叫之線寬差(即第1線圖案(縱線 )像線寬與第2線圖案(縱線圖案)之像線寬之差(以下 ,稱為「縱橫線之線寬差」))。 η在下,120中,係根據各評價點之縱橫線之線寬 差,與查淫克多項式之第12項之係數Ζ12之值, 設定第9項之係數ζ9。 此處,關於任-個評價點,根據波面像差之量測結果 所得到之第12項之禆勣7 丁曰雨 係數Zl2不疋零,即,在表1中,存在 以4階(Ρ之階數為4階心❹成份來表示之高階像散像 差者。廷係如第6圖之模擬結果所示,當&為零,即當 65 1253105 Ζ,^Οηι又時,係與4階0 (9成份之第9項之係數&之大小 無關’光瞳孔面内之波面在任一方向都成為同樣之錯亂方 式。由此可知,Z!2二0,即在第6圖中之上段(第6A圖〜第 6C圖),在任一圖面上,描繪由複數個同心圓所構成之等 高線圖形。 即,若ZifO,此處,因作為目的之縱橫線之線寬差 之控制(調整)困難,故關於任一個評價點,以波面像差之 量測結果所得到之第12項之Zu係數係假設為零者。至於The photoresist pattern of the 1st pattern W is formed on the Wt. The gamma is 1 U, and the developed wafer wt is carried on the wafer table WST in the same manner as described above. In the next step 116, the line width measurement of the photoresist of the measurement pattern MP on the wafer Wt is performed. The line width measurement, the yarn, moves the wafer from the WST in the χγ plane by the main control device 50', and uses the alignment system ALG to sequentially illuminate at least one measurement pattern Mpj on the wafer Wt. The obstruction image is subjected to a predetermined process (including calculation) based on the photographic signal obtained as a result of n-Hai photography. As a result, in each of the projection optical systems PL, 64 1253105 量 (measurement point), that is, a line width pattern image of the line width of each measurement pattern image (in this case, a photoresist image) In this case, the second line E L2 of the line width of the second line pattern, the second line pattern, and the photoresist pattern is produced. ..., and then stored in the second I:: "8 'the main control device 5 ° is based on the above-mentioned pattern ΜΡ 』 line width U and line width to, the measurement pattern MP. The real # Λ TT i τ owes the memory of each f to see ^ U - L2, and then stores it in (10), etc. = for a plurality of fields of the crystal, when the above-mentioned field is performed, the formation of I is for each of the plural, ^ 仃Line width measurement, line width difference calculation. In this case, the measurement pattern of each measurement obtained from each of the multiple fields = the production value, for example, the simple average value, is regarded as the line width difference of each measurement pattern MPJ. The effect is to reduce the measurement error, and to improve the line width difference (ie, the line width of the first line pattern (vertical line) and the line width of the second line pattern (longitudinal line pattern). The difference (hereinafter referred to as "the line width difference of the vertical and horizontal lines")). η is lower, 120, based on the line width difference between the vertical and horizontal lines of each evaluation point, and the coefficient Ζ12 of the 12th item of the singularity polynomial, the coefficient ζ9 of the ninth item is set. Here, regarding any of the evaluation points, the hoarding of the 12th term from the measurement result of the wavefront aberration is 7 曰 曰 系数 系数 Z l , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , The order is the fourth-order enamel component to represent the higher-order astigmatic aberrations. As shown in the simulation results in Figure 6, when & is zero, that is, when 65 1253105 Ζ, ^ Ο ιι, 4th order 0 (the coefficient of the 9th item of the 9th component is irrelevant to the size of the surface of the pupil plane. The wavefront in the pupil plane becomes the same disorder in any direction. It can be seen that Z!2 2, that is, in Fig. 6 In the upper section (Fig. 6A to Fig. 6C), a contour line pattern composed of a plurality of concentric circles is drawn on any of the drawings. That is, if ZifO, here, the control of the line width difference of the objective line is used. (Adjustment) is difficult. Therefore, for any of the evaluation points, the Zu coefficient of the 12th item obtained by the measurement results of the wavefront aberration is assumed to be zero.

實際之投影光學系統,在視野内之任一個缚# 1固斤1貝點,通常展 開波面像差之查淫克多項式之第12項之7 . 係數不是零, 這種假定可說是符合實情者。 Z9係指 又,在本實施形態中 進行以下處理之意。 所謂設定第9項之係數 即,在各評價點根據縱橫線之線寬差△ L與杳、 項式之第12項之係數zu值(大小),進行既定之運^克+多 9項之係數Z9之變化量之目標值Γ π ’第 1 ί 2 ······、 關於該算出之依據,容後述),算出把其他項變化量2 33)( 值當作零之下式(14)來表示之波面像差之變化旦里之目標 Q,。 里之目標值 户2, <2丨=;2 · "(14)The actual projection optical system, in the field of view, any one of the bounds 1 1 jin 1 point, usually the wavefront aberration of the 12th item of the omnipotent polynomial. The coefficient is not zero, this assumption can be said to be in line with the facts By. Further, in the present embodiment, the following processing is carried out. The coefficient of the ninth item is set at the evaluation point according to the line width difference Δ L of the vertical and horizontal lines and the coefficient zu value (size) of the 12th item of the item, and the predetermined value is 9 The target value of the change amount of the coefficient Z9 Γ π '1st ί 2 ·········································· 14) to indicate the change of the wavefront aberration in the target of Q, the target value of the account 2, <2丨=;2 · "(14)

.忍,J 66 1253105 在上式(14)中,各要素P/、P2’........Pn’(n = 33)係 分別用下式(15〇、(152)........(15J來表示之37行1列 之列矩陣(列向量)。 Ρ: 0' ^1,8 0 ^1,9 = ri ^1,10 0 ^1,37 0 ·0· ^2,8 0 ^2,9 = h Z2,10 0 Z2,37_ 0 ••(152) (15,)Forbearance, J 66 1253105 In the above formula (14), each element P/, P2'........Pn'(n = 33) is respectively of the following formula (15〇, (152).. ...(15J to represent the matrix of 37 rows and 1 column (column vector). Ρ: 0' ^1,8 0 ^1,9 = ri ^1,10 0 ^1,37 0 ·0 · ^2,8 0 ^2,9 = h Z2,10 0 Z2,37_ 0 ••(152) (15,)

.(15”).(15”)

由上述之式(15 0、(152)........(15n)也可知,各要素 P/、P2’........Pn’係能看作其各評價點(量測點)之查涅 克多項式第9項以外之係數全部為零,能看作第9項之係 數為rj(j = l〜33)之37行1列之列矩陣(列向量)。 因此,若用矩陣P ’來表示此時之各調整參數之調整量 67 1253105 的話 ,則使用前述之矩陣〇 Q,= 0 · Ρ, 下式(16)之關係成立。 ......(16) 跑|竿 ADJY ADJ2 (17) ADJm 在下一步驟122中 解上式(16),求出矩陣 次式(18)之運算。 ,主控制裝置50係用最小平方法來 P’(由各調整量所構成)。即,進行It is also known from the above equations (15 0, (152), ... (15n) that each element P/, P2'.....Pn' can be regarded as its evaluation point. The coefficients other than the ninth item of the Zernike polynomial (measurement point) are all zero, and can be regarded as the matrix of the column of 37 rows and 1 column (column vector) whose coefficient of the ninth term is rj (j = 1 to 33). Therefore, if the adjustment amount 67 1253105 of each adjustment parameter at this time is expressed by the matrix P ', the above-mentioned matrix 〇Q, = 0 · Ρ is used, and the relationship of the following formula (16) is established. (16) Run|竿ADJY ADJ2 (17) ADJm solves equation (16) in the next step 122 to find the operation of matrix sub-form (18). The main control device 50 uses the least squares method to P' (by Each adjustment amount is formed)

......(18) ρ,= (0τ · 0)·1 · 〇T · Q, 在下一步驟124中,主控制裝置5〇係根據上述所算出 之ρ’,即,算出調整量(ADJ1〜ADJ15、ADJ19),與前述(18) ρ, = (0τ · 0)·1 · 〇T · Q, in the next step 124, the main control unit 5 calculates the adjustment amount based on the calculated ρ' (ADJ1~ADJ15, ADJ19), and the foregoing

2樣,控制可動透鏡13ι〜135 #之調整各部,調整投影光 予系統PL等後,結束一連串之處理。又,關於晶圓之位 置及方式之調整量ADJ16〜調整量adj18,因使用在後述 之知描曝光時之晶圓台WST之位置控制,故事先記憶在 RAM或記憶裝置44中。藉此,投影光學系統pi之視野 内之33個評價點之波面像差,具體而言,查涅克多項式 之第9項係數僅份變動之投影光學系統Pl之調整完成 其結果,使用調整完成之投影光學系統PL,將縱線(v 、線)圖案與橫線(H線)圖案混在一起之標線片R上之電路圖 68 1253105 ⑽印在晶圓w上’藉此’為了使這些縱線(v線)圖案與 棱線(H線)圖案像之線寬差(縱橫線之線寬差)趨近設計值, 例如,加以修正以使趨近零。 :處::對調整上述之投影光學系統pL,藉此能修正 ^ ‘線之線見差之理由加以詳述。 ^L6圖Γ下段(第6D圖〜第㈣)係表示,當高階像 ;比里克多項式之第12項係數Z12=+20m;l時, 根據低階球面像差項之杳涅券In the case of controlling the movable lenses 13 to 135 #, the respective portions are adjusted, and the projection light is adjusted to the system PL or the like, and the series of processes is terminated. Further, regarding the position adjustment mode ADJ16 to the amount of adjustment adj18 of the wafer, the position is first controlled in the RAM or the memory device 44 by using the position control of the wafer table WST at the time of the exposure. Thereby, the wavefront aberration of 33 evaluation points in the field of view of the projection optical system pi, specifically, the adjustment of the projection optical system P1 in which the coefficient of the ninth term of the Zernike polynomial is changed only is completed, and the adjustment is completed. The projection optical system PL, the circuit on the reticle R on which the vertical line (v, line) pattern and the horizontal line (H line) pattern are mixed is shown in Fig. 68 1253105 (10) printed on the wafer w 'by this' in order to make these vertical The line width difference between the line (v line) pattern and the ridge line (H line) pattern image (the line width difference of the vertical and horizontal lines) approaches the design value, for example, corrected to approach zero. : at:: For the adjustment of the above-mentioned projection optical system pL, the reason why the line of the line can be corrected can be explained in detail. The lower part of the ^L6 diagram (6D to (4)) indicates that when the higher order image is the 12th coefficient of the Rick polynomial, Z12=+20m; l, according to the low-order spherical aberration term

化之光瞳面内之波面變:之=二第9項係數A之變 囝孫# 之N况(模擬結果)。其中,第6D ::表:UnU之情形,“E圖係 情形’第好圖係表示Z…〇nU之情形。 變化=些=’當第12項成份不是零時,若使第9項 第、⑷、、加之波面形狀係縱方向與橫方向相異。 二12項之符號為正時,例如,如第則所示光 :符,Γ::為正,上下相位為負。另-方面,當第9項 之付旒為正時,例如,如 相位為正,當第9項之符h圖所不,光瞳之外周緣部 亍,弁产之虎為負時,例如’如第6A圖所 :先曈之外周緣部相位為負。因此,當第 為正時,若第9項之符辨& χ 員之付唬 項之相位變化與第9項::的話,則在光瞳左右,第12 變化為正,故 、之相位變化為負,第9項之相位 文化马正,故互相減 示,在光瞳之左右方向::形’例如,如…所 i變小。 ^ ,皮面大錯亂’上下方向之波面錯 69 1253105 此處,標線片上之縱線(v線)圖案在橫方向具有空間 . 頻率成份,故從縱線(v線)圖案,在左右方向產生繞射光 ’橫線(H線)圖案在縱方向具有空間頻率成份,故從橫線 (H線)圖案,在上下方向產生繞射光。 因此,如上述,當第9項與第12項之符號相等時(第 6F圖之情形),在相位變化大之左右方向,產生繞射光之 縱線圖案像之對比變低,線寬變細。相對地,在相位變化 J、之上下方向,產生繞射光之橫線圖案像之對比幾乎不降 低,故線寬係大致與設計值相同。其結果,縱橫線之線寬 _ 差成為負值。 。與上述相反,當第12項之符號為正時,若第9項之符 號為負的話,則光瞳之左右第12項之相位變化為正,當 第9項之相位變化為負,故相互減弱,在光瞳之上下,第 12項之相位變化與第9項之相位變化都向負增強,這種情 $主’成為第6D圖所示之光瞳面内之波面分布。這 在相位變化大之上下方向,產生繞射光之橫線圖 右。對比臭低,線寬變細。相對地,在相位變化小之左籲 向,產生繞射光之縱線圖案像之對比幾乎不降低,故 線寬係大致與設計值相同。其結果,縱橫線之線寬差成 正值。 九 X上所述可知,當第9項與第12項都不是零時,光 目里之上下方向盘卢士 + 裳 〜右方向之波面錯亂方式係根據第9項與 插/員之符號之正負而異,著眼在該點,在固定第12項 值之狀態下,镧敕“ θ -, 整較易調整之第9項(低階球面像差成份) 70 1253105 ,藉此,能調整縱橫線之線寬差。 上述之第9項(p之階數為The wave surface change in the plane of the light of the light: the change of the coefficient of the second item of the second item, the change of the coefficient of the # Sun# (simulation result). Among them, the 6D::Table: UnU case, the "E picture system situation" the best picture shows the situation of Z...〇nU. Change = some = 'When the 12th item is not zero, if the item 9 is made (4), and the shape of the wavefront is different from the horizontal direction. The sign of the two 12th term is positive, for example, as shown in the first light: Γ: 为: positive, upper and lower phase is negative. When the payment of item 9 is positive, for example, if the phase is positive, when the symbol of the 9th item is not, the peripheral part of the aperture is 亍, when the tiger of the production is negative, for example, In Fig. 6A, the phase of the outer periphery is negative. Therefore, when the first is positive, if the phase change of the item 9 and the item of the item are the same as the item 9:: Around the aperture, the 12th change is positive, so the phase change is negative, and the phase culture of the 9th item is Ma Zheng, so the mutual subtraction is shown in the left and right direction of the pupil:: shape 'for example, as... ^, the leather surface is disorganized 'the wave direction error in the up and down direction 69 1253105 Here, the vertical line (v line) pattern on the reticle has a space in the lateral direction. The frequency component, so from the vertical line ( The v-line) pattern produces diffracted light in the left-right direction. The horizontal line (H-line) pattern has a spatial frequency component in the longitudinal direction, so that a diffracted light is generated in the vertical direction from the horizontal line (H-line) pattern. Therefore, as described above, When the sign of the ninth item and the twelfth item are equal (in the case of the sixth FW), the contrast of the longitudinal line pattern image of the diffracted light becomes lower in the direction of the phase change, and the line width becomes thinner. In the change J and the upper and lower directions, the contrast of the horizontal line pattern image in which the diffracted light is generated is hardly lowered, so the line width is substantially the same as the design value. As a result, the line width _ difference of the vertical and horizontal lines becomes a negative value. When the sign of the twelfth item is positive, if the sign of the ninth item is negative, the phase change of the twelfth item on the left and right sides of the pupil is positive, and when the phase change of the ninth item is negative, the mutual weakening is in the light. Above the 瞳, the phase change of the 12th item and the phase change of the ninth item are both negatively enhanced, and this case of the 'main' becomes the wavefront distribution in the pupil plane shown in Fig. 6D. This is above the phase change. Direction, the horizontal line of the diffracted light is generated right. Contrast stinky The line width is thinned. In contrast, in the leftward direction where the phase change is small, the contrast of the longitudinal line pattern image of the diffracted light is hardly lowered, so the line width is approximately the same as the design value. As a result, the line width of the vertical and horizontal lines is obtained. The difference is positive. As can be seen from the above, when the ninth and the twelfth items are not zero, the wave direction of the steering wheel in the light direction of the Luss + shang ~ right direction is based on the ninth item and the insertion/ The symbol of the member is different from the positive and negative. At this point, in the state where the value of the twelfth term is fixed, 镧敕 "θ -, the ninth item (low-order spherical aberration component) 70 1253105 , can adjust the line width difference of the vertical and horizontal lines. The above item 9 (the order of p is

之階數為4階之广一成伤)與第U項(P 差俜_ 成^〇咖成份))之相位變化之方向 差係降低P之階數,若老麿 份之, 考慮第4項之階數為2階0Θ成 〜 數Z4)與第5項㈠之階數為2階之Μ成 伤(cos2 0成份)之低階像 話,則易於理解。 像差項:係數卿之比較的 瞳左I 2項之符號為正時,例如’如第7E圖所示,光 ,當第4 °之:位為正’上下方向之相位為負。另-方面 工、之付號為正時,例如,如第 外周緣部之相位為正…4如第7C圖所不,光瞳 ^ 7δ 為 * $ 4項之符號為負時,例如,如 :::所示,光瞳外周緣部之相位為負。因此,當第5 方广項之符號係相等之第7F圖般之情形,光瞳左右 。之相位變化大,上下方向之相位變化小。相反地,當 产5:與第4項之符號係不相等之第π圖般之情形,光 =向:相位變化小’上下方向之相位變化大。 w但是,當第5項不是零時,在縱線圖案與橫線圖案, 取佳聚焦位置係根據該係數值而異,故若使第*項變 ^ 則縱線(V線)圖案與橫線(H線)圖案像之線寬差( 線寬差)’會根據散焦(即,第4項之變化)而產生。即,當 、'寬因散焦而變化時,係如第8圖之CD_聚焦線圖所示7 第4項不疋零之聚焦位置,對應第$項之縱線圖案與橫 線圖案之最佳聚焦位置之差’產生縱線圖案像⑺與橫線圖 案像(H)之線寬差。這是一般所見之2 0成份之像散像差存 71 1253105 在時之〇θ成份變化(散焦),對縱 線寬之影響之差。由此可知,當低階之==㈣ 項不是零時,調整表示散隹 成知弟5 與橫線圖案像之線寬差。項,㈣小縱線圖案像 …第9圖係表示使用波長為248.3nm之KrF雷 先源,照明為卜0.75之2/3環帶照明條件=為 PL之數值孔徑_補之情形,轉印前述之二= 片汉丁上之圖案所得到之光阻像之線寬量測 Γ 一、2-、一部份 :二細表示第9圖之&,λ、, =二部份卜在第1〇圖、第"圖中,各等高線圖 弟4項之#數Z4,縱軸係表示第5項之係數 Z5 〇 從這些說明可知,第9圖係表示針對分別在土I之 祀圍内,且肖2〇nU步驟使第9項係數&與第12項係數 Z12之值變化之各z9、Zi2之組合,^肖^分別變化時之 縱橫線之線寬差之關係圖。帛9圖中之各領域内所附之陰 影線等係表示第9圖之下欄所示之縱橫線之線寬差。線寬 差值為正之領域係表示縱線(V線)圖案像之線寬較橫線(H 線)圖案像之線寬粗,線寬差值為負之領域係表示縱線(V 線)圖案像之線寬較橫線(H線)圖案像之線寬細。The difference in the phase change between the order of the fourth order and the second item (P difference 成 成 成 〇 〇 成份 成份 成份 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低 降低It is easy to understand that the order of the term is 2nd order 0Θ成~3) and the order of the 5th item (1) is 2nd order and the lower order image of the injury (cos2 0 component). Aberration term: The sign of the left I 2 term of the coefficient comparison is positive, for example, as shown in Fig. 7E, when the 4th: the bit is positive, the phase in the up and down direction is negative. In addition, the paying number is positive, for example, if the phase of the outer peripheral portion is positive... 4 as shown in Fig. 7C, when the sign of the light 瞳^ 7δ is *$4, the sign is negative, for example, ::: The phase of the outer peripheral edge of the pupil is negative. Therefore, when the symbol of the 5th wide term is equal to the 7F picture, the light is around. The phase change is large, and the phase change in the up and down direction is small. On the contrary, in the case of the production of 5: the πth figure which is not equal to the symbol of the fourth item, the light = direction: the phase change is small, and the phase change in the up and down direction is large. w However, when the fifth item is not zero, in the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line pattern, the preferred focus position varies depending on the coefficient value, so if the *th item is changed to ^, the vertical line (V line) pattern and the horizontal line The line width difference (line width difference) of the line (H line) pattern image is generated according to the defocus (ie, the change of the fourth item). That is, when the 'width is changed by defocusing, the focus position of the fourth item which is not shown in the CD_focus line diagram of Fig. 8 corresponds to the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line pattern of the item $. The difference between the best focus positions produces a line width difference between the vertical line pattern image (7) and the horizontal line pattern image (H). This is the astigmatic aberration of the 20 component that is generally seen. 71 1253105 The difference in the effect of the θ component change (defocus) on the vertical line width. It can be seen that when the lower order ==(four) term is not zero, the adjustment indicates the line width difference between the divergent and the horizontal image. Item, (4) Small vertical line pattern image... Figure 9 shows the use of KrF Ray source with a wavelength of 248.3 nm, illumination for the 0.75 2/3 ring band illumination condition = PL numerical aperture _ complement situation, transfer The above two = the line width measurement of the photoresist image obtained by the pattern on the piece of Hanting. I. 2-, one part: two parts represent the &, λ,, = two parts of Figure 9 In the first map and the first graph, the number Z4 of each of the contour lines of the four contour lines is Z4, and the vertical axis indicates the coefficient Z5 of the fifth item. From these descriptions, the figure 9 shows that it is for the soil I. In the circumference, and the combination of the z9 and Zi2 of the ninth coefficient & and the value of the twelfth coefficient Z12, the relationship between the line width difference of the vertical and horizontal lines when the chord is changed separately. The shade lines and the like attached to the fields in Fig. 9 indicate the line width difference of the vertical and horizontal lines shown in the lower column of Fig. 9. The field where the line width difference is positive indicates that the line width of the vertical line (V line) pattern is larger than the line width of the horizontal line (H line) pattern image, and the line width difference is negative. The field indicates the vertical line (V line). The line width of the pattern image is thinner than the line of the horizontal line (H line) pattern.

第12A圖係表示取出帛9圖之左上所示之Zi2=4〇m;l Z「—4〇mA之等高線圖,第12C圖係表示對應第12A 72 1253105 之C-C線之CD-聚焦線圖。又,第12β圖係表示 10圖之上段中央所示之Zi2=40mA、z9=〇m又之等 。第12D圖係表示對應帛12B圖之D—D線之CD_聚焦線 圖°從這些圖可知’第9圖之各等高線圖係表示在Zi2^9 之某種組合條件下’根據散焦項(絲z4)與低階像散像差9 項(係數Z5)之變化,如何變化v線圖案像與H、線圖案像之 線寬差(以下,都稱為Γ VH差」)之圖。 當Zl2值為零時(從第9圖中之上’與第3段並排之5Fig. 12A shows a contour map of Zi2=4〇m; l Z "-4 mA" shown on the upper left side of Fig. 9, and Fig. 12C shows a CD-focus line map corresponding to the CC line of 12A 72 1253105. In addition, the 12th figure shows that Zi2=40mA, z9=〇m, etc. shown in the center of the upper part of the figure 10. The 12th figure shows the CD_focus line of the D-D line corresponding to the 帛12B figure. These figures show that the contour maps of Fig. 9 show how the change according to the change of the defocus term (filament z4) and the low-order astigmatic aberration 9 term (coefficient Z5) under some combination of Zi2^9 A diagram showing the line width difference between the v-line pattern image and the H and line pattern images (hereinafter, referred to as ΓVH difference). When the Zl2 value is zero (from the top in Figure 9) and the third paragraph alongside 5

個等高線圖)’29之值因各圖而異,但如第1()圖之下段之 各圖所示,無論在哪個圖哪個聚焦位置,若乙之值為零的 話,則不產生VH差。 相對地,當z12值不是零時,例如,# Zi2=+4〇m又時 ’從第10圖中之上段之各圖可知,若Z5 = 〇的話,則會起 因於而產生V線圖案與H線圖案之最佳聚焦差,線寬 之VH差雖因Z4之值而變化,但此時,各之VH差之值 會因Z9之大小而變化。為了更明確瞭解該vh差值心之 影響性,提供相當於高階像散像差項之係數&值之1/2之 20mA之Zs,用低階像散像差項(係數I),來修正高階像 散像差項之第12項之V線圖案與H線圖案之最佳聚焦差 係使 >又有線寬差之聚焦影響性之情形。 線寬之VH差係受值之影響,當Zi2值為正時,v 線圖案像之線寬係較Η線圖案之線寬細,相反地,當Zi2 值為負時,V線圖案像之線寬係較η線圖案之線寬粗,可 知能證明先前使用第6圖所說明之内容。 73 1253105 發明者專所進行之實驗結果,係用較佳聚焦差(在照明 ° 〇·4之通常照明條件下,線寬〇·72 # m線與間隙圖案 (L/S圖案)與線寬i4//mL/s圖案之較佳聚焦位置之差), 將球面像差項Z9之大小,從—〇· 1 § # m變更為一 〇 "爪 ’藉此確認能將線寬之VH差從27nm減低到7〜8nm。 從以上之說明可證明,如前述,在投影光學系統視野 内之各评彳貝點,根據縱橫線之線寬差(VH差)al與查淫克 夕員式之第12項係數z!2之值(大小),進行既定之運算, 算出第9項係數Z9變化量之目標值Γι........... rn(n=33),根據所算出之第9項係數&變化量之目標值, 進行前述投影光學系統之調整,藉此能調整縱橫線之線寬 差。 但是,本實施形態之曝光裝置1〇〇,係在製造半導體 元件時,製造元件用之標線片R係承載在標線片台RS 丁上 ,然後,進行標線片調準及所謂之基線量測、及 EGA(Enhanced Global alignment :增強型全晶圓調準)等晶 圓量測等準備作業。 又,關於上述之標線片調準及基線量測等準備作業, 例如,詳細揭示在曰本特開平7_176468號公報及對應該公 報之美國專利第5,646,413號等,又,其次,關於E(}A, 詳細揭示在日本特開昭6卜44429號公報及對應該公報之美 國專利第4,780,617號等,引用上述各公報及對應這些公 報之上述美國專利中之揭示,當作本說明書所記载之一 74 12531〇5 然後’根據晶圓調準結果,進行步進掃描方式之曝光 又’因曝光時之動作等與—般之掃描曝光裝置相同,故 :十對詳細說明加以省略。但是’本實施形態之曝光裝置 咖係在上述步進掃描方式之曝光時,使用藉由前述第4 圖之流程圖所示之調整方法來進行調整之投影光學系統pL ,又,在掃描曝光時,曝光領域ΙΑ之晶圓W之位置及方 式係根據所算出之調整量ADJ16〜ADJl8來進行控制。藉 本實施形態係在標線片R所形成之電路圖案中之縱線 圖案像與橫線圖案像之線寬差 左减低之狀悲下,這些像(潛像 )係形成在晶圓上之之各照射領域。 由以上之說明可知,太音A At ,. 本實^形態之調整部係由可動透 :Ul〜135、晶圓台WST、光源16所構成,可動透鏡13ι 〜i35、晶圓台 WST 之(ζ、^9Υ η 0 x、0 y)方向之位置(或其變 化1 )、及來自光源16之昭 、 …明先之波長偏移量成為調整量 並且’猎由上述各調整部、驅動可動透鏡之驅動元件及 成像性能之修正控制琴4S _ ^ 動心土闽 驅動晶圓台wst之晶圓台驅 動#(未圖示),來構成像形成狀態調整裝置。又 控制裝置來構成控制該像形成狀態調 " 置。但是,像形成狀態調整農置之構成传……衣 衣罝之構成係不限定在上述所 况明者,例如,就調整部 山叮口 —人 〜U5。這係因為即使錢=,也可只包含可動透鏡4 k種偽形也能調整投影光學李统之 成像性能(各像差)之故。 糸、,先之 又’本實施形態係藉由主控制裝置50(算 上所形成之量測用圖宰之伞 日日圓 案之先阻像之調準系統ALG,與根據 75 1253105 該調準系統ALG之攝旦彡产哚曰 案與橫線圖案之光阻傻Ί篁測用圖案所包含之縱線圖 ,^ ^ ^ Θ ^ 之線寬),來構成線寬量測裝置。又 就線見Ϊ測裝置而言 1〇〇 ^ ^ ^ 例如,也可使用設置在曝光裝置 〇〇之外部之專用量測裝置(S騰等)。 際所進行明:,投影光學系統“調整等之 之I測係使用波面像差量測裝置80, 根據透過針孔及投影 者,但不限於此,例^ 所形成之空間像來進行 所揭-夕蛀址 使用美國專利第5,978,〇85號等 斤揭不之特殊構造之量 ‘先罩,依序透過個別所設置 、十孔及投衫光學系統,將 、 各圖案曬印在基板上且#、 < *㈤!測用之 , ^ 、,且,也可不透過聚光透鏡及針孔 基板?、又〜光予系統’將該遮光罩上之基準圖案曬印在 土 胃各曬印之結果所得到之複數個 阻像之各基準圖案之曰、 案之先 運算 ^ ,置測位置偏移,藉由既定之 連异,异出波面像差。 如以上坪細之說明,若依本實施形態之投影光學系統 &之調整方法的話,則 予乎、充 ^ ^ ^ Ά ^ 杈〜先予糸統PL·,來控制受 二干…統PL之不易調整之高階像散像差(第12項)之 :曰所起因而產生之前述縱橫線之線差寬,來控制容易 ^㈣球面像差(第9項)。因此’能自由且確實進行習 ,難之縱線圖案像與橫線圖案像之線寬差之控制。 =若依本實施形態之曝光裝置100及該曝光方法的 ^波面^波面像ί量測裝置80能量測投影光學系統扛 /反面像差。又,晉淨丨I用挪 、J用軚線片RT之量測用圖案係透過投 76 1253105 影光學系統PL,轉印在曰 在晶圓上之量測用圖索:〃上’顯影後將該晶圓形成 用士周車έ纪、回一光阻像係藉由主控制裝置50,使 用圖案二來攝影,根據該攝影信號 又…3之縱線圖案與橫線圖案之光阻像之線寬。 所旦列之古控制裝置5〇,當展開藉由波面像差量測裝置80 所里測之波面像差 像差項@ i 克夕項式之第Η項之高階像散 ^ U學特性)不是零時,係根據該第^項(係數 12 、與上述所量測之縱、㈣案像之線寬之第!線寬 =線圖案像之線寬之第2線寬之差(線寬差),使用前述 形成狀悲調整裝置,將因與第12項之相互作用而使 上述線寬差受影響之查淫克多項式之第9項之低階球面像 处項(第2光學特性)之大小加以控制。即,使用像形成狀 態調整裝置來控制容易調整之低階球面像差之大小,藉此 能控制因不易調整之高階像散像差之存在而起因所產生之 前述線寬差。 並且’用照明光EL來照明標線片r之電路圖案,透 過凋整後之投影光學系統PL,將該電路圖案轉印在晶圓 φ W上。藉此,能實現有效減低縱線圖案與橫線圖案之轉印 像彼此之線寬差。 又,在上述實施形態中,雖已針對第丨光學特性係展 開波面像差之查涅克多項式第12項(高階像散像差項)之情 形’及第2光學特性係查涅克多項式第9項(低階球面像差 項)之情形加以說明,但本發明不限定在此者。例如,就第 1光學特性而言,也可量測與上述第12項(p之階數為4 77 1253105 成份)相…之階數為4階之μ成份_ 成伤)之第13項。這種情形,就第2光學特性而言, 使用與上述實施形態相同之第9 乐y項。由於第9項與第13 項之相互作用,在標線片上,對 對則述之縱線(V線)、橫線 (H線),使分別用45。交又方 也、、杲 — 门之第1斜線圖案像與與此 線正…2斜線圖案像之線寬差受到影響。因此 述實施形態同樣,當查淫克多項式之帛13項不是臾時, 根據該第13項(係數Z13)之值、盥% θ、, " 值與所置測之第丨斜線圖宰 像:線寬之第1線寬之第2斜線圖案像之線寬之第2線寬 之差(線寬差)’使用前述之像形成狀態調整裝置來控制查 涅2多項式之帛9項之低階球面像差項之大小,藉此能控 制前述之線寬差。The contour value of '29' varies depending on the graph, but as shown in the graphs below the 1() graph, no difference is found in the graph, no matter which map is in the focus position, if the value of B is zero, no VH difference is generated. . In contrast, when the z12 value is not zero, for example, # Zi2=+4〇m and then 'from the figures in the upper part of Fig. 10, if Z5 = 〇, it will result in a V-line pattern and The best focus difference of the H line pattern, the VH difference of the line width changes due to the value of Z4, but at this time, the value of each VH difference varies depending on the size of Z9. In order to more clearly understand the influence of the vh difference heart, a Zs equivalent to 20 mA of the coefficient & value of the higher order astigmatic aberration term is provided, and the low order astigmatic aberration term (coefficient I) is used. Correcting the case where the best focus difference between the V-line pattern and the H-line pattern of the 12th item of the high-order astigmatic aberration is caused by the focus influence of the line width difference. The VH difference of the line width is affected by the value. When the Zi2 value is positive, the line width of the v line pattern is thinner than the line width of the Η line pattern. Conversely, when the value of Zi2 is negative, the V line pattern is like The line width is thicker than the line width of the η line pattern, and it can be confirmed that the contents described in the sixth drawing are used. 73 1253105 The results of the experiments conducted by the inventors were based on better focus difference (line width 〇·72 # m line and gap pattern (L/S pattern) and line width under normal illumination conditions of illumination ° 〇·4 The difference between the better focus positions of the i4//mL/s pattern), the size of the spherical aberration term Z9 is changed from -〇·1 § #m to one 〇"claw' to confirm the line width VH The difference is reduced from 27 nm to 7 to 8 nm. From the above description, it can be proved that, as described above, each evaluation point in the field of view of the projection optical system is based on the line width difference (VH difference) a1 of the vertical and horizontal lines and the twelfth item coefficient z! The value (size) is calculated, and the target value of the ninth coefficient Z9 variation is calculated Γι........... rn(n=33), according to the calculated ninth coefficient & The target value of the amount of change is adjusted by the aforementioned projection optical system, whereby the line width difference of the vertical and horizontal lines can be adjusted. However, in the exposure apparatus 1 of the present embodiment, when manufacturing a semiconductor element, the reticle R for manufacturing the element is carried on the reticle stage RS, and then the reticle alignment and the so-called baseline are performed. Preparations such as measurement and wafer measurement such as EGA (Enhanced Global alignment). In addition, the preparatory work such as the reticle alignment and the baseline measurement described above, for example, is disclosed in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. Hei 7-176468 and the corresponding Japanese Patent No. 5,646,413, and the like, and secondly, regarding E (} A, and the disclosure of the above-mentioned each of the above-mentioned publications and the above-mentioned U.S. Patent No. 4,780,617, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. A 74 12531〇5 Then 'according to the wafer alignment result, the exposure of the step-and-scan method is the same as that of the general scanning exposure device, so the ten detailed explanations are omitted. In the exposure apparatus according to the embodiment, the exposure optical system pL adjusted by the adjustment method shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4 is used, and in the scanning exposure, the exposure field is used. The position and mode of the wafer W are controlled based on the calculated adjustment amounts ADJ16 to ADJl8. This embodiment is in the circuit pattern formed by the reticle R. The longitudinal line pattern is like the line width of the horizontal line pattern, and the left side is reduced. These images (latent images) are formed on the respective illumination fields on the wafer. From the above description, the sound A At , The adjustment section of the embodiment is composed of movable through: Ul~135, wafer table WST, light source 16, movable lens 13ι~i35, wafer table WST (ζ, ^9Υ η 0 x, 0 y) The position of the direction (or its change 1), and the wavelength offset from the light source 16 are the adjustment amount, and the hunting unit is controlled by the above-mentioned various adjustment parts, the driving elements for driving the movable lens, and the correction of the imaging performance. 4S _ ^ The center of the soil drives the wafer table wst's wafer table drive # (not shown) to form an image formation state adjustment device. The control device also controls the image formation state adjustment. However, the image formation The state adjusts the composition of the farm. The composition of the clothes is not limited to the above-mentioned conditions. For example, the adjustment section is Yamaguchi-human-U5. This is because even if the money =, it can only contain the movable lens. 4 k kinds of pseudo-shapes can also adjust the imaging performance of projection optics (像, 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 、 According to 75 1253105, the alignment system ALG's filming method and the horizontal line pattern of the light-resistance pattern are included in the vertical line diagram, ^ ^ ^ Θ ^ line width), to form the line width Measuring device. For the line to see the measuring device, 1〇〇^ ^ ^ For example, a dedicated measuring device (S Teng, etc.) disposed outside the exposure device can also be used. The optical system "adjusts the I measurement system using the wavefront aberration measuring device 80, according to the through-hole and the projector, but is not limited to this, and the space image formed by the example is used for the US-patent. 5th, 978th, 〇85th, etc. The amount of special structure that is not revealed by the first cover, through the individual settings, the ten holes and the optical system of the shirt, will print on the substrate and #, < *(5) ! For measurement, ^, and, can also not pass through the condenser lens and pinhole substrate? And the light-to-system" prints the reference pattern on the hood on the basis of the respective reference patterns of the plurality of resist images obtained by the results of the printing of the stomach and the stomach, and the operation of the case is first, and the positional deviation is set. By the established difference, the wavefront aberration is different. According to the above description of the plan, if the adjustment method of the projection optical system & according to this embodiment, it is necessary to charge, ^ ^ Ά ^ 杈 ~ first to the system PL ·, to control the two It is difficult to adjust the high-order astigmatic aberration (item 12): the line width of the aforementioned vertical and horizontal lines generated by 曰 is used to control the spherical aberration (item 9). Therefore, it is possible to control freely and surely, and it is difficult to control the vertical line pattern like the line width of the horizontal line pattern. = According to the exposure apparatus 100 of the present embodiment and the wavefront surface image ί measuring device 80 of the exposure method, the projection optical system 扛/reverse aberration is measured. In addition, the pattern used for the measurement of the 丨 、 用 用 用 RT RT RT RT RT RT RT 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 The wafer is formed by the squadron, and the photo-resist image is imaged by the main control device 50 using the pattern 2, and the photoresist pattern of the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line pattern according to the photographic signal is used. The line width. The ancient control device 5 所, when the wavefront aberration aberration item measured by the wavefront aberration measuring device 80 is developed, the high-order astigmatism of the Η Η item of the 夕 夕 项 item is developed. When it is not zero, it is based on the first item (coefficient 12, the line width of the above-mentioned measured vertical and (4) case width! Line width = line width of the line pattern image of the second line width (line width) a low-order spherical image term (second optical characteristic) of the ninth item of the omnipotent polynomial affected by the interaction with the twelfth item by the formation of the sorrow adjustment device The size is controlled, that is, the image forming state adjusting device is used to control the size of the low-order spherical aberration that is easily adjusted, thereby controlling the aforementioned line width difference caused by the presence of the difficult-adjusted high-order astigmatic aberration. And 'using the illumination light EL to illuminate the circuit pattern of the reticle r, and transferring the circuit pattern onto the wafer φ W through the fading projection optical system PL. Thereby, the vertical line pattern can be effectively reduced The line width difference between the transfer images and the horizontal line pattern is different from that of the above embodiment. Among them, the case of the 30th (high-order astigmatic aberration term) of the Bragg polynomial for the wavefront aberration of the second optical property system and the second optical characteristic is the Berneck polynomial item 9 (low-order spherical surface) The case of the aberration is described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, in the case of the first optical characteristic, the above-mentioned item 12 (the order of p is 4 77 1253105) can be measured... The order of the order is the fourth order of the μ component _ into the injury). In this case, the ninth y term which is the same as the above embodiment is used for the second optical characteristic. Due to the interaction between item 9 and item 13, on the reticle, the vertical line (V line) and the horizontal line (H line) are used for 45. The line width difference between the first slash and the slash pattern of the door is affected. Therefore, in the embodiment, when the 13 items of the stagnation polynomial are not ,, according to the value of the 13th item (the coefficient Z13), the 盥% θ, the " value and the measured slanting line image : The difference between the second line width of the line width of the second line width of the first line width of the line width (line width difference) is controlled by using the image forming state adjusting device described above to control the low of the Charney 2 polynomial The magnitude of the order spherical aberration term, whereby the aforementioned line width difference can be controlled.

其他,也可把第1光學特性當作展開波面像差之查, 克多項式之上述第12項、第13項以外之广之階數為_ W之2 旋轉對稱成份’把第2光學特性當作與第" =外之别述2階旋轉對稱成份同—階數之旋轉對稱成份。 、樣纟®第1光學特性之大小不是零時係根據該, 1光學特性之大小與量測所正交之2軸方向之線圖案彼识 像之線寬^,為了控 2光學特性,調整投影光學系叙 PL,推測藉此能得到與上述實施形態同等之效果者。 並且,就使前述之縱橫線之線差寬(VH ^光學特性之帛2光學特性之組合而言,除了上料說: 之查涅克多項式之第9項與第12項之組合外,也有第6 項(係數Z6)與第18項(係數Z1S)、第13項(係數Zi3)與第 78 1253105 18項(係數Z18)、第12項(係數u與第17項(係數等. 之組合。 、發明者等,因能有效判斷展開波面像差之查涅克多項 式項(查涅克項)之組合是否成為VH差之原因,故進行用 來具體發現造成VH差原因之組合模擬。 、第13圖係用圖表來表示在光源為ArF準分子雷射(波 長為193nm)、投影光學系統pL之數值孔徑(να) = 〇·68、照 月J -0.85、2/3環帶照明條件下,用晶圓上換算值將線寬 = 〇nm(包含遮光罩偏差· +4如叫之孤立線間矩)當作鲁 七線片圖案’使用透過率為6%之半色調型之移相遮光罩( 払線片),在晶圓上,將孤立線之線寬加工成㈤時之 像差間之交又項之計算結果。在該第13圖中,zi(i=4〜 2〇)係表示查涅克項第i項。 在該第13圖中,斜境界線之右上側係各像差(查涅克 j )之父又項對橫線之大小,左下側係各像差(查涅克項)之 二又項對縱線之大小。從該第13圖之表可知,第9項(Z9) 與第12項(Z12)之組合之交叉項在橫線為759,在縱線為_ ~ 759,符號正好相反。 八他第6項(Z6)與第is項(Z18)、第π項(Z13)與第 U項(Z18)、第12項(212)與第17項⑻乃等之組合,縱橫 線之交又項符號也相反,成為VH差之原因。 、 、就第1光學特性與第2光學特性之組合而言,雖考慮 述各種查涅克項彼此間之組合,但不限於此,也可把第 1光學特性當作像散像差,把第2光學特性當作球面像差 79 1253105 。這樣一來,若考慮像散像差盥 左,、球面像差之相互作用使縱 線圖案像與橫線圖案像之線寬差受影響的❺,則當投影光 學系統之光學特性之量測結果存在像散像差時,係根據該 像散像差之大小與所量測之正六 j之正父2軸方向之線圖案彼此像 之線寬差,為了控制球面像差, 私左凋整投影光學系統PL,藉 此能控制線寬差。 又右考慮k種情形的話則能明瞭,但投影光學系統 PL之光學特性量測裝置係不限定在波面像差量測裝置也 可是用來量測投影光學系統PL <球面像差像散像差等 所謂之賽德(Seidel)之5像差之裝置。例如,就該裝置而言 ,有所謂之空間像量測器等,其係在晶圓自術上形 成隙縫狀或矩形狀之開口圖案,對藉由投影光學系統π 所形成之既定之量測用圖案之空間像,來掃描該開口圖案 用光電元件來檢測透過開口圖案之光。 、又,在上述實施形態中,投影光學系統P]L之波面像 差係使用波面像差測定器1G來直接量測者,但不限於此 因第12項(係數Zn)係高階像散像差項,故例如,也可 刀別求出週期方向相異之複數種之L/s圖案(或方向相異之 孤:線圖案)之較佳聚焦位置,該結果所得到之像散像差係 用取小平方法等,來算出假定低階像散像差項(係數Z5)與 高階像散像差項(係數Zi2)之線性結合之計算式之各未定係 數藉此來求出第12項(係數Zij之近似值。上述週期方 向之相異複數種之L/s目案之較佳聚焦位置之求出係一面 變更晶圓光轴方向之位置,一面用隱#來量測光阻像( 1253105 其係形成在將上述圖案曬印在該晶圓上之結果所得到之晶 0上之各照射領域),也可使用前述之空間像量測器,二 變更該空間像量測器光軸方向之位置,一面進行上述圖案 之空間像量測,根據該空間像之量測結果來求出。 ^ #又,當用與上述實施形態同樣之構成來構成線寬量測 裝置時’不限於光阻像’也可量測形成在晶圓上之前述縱 線圖案與橫線圖案之潛像或蝕刻像之線寬。或也可藉由前 述空間像量測裝置來構成線寬量測裝置。這種情形:例:: ,在像面上形成縱線圖案與橫線圖案之空間像,藉由空^ 像量測I置來量測該空間像之線寬。㈣,同時 成與線寬之量測。 ^In addition, the first optical characteristic can also be regarded as the investigation of the developed wavefront aberration. The wide order other than the above-mentioned 12th and 13th items of the gram polynomial is _W 2, the rotationally symmetric component 'the second optical characteristic It is the same as the second-order rotationally symmetric component of the second-order rotation-symmetric component. The size of the first optical characteristic of the sample 纟® is not zero. According to the difference between the size of the optical characteristic and the line pattern of the two-axis direction orthogonal to the measurement, the line width of the image is recognized. The projection optical system PL is presumed to have an effect equivalent to that of the above embodiment. Further, in addition to the linear difference of the above-mentioned vertical and horizontal lines (the combination of the optical characteristics of VH^ optical characteristics ,2, in addition to the combination of the ninth and twelfth items of the Charneck polynomial, there are also Combination of item 6 (coefficient Z6) and item 18 (coefficient Z1S), item 13 (coefficient Zi3) and 78 1253105 18 (coefficient Z18), item 12 (coefficient u and item 17 (coefficient, etc.) The inventor, etc., is able to effectively determine whether the combination of the Zernike polynomial term (Chagnek term) for the wavefront aberration is the cause of the VH difference, so a combination simulation for specifically finding the cause of the VH difference is performed. Figure 13 is a graph showing the illumination of the ArF excimer laser (wavelength 193 nm), the numerical aperture of the projection optical system pL (να) = 〇·68, the monthly J-0.85, 2/3 ring illumination conditions. Next, using the on-wafer conversion value, the line width = 〇nm (including the hood deviation · +4, such as the isolated line moment) is used as the Lu 7 pattern, using a halftone shift with a transmittance of 6%. Phase hood (twisted wire), on the wafer, the line width of the isolated line is processed into the intersection of the aberrations of (5) In the 13th figure, zi(i=4~2〇) represents the i-th term of the Chanek term. In the 13th figure, the upper right side of the sloping boundary is the aberration (Zanike) The father of j) is the size of the horizontal line, and the lower left side is the size of each of the aberrations (Chagnek) and the vertical line. From the table of Fig. 13, the 9th item (Z9) and The cross term of the combination of item 12 (Z12) is 759 on the horizontal line and _ ~ 759 on the vertical line, and the sign is exactly the opposite. Eightth of the sixth item (Z6) and the is item (Z18), the πth item (Z13) With the combination of the Uth (Z18), the 12th (212), and the 17th (8), etc., the sign of the vertical and horizontal lines is also opposite, which is the cause of the VH difference. (2) The combination of the optical characteristics is considered to be a combination of various Charnike terms, but is not limited thereto, and the first optical characteristic may be regarded as astigmatic aberration and the second optical characteristic may be regarded as spherical aberration. 79 1253105. In this way, if the astigmatic aberration is left, and the interaction of the spherical aberration causes the line width difference between the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line pattern to be affected, then the optical of the projection optical system When there is astigmatic aberration in the measurement result of the characteristic, the line width difference between the line pattern of the positive two-axis direction of the measured positive framing is based on the magnitude of the astigmatic aberration, and in order to control the spherical aberration, The left-handed projection optical system PL can control the line width difference. The right side can be understood in consideration of the k cases, but the optical characteristic measuring device of the projection optical system PL is not limited to the wavefront aberration measuring device. However, it is a device for measuring the aberration of the so-called Seidel such as the projection optical system PL < spherical aberration astigmatic aberration. For example, in this device, there is a so-called space image measuring device, etc. And forming a slit pattern or a rectangular opening pattern on the wafer, and scanning the opening pattern with the photoelectric element to detect the through-space image of the predetermined measurement pattern formed by the projection optical system π The light of the opening pattern. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the wavefront aberration of the projection optical system P]L is directly measured using the wavefront aberration measuring device 1G, but is not limited to the fourth order (coefficient Zn) high-order astigmatism image. For the difference, for example, it is also possible to obtain a better focus position of a plurality of L/s patterns (or different directions of the line: line pattern) in which the periodic directions are different, and the astigmatic aberration obtained by the result is obtained. The indeterminate coefficient of the calculation formula of the linear combination of the hypothetical low-order astigmatic aberration term (coefficient Z5) and the higher-order astigmatic aberration term (coefficient Zi2) is calculated by taking the Xiaoping method or the like to obtain the twelfth term. (Approximate value of the coefficient Zij. The preferred focus position of the L/s case of the different plural types in the above-mentioned periodic direction is obtained by measuring the position of the optical axis direction of the wafer while measuring the photoresist image with hidden #1253105 It is formed in each illumination field on the crystal 0 obtained by printing the above pattern on the wafer, and the spatial image measuring device may be used, and the optical axis direction of the spatial image measuring device may be changed. Positioning, performing spatial image measurement of the above-mentioned pattern, according to the image of the space The measurement result is obtained. ^# Further, when the line width measuring device is configured by the same configuration as that of the above embodiment, the longitudinal line pattern formed on the wafer can be measured and not limited to the photoresist image. The line width of the latent image or the etched image of the horizontal line pattern. Alternatively, the line width measuring device may be configured by the above-described aerial image measuring device. In this case, for example, a vertical line pattern and a horizontal line are formed on the image surface. The spatial image of the line pattern is measured by the space image measurement I. The line width of the space image is measured. (4) Simultaneously measure the line width. ^

〜, ,,,V ,叫…肌π,係針對造 同一線寬之縱線圖案與橫線圖案之像之線寬差大致為烫 線寬差之控制時來加以說明,但本發明之投影光學系= 調整方法等,不限於此,若是正交2軸方向之圖案彼此 的話,則與線寬之情況無關(即使該線寬相異),能進石 些像彼此之線寬差之控制。就線寬差之控制而言,能护 正確趨近設計上之線寬差之圖案像之線寬差。 又,上述實施形態,用本體(投影光學系統搭載在曝光 裝置之狀態)來進行投影光學系統之調整,但例如 ^ ^ q如,在曝光 裝置(特別係投影光學系統)之製程等中,也可料載在曝/ 裝置前,用單體來調整投影光學系統。 但是,產生正交2軸方向之線圖案像彼此之線寬差之 主因係不限於投影光學系統之像差所造成者, i可愿ί示線 81 1253105 片上之圖案榣畫决差所造 拌士夕T > ,土 贯形〇為了減低這種主因所 k成之正父2軸方向之線圖 太路阳*机取 茶像彼此之線寬差,也能使用 本^月之杈衫光學系統之調整 ^ 、士 ^ ^ 万去、曝光方法、或曝光裝 置。廷種^形係與上述實施形離、 弁與胜Mt y r l 心冋樣,根據所量測之第1 先子特性,例如,查涅克多 笼!仏㈤也 員式之苐12項值、與已知之 第1線圖案之線寬與與此正交 n m k 又之第2線圖案之線寬差(描晝 决差),因與第1光學拉槌 ^ 、 相互作用,而使藉由投影光學 m安开V成在像面上之別述S 1線圖案像線寬與前述第2線~, ,,,V,... muscle π, which is explained when the line width difference between the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line pattern of the same line width is substantially the control of the hot line width difference, but the projection of the present invention The optical system = adjustment method, etc. are not limited to this. If the patterns in the orthogonal two-axis direction are different from each other, regardless of the line width (even if the line width is different), the control of the line width difference between the images can be performed. . In terms of the control of the line width difference, it is possible to protect the line width difference of the pattern image which is correctly approached to the design of the line width difference. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the projection optical system is adjusted by the main body (the projection optical system is mounted on the exposure device), but for example, in the process of the exposure device (particularly, the projection optical system), The projection optical system can be adjusted with a single unit before being placed in the exposure/device. However, the main cause of the line width difference between the line patterns of the orthogonal two-axis directions is not limited to the aberration caused by the projection optical system, i may wish to show the line 81 1253105 on the chip. Shi Xi T >, in order to reduce this main cause, the line of the two-axis direction of the right parent is too road-yang * machine to take the tea line width difference, you can also use this ^ month shirt Adjustment of the optical system ^, 士 ^ ^ Wan, exposure method, or exposure device. The genus of the genus and the above-mentioned implementation of the shape, 弁 and win Mt y r l heart 冋, according to the measured first neutron characteristics, for example, Zanikedo cage!仏(5) The value of the 12 items, the line width of the known first line pattern, and the line width difference of the second line pattern of the orthogonal nmk and the second line pattern, because of the first optical pull槌^, interaction, so that by the projection optics m, V is formed on the image surface, the S 1 line pattern image line width and the aforementioned second line

圖案像線寬之差(線寬差)受影響之第2光學特性,例如, 為了控制杳埋杳多Jg彳笙0 π 一見夕項式第9項之大小,調整投影光學系統 。因此’藉由投影光學系統形成在像面上之第i線圖案像 線寬與前述第2線圖案像線寬之差(線寬差),當因標線片 上之圖案之描畫誤差等原因而產生時,能自由控制正交之 線圖案彼此之線寬差。 又,由以上之說明也可知,能得到投影光學系統之波 面像差之資訊,能進一步得到有關圖案投影像之資訊,當 進一步根據這些資訊來調整投影光學系統之際,係使用查 /圼克多項式’在將前述波面像差級數展開之複數個查涅克 員中’也可對前述投影像特性之變化(該相互作用影響前述 投影像特性之任意查涅克項之組合之交叉項),考慮查涅克 感度’來調整前述投影光學系統,這樣一來,對前述投影 像特性之變化(習知所未考慮之該相互作用影響圖案投影像 特性之任意查淫克項之組合之交叉項),考慮查涅克感度, 來调整投影光學系統,故習知調整困難之像差成份,例如 82 !2531〇5 ,也能調整高階像差成份等,能 b °周整圖案像之形成狀態更 佳之投影光學系統。在這種情形π ^ 種馆形下,當圖案包含線圖案時 ,就前述投影像之特性而言,也 .,. 吧了對至少包含該線圖案之 線寬之特性變化,考慮杳涅克碭 一 4度。又,這種情形也可使 用调整後之投影光學系統,將 电路圖案轉印在晶圓等物體 上。這種情形也能實現高精度之圖案轉印。 但是’不僅縱橫線之線寬差,而錄立之線圖案像之 「線寬也受散焦量之影響。此處,I明者等為了求出前述之 CD-聚焦曲線,進行實驗。 就曝光條件而言,传個定水 係假疋先源為ArF準分子雷射(波長 為193nm),投影光學系统p 予示、、元之數值孔徑(NA)=178,照明 σ =0.85,2/3環帶照明條株, ”牛對象圖案形成在6%半色調遮 光罩(標線片),用晶圓換算值,線寬為刚⑽之孤立線(2 "m間距)。又,在無像差且無散焦之條件下,求出曝光量 求出在+〇.~m散焦之位置之線寬偏差么 CD。 一,圼克項,例如,將5〇111又之像差輸入光學 模擬用之電腦,若你筮! κ ^ 弟 項到第3 7項求出查涅克感度的 話,則如第14圖所+。— 不在弟14圖中,橫軸之Z i(i=1〜 37)係表示各查涅克項。 在習知之查涅克感度法(Zernike Sensitivity法:以下 簡稱「ZS法」)中,能用下式(19)所表示t Zermke Sens^tyUXT , ^ # )Si(1=1〜37)、與第n量測點(以下,也稱為量測點n)之各 83 1253105 查〉圼克項之大小cn,i(=係數zd之線性結合來表示線寬偏差 △ CD。又,以下,將cn i簡稱為各量測點之查淫克項成份 (查涅克項成份)。 37 ΔΟ) = 55Α,/ …(19) /=1 但是,在使用上式(19)之ZS法之計算結果、與提供適 當之波面像差直接計算空間像之手法之間,看得見第15 圖之曲線所示之乖離。即,使用上式(19)之zs法之計算誤 差過大。 因此,發明者等考慮在將聚焦與線寬當作座標軸之2 維面内使CD_聚焦曲線移動,來推定線寬之方法。 如上述,因直接用查涅克項成份之線性結合來表示△ CD之手法之線寬預測誤差大,故在查涅克感度之算出與 △⑶之計算之間,加CD_聚焦曲線之平行移動之:個;The second optical characteristic that is affected by the difference in line width (line width difference) of the pattern image, for example, is to adjust the projection optical system in order to control the size of the ninth item of the Jg 彳笙0 π. Therefore, the difference between the line width of the i-th line pattern image formed on the image plane by the projection optical system and the line width of the second line pattern image (line width difference) is caused by the drawing error of the pattern on the reticle or the like. When generated, the line width difference between the orthogonal line patterns can be freely controlled. Further, as is apparent from the above description, information on the wavefront aberration of the projection optical system can be obtained, and information on the pattern projection image can be further obtained. When the projection optical system is further adjusted based on the information, the use of the scanning optical system is used. The polynomial 'in a plurality of Chaneks who expand the wavefront aberration series' can also change the aforementioned image characteristics (the interaction affects the cross-term of any combination of the aforementioned Zernike terms of the projected image characteristics) Considering the Chanig's sensitivity' to adjust the aforementioned projection optical system, so that the change of the aforementioned projection image characteristics (the conventionally unconsidered interaction affects the combination of any combination of the imaging features of the image projection image characteristics) Item), considering the Chanig's sensitivity, to adjust the projection optical system, so it is customary to adjust the aberration components, such as 82!2531〇5, can also adjust the high-order aberration components, etc., can form the pattern of b ° A better-looking projection optical system. In this case, when the pattern contains a line pattern, in terms of the characteristics of the above-mentioned projected image, also, the characteristic variation of the line width including at least the line pattern is considered, considering the Nike砀 4 degrees. Moreover, in this case, the adjusted projection optical system can also be used to transfer the circuit pattern onto an object such as a wafer. This situation also enables high-precision pattern transfer. However, not only the line width of the vertical and horizontal lines, but also the line width of the line image of the line is affected by the defocus amount. Here, I Ming et al. conducted experiments in order to obtain the CD-focus curve described above. In terms of exposure conditions, the origin of a fixed water system is an ArF excimer laser (wavelength is 193 nm), the projection optical system p is shown, the numerical aperture (NA) = 178, illumination σ = 0.85, 2 /3 ring with lighting strip, "The cow object pattern is formed in a 6% halftone hood (reticle), with wafer conversion value, line width is just (10) isolated line (2 " m pitch). Further, under the condition of no aberration and no defocus, the exposure amount is obtained, and the line width deviation at the position of the defocus of +〇.~m is obtained. First, the gram item, for example, the 5 〇 111 and the aberration into the computer for optical simulation, if you yo! The κ ^ brother to the third item 7 to find the Chanek sensitivity, as shown in Figure 14. — In the picture of the younger brother 14, the Z i (i = 1 to 37) on the horizontal axis indicates each Zagnek term. In the conventional Zernike Sensitivity method (hereinafter referred to as "ZS method"), t Zermke Sens^tyUXT , ^ # )Si (1 = 1 to 37) can be expressed by the following formula (19), and Each of the n-th measuring points (hereinafter, also referred to as the measuring point n) 83 1253105 checks the size of the item cn, i (= the linear combination of the coefficients zd to indicate the line width deviation ΔCD. Again, below, Cn i is abbreviated as the component of the inspection component of each measurement point (Zagnek component). 37 ΔΟ) = 55Α, / ...(19) /=1 However, the calculation using the ZS method of the above formula (19) The result, and the method of directly calculating the spatial image by providing appropriate wavefront aberrations, can be seen in the curve shown in Fig. 15. That is, the calculation error using the zs method of the above formula (19) is too large. Therefore, the inventors have considered a method of estimating the line width by moving the CD_focus curve in a two-dimensional plane in which the focus and the line width are used as coordinate axes. As described above, since the linear width prediction error of the ΔCD method is directly expressed by the linear combination of the components of the Zernike term, the parallelization of the CD_focus curve is added between the calculation of the Chanek sensitivity and the calculation of the Δ(3). Move: one;

:,根據該步驟(平行移動)執行後之⑶·聚焦曲線,採用 异出△ CD之手法。 π总萌綠之移動,係分別用 度來表示各量測點η之聚隹古 \方向之移動1 ( α η)與線寬( 方向之移動量(石)。盆+ ^η)八乂,例如,也可平行移動 ^ (其係CD-聚焦曲線),作成y=f(x— + 焦曲線’針對新作成之函數來計算△⑶。" (預測方法) 以下,針對本發明之 預,則方法一例之CD_聚焦曲差 84 1253105 測方法之實施形態,順著表示該處理流程之流程圖(第 圖、第24圖)’且適當參照其他圖面加以說明。 在本實施形態中’關於曝光裝置100之前述波面像差 之各量測點n(n=l〜33),係使用包含查涅克項成份c 之 複數項之線性結合之查涅克感度法,來預測圖案投影η像之 特|±之一之CD-聚焦曲線。就各查涅克項成份Cn i而言, 也可使用藉由模擬用電腦46上之成像模擬所預先求出者 ,如前述,也可使用藉由波面像差量測裝置8〇之量測所 求出之值。 百先,在第16圖之步驟202中,係透過模擬用電腦 46之輸入裝置,將包含實際曝光時之光學條件 昭 明光EL之波長,即曝光波長(及曝光用之光源16之種類 等)、投影光學系統PL之最大NA(數值孔徑)、使用NA(在 本實施形態中,曝光時,用開口光圈15戶斤設定之數值孔 徑)、相干係數σ值(照明or)或照明NA(照明光學系統之數 值孔徑)、及標線片之照明條件(照明光學系統光瞳面上之 照明光EL之光量分布、即2次光源之形狀與大小)等)等之籲 曝光條件叹定在模擬用電腦46。此時,在模擬用電腦Μ 上’成像模擬器業已啟動,在該畫面上,顯示成像模擬器: According to the (3)·focus curve after the execution of this step (parallel movement), the method of different Δ CD is adopted. The movement of π total green is the degree of movement 1 (α η) and line width (movement of direction (stone). Basin + ^η) gossip of each measurement point η. For example, it is also possible to move in parallel (which is a CD-focus curve), and make y=f (x- + focal curve ' to calculate Δ(3) for a newly created function. " (predictive method) Hereinafter, the present invention is In the embodiment, the CD_focus curvature difference 84 1253105 is an embodiment of the method, and the flow chart (FIG. 24, FIG. 24) showing the processing flow will be described with reference to other drawings. In the 'measurement point n (n=l~33) of the aforementioned wavefront aberration of the exposure apparatus 100, the pattern is predicted by using a linear combination of the Zernike sensitivity method including the complex term of the Zernike term component c. A CD-focus curve that projects one of the characteristics of the η image|±. For each of the Zernike component Cn i, it can also be pre-determined by imaging simulation on the simulation computer 46, as described above. The value obtained by the measurement of the wavefront aberration measuring device 8 can be used. In step 202, the wavelength of the optical condition indicating the actual exposure EL, that is, the exposure wavelength (and the type of the light source 16 for exposure, etc.) and the maximum NA of the projection optical system PL are transmitted through the input device of the analog computer 46. (Numerical aperture), NA (in the present embodiment, a numerical aperture set by an aperture stop 15 when exposed, a coherence coefficient σ value (illumination or) or illumination NA (a numerical aperture of an illumination optical system), and The illumination conditions of the reticle (the light amount distribution of the illumination light EL on the pupil surface of the illumination optical system, that is, the shape and size of the secondary light source), etc., are sighed in the simulation computer 46. At this time, the imaging simulator has been started on the analog computer. On this screen, the imaging simulator is displayed.

面。作業者等係依照該設定畫面,設定 光學條件等。又,當設定該曝光條件時 各量測點η(η=1〜33)之標線片上之圖案 之資訊也一併加以設定。就有關圖案之 有孤立線圖案、線與間隙(L/S)圖案、線 85 1253105 ?、正,之正父圖案等圖案種類(也包含是否為移相圖案及 ’、種類等)、線圖案之線寬、長度、間距等圖案大小資訊等 。圖案之選擇係根據可評價之評價項目來決定。例如,與 述之動作同樣’若把縱橫之線寬差當作評價項目的話, 則假定使用第5圖所示之標線片Rt之相互正交之線圖案所 形成之標線片者,必須設定有關該標線片上之圖案資訊。 此處為了簡化說明,在各量測點,使用同一大小 、、在圖案所形成之標線片者,設定該標線片上之圖案資訊。 在下一步驟204中,藉由成像模擬來進行投影光學系 統無像差時之CD_聚焦曲線之作成。具體而言,作業者等 係對模擬用電腦46,透過輸入裝置來指示投影光學系2 PL無像差時之cd-聚焦曲線之作成。應答該指示,模擬用 電腦40係在用上述步驟2〇2所設定之曝光條 ^ .^ r,假定 才又衫光學系統無像差時之狀態下,即在(即式(3)所示之杳 涅克項成份Zi(i=l〜37,即Cn,i)全部設定為0之狀能下, 藉由成像模擬器來作成線圖案之線寬對散焦量之變動, ’作成CD-聚焦曲線。 不 在下一步驟206中,模擬用電腦46係用下式(2〇)所 之10次函數來調整所作成之CD-聚焦曲線。 y=Cax10 + Cbx8 + Ccx6+Cdx4+Cex2 + Cf (20) 式中,X係散焦量,y係對應該散焦量之對象圖汽 上述步驟202中,設定圖案資訊之線圖案)像之線寬,csurface. The operator or the like sets optical conditions and the like in accordance with the setting screen. Further, when the exposure condition is set, the information of the pattern on the reticle of each measurement point η (η = 1 to 33) is also set. For the pattern, there are isolated line patterns, line and gap (L/S) patterns, line 85 1253105?, positive, positive pattern, etc. (including whether it is a phase shift pattern and ', type, etc.), line pattern Line size, length, spacing and other pattern size information. The choice of pattern is determined based on the evaluation item that can be evaluated. For example, if the width difference of the vertical and horizontal lines is used as the evaluation item, it is assumed that the reticle formed by the mutually orthogonal line patterns of the reticle Rt shown in Fig. 5 must be used. Set the pattern information about the reticle. Here, in order to simplify the description, the pattern information on the reticle is set at each measurement point using the same size and the reticle formed by the pattern. In the next step 204, the CD_focus curve is produced without aberration in the projection optical system by imaging simulation. Specifically, the operator or the like instructs the simulation computer 46 to instruct the creation of the cd-focus curve when the projection optical system 2 PL has no aberration through the input device. In response to the instruction, the analog computer 40 is in the state in which the exposure bar set in the above step 2〇2 is assumed to be in the state in which the optical system of the shirt is free of aberrations, that is, in the equation (3). After the Nikk component components Zi (i=l~37, ie, Cn, i) are all set to 0, the line width of the line pattern is changed by the imaging simulator, and the CD is made into a CD. - Focusing curve. In the next step 206, the analog computer 46 adjusts the resulting CD-focus curve by the 10th function of the following equation (2〇). y=Cax10 + Cbx8 + Ccx6+Cdx4+Cex2 + Cf (20) where X is the defocus amount, and y is the target image corresponding to the defocus amount. In step 202 above, the line pattern of the pattern information is set to the line width, c

Cf係該10次函數各階項之係數。由該式(20)可4 a 大,該函數 係只由2階到1 〇次之偶數階項所構成之函數。楚 乐17A圖 86 1253105 係表示該調整之結果所得到之ι〇次函Cf is the coefficient of each order term of the 10th order function. The equation (20) can be 4 a large, and the function is a function consisting only of even-order terms of 2nd order to 1st order.楚乐17A图 86 1253105 is the ι〇 letter obtained from the result of the adjustment

圖係表示該10次函數與藉由成像 彳’弟17B 線之調整誤差之_例 ' ㈣之CD_聚焦曲 調整誤差係在+0 02 7B圖所示可知,10次函數之 係在—0.02nm以下’調整精度非常高。 其二人,在步驟208中,作章去 ,藉由空間像使用模擬用電腦46 工間料异來求出各㈣克項對散焦量之 度%。此處,例如,若只輸入丨種用杳 異之分配。此處,在$八知進行各項相 。 处在該刀配中,求出較佳聚焦位置之變化 第18圖係表示該查涅克感度8叫。在第18圖* 轴j.1(1=1〜37)係、表示各查淫克項。如第18圖所示,對散 焦量有感度係成為查涅克項A、z9、z16、z25、Z36、& 之旋轉成份或Z5、k、WZ28、Z32等之2階旋轉 ^份’即僅偶數Θ成份。其他(奇數θ成份)係查淫克感度 為零,故CD-聚焦曲線,關於聚焦方向之移位奇數θ成 伤不艾〜響’像差間之交叉項也不受影響。 第19圖表示分別從—5〇Π1λ到5〇ηιλ,用1〇mA間距 使第9項(Z.9)、第12項(Z. 12)、第16項(Z. 16)之3種之各 查〉圼克項移動丨1點時之聚焦方向之移動量(α:η)之變化情 /兄。在第19圖中,係根據各Π點之各移動量,使用最小 平方法所求出之直線斜率也一併表示。即,各直線之斜率 成為各查>圼克項感度之值。又,在第19圖中,雖只代表 性地表示第9項(Ζ·9)、第12項(Ζ· 12)、第16項(Ζ· 16)之3 87 1253105 種類’但關於其他之查淫克項,若像差量也係該範圍的話· ,則能確認大致完全保持線性。由第19圖也可知,因相 關係數R24 1,故通常之查s克感度之計算,為了節省時 間,也可只輸入i值像差來求出直線之斜率,此處,以再 確認與導出更正確值為目的,從一 5〇m又到5〇m λ ,用 lOmA間距計算η點聚焦方向之移動量(〜),使用最小平 方法來計算直線之斜率(即,查涅克感度之值)。 其次,在步驟210中,模擬用電腦46係使用各查涅克 項之查涅克感度sai、與各量測點n(n=1〜33)之查涅克項 _ 成份Cn/Fl〜33),使用與求出综合焦點差(tfd)、像散像 差球面像差里專之查涅克感度法同樣式之下式(2 1 ),求 出量測點η㈣〜33)之CD_聚焦曲線之聚焦方向之偏移量 a π ° 37 αη = (21) /=1 但是,在各查涅克項,從_5〇ιηλ到5〇m又,用⑺m 又間距輸入U點像差,從其分配求出久(較佳聚焦位置之 線寬變化)與像差關係之情形,像差量無論是正或負,影塑鲁 都相同,若像差增加的話’則從觀察其比例關係以… 之惡化’万n能假定用各查淫克項成份平方之線性結合來 表示者。 此處,在下-步驟212中,作業者係使用模擬電腦乜 ’在所設定之曝光條件下’藉由空間像計算來求出各查淫 克項成:之平方對線圖案線寬之查淫克感纟%。在用空 間像計算所得到t 11 ·點之線寬變化量之計#中,假定2 88 1253105 階函數,藉由最小平方法,趨近近似來看的話,則如第2 0 圖所示,能觀察到搭載在y=sx2之函數。又,在第2〇圖中 ’雖僅代表性地表示第6項(Z_6)、第7項(Ζ·7)、第9項 (ζ·9)之3種類,但關於其他之查涅克項,確認也能用二次 函數來表示。又,第21圖係表示各查涅克項之感度 心=1〜37)。在第21圖中,橫軸之z.i(i=l〜37)係表示各查 〉圼克項。如第21圖所示,對該線寬變化,奇數0成份、 偶數Θ成份都有感度。The figure shows that the 10th function and the CD_focus adjustment error of the adjustment error by the imaging 彳' brother's 17B line (4) are shown in the figure of +0 02 7B, the system of the 10th order is at -0.02 Below nm, the adjustment accuracy is very high. The two of them, in step 208, make a chapter to determine the degree of defocusing of each (four) gram item by using the analog computer 46. Here, for example, if only the input of the difference is specified. Here, in the eight knowledge to carry out the various phases. In the knives, the change of the better focus position is obtained. Fig. 18 shows the sensation of the Chanek sensitivity. In Fig. 18, the axis j.1 (1 = 1 to 37) is a line indicating each item. As shown in Fig. 18, the sensitivity to the defocus amount is the rotation component of the Zanikes A, z9, z16, z25, Z36, & or the 2nd rotation of the Z5, k, WZ28, Z32, etc. That is, only an even number of ingredients. Others (odd θ components) are zero sensitivity, so the CD-focus curve, the odd-numbered θ of the focus direction is injurious ~ the ringing of the aberrations is not affected. Figure 19 shows three kinds of items 9 (Z.9), 12 (Z.12), and 16 (Z.16) with a range of 1〇mA from -5〇Π1λ to 5〇ηλλ, respectively. Each check> the change of the amount of movement (α: η) in the focus direction when the 圼 item moves at 1 o'clock. In Fig. 19, the slope of the straight line obtained by the least square method is also expressed in accordance with each movement amount of each defect. That is, the slope of each straight line becomes the value of each sensitivity of the check item. In addition, in the 19th figure, the ninth (Ζ·9), the 12th (Ζ·12), and the 16th (Ζ·16) 3 87 1253105 types are representatively shown, but other If the amount of aberration is within this range, it can be confirmed that it is almost completely linear. It can also be seen from Fig. 19 that, due to the correlation coefficient R24 1, the calculation of the s-sensitivity is usually performed. In order to save time, only the i-value aberration can be input to obtain the slope of the straight line. Here, the re-confirmation and derivation are performed. For the more correct value, from 5 〇m to 5 〇m λ, calculate the amount of movement of the η point focus direction (~) with a 10 mA pitch, and calculate the slope of the line using the least square method (ie, the Zernike sensitivity) value). Next, in step 210, the simulation computer 46 uses the Chanek sensitivity sai of each Zernike term and the Zernike term of each measurement point n (n=1 to 33) _ component Cn/Fl~33 ), using the following formula (2 1 ) for the comprehensive focus difference (tfd) and the spherical aberration of the astigmatic aberration spherical aberration, the CD_ of the measurement point η (four) ~ 33) is obtained. The offset of the focus direction of the focus curve is a π ° 37 αη = (21) /=1 However, in each Zagnek term, from _5〇ιηλ to 5〇m, the U-point aberration is input with (7)m and spacing. From the distribution of the long-term (better change of the line width of the preferred focus position) and the aberration relationship, the amount of aberration is positive or negative, the shadow is the same, if the aberration increases, then observe the proportional relationship Deteriorating by ... 'n can assume a linear combination of the squares of the components of each of the elements. Here, in the next step 212, the operator uses the simulation computer 乜 'under the set exposure conditions' to calculate the sacred items by the spatial image calculation: the square line of the line pattern Sense of 纟%. In the calculation of the line width variation of t 11 · point obtained by the spatial image calculation, assuming that the 2 88 1253105 order function is approximated by the least square method, as shown in Fig. 2, A function carried in y=sx2 can be observed. In addition, in the second diagram, 'there are only three types of the sixth item (Z_6), the seventh item (Ζ·7), and the ninth item (ζ·9), but other types of Zanike Item, confirmation can also be represented by a quadratic function. Further, Fig. 21 shows the sensitivities of the respective Zanike terms = 1 to 37). In Fig. 21, z.i (i = 1 to 37) on the horizontal axis indicates each item. As shown in Fig. 21, the line width varies, and the odd-numbered 0 component and the even-numbered Θ component have sensitivity.

其次,在步驟214中,模擬用電腦46係從記憶體讀出 各量測點之查涅克項成份cni,並且使用下式(22),求出線 圖案線寬方向之CD-聚焦曲線之偏離量η 。 37 η (22) /=1 其次,在步驟216中,模擬用電腦46係使用上述步 、斤東出之αη與使用上述步驟214所求出之冷〆根 下式(23),求出量測點η㈣〜33)之cd_聚焦曲線。藉 斤求出 〇聚焦曲線係成為考慮量測點n之投影光學 統PL之像差時所預測各量測點η之CD—聚焦曲線。但 此處所求出之CD_聚焦曲線,仍未考慮其變形。 y/CJx — α )10 ·4~ r “ — π、8 n b α π) + cc(x- α ny+ Cd(x- α nyNext, in step 214, the simulation computer 46 reads the Zernike term component cni of each measurement point from the memory, and uses the following formula (22) to find the CD-focus curve of the line pattern line width direction. Deviation amount η. 37 η (22) /=1 Next, in step 216, the simulation computer 46 uses the above-mentioned steps, the αη of the jinjin and the cold enthalpy (23) obtained by the above step 214, and the amount is obtained. The cd_focus curve of the measuring point η (four) ~ 33). The 〇 focus curve is obtained by considering the CD-focus curve of each measurement point η when considering the aberration of the projection optical system PL of the measurement point n. However, the CD_focus curve obtained here is still not considered for deformation. y/CJx — α )10 ·4~ r “ — π, 8 n b α π) + cc(x- α ny+ Cd(x- α ny

Ce(X- aj2+C〜n …(23) ,^ n時,也能使用下式(24)來取代上式(22)。 89 (24) 1253105 上述之式(24)係為了考慮彼此相異之查涅克項彼此間 之積,即前述之交叉項,而擴充式(22)者。即,圖案像之 線寬不僅受式(22)所示之各查涅克項成份平方之影響,而 且也受交叉項之影響。如第22A圖、第22β圖之圖^所示 ,藉由像差之多且合,、線寬分布係分布在傾_之橢圓上(其係 第22A圖係Z.6與Z.13之關係,第22B圖係Z 9與z 12 之關係)。這種情形,這些像差組合之交又項係對線寬變化 具有感度。第23圖係表示交又項對線圖案線寬之感度(串 訊)。又,在式(24)中,在Η之S〜之處,加入盘式又(22) 之%相同之值,在式(24)之中,若只取出2項的話例 如,則成為下式(25)之形式。 L=s、lCn,i2+S/5i,」CniCj+s^,」Cn?…⑽ 由=知,能表示第22B圖之圖形所示之傾斜橢圓 實際若計算交又項的話,則在相當多之項間, 能確認交又項之存在。 夕I貝間 由=上之說明可知,對某像差之查淫克項之CD_聚焦 曲線之影響能用對CD-聚焦曲線之聚 ^ 線寬之變化來表示。 A ’、’、 β之移動與最大 其次,在第24之步驟302中 使用成像模擬器空門傻Μ — _擬用電腦46係藉由 ,在各量測點七、山 不、存在像差之狀態下When Ce(X- aj2+C~n ... (23) , ^ n , the following formula (24) can be used instead of the above formula (22). 89 (24) 1253105 The above formula (24) is for considering each other. The product of the different Zanike terms, that is, the aforementioned cross term, and the expansion of (22). That is, the line width of the pattern image is not only affected by the square of the components of each Zernike term shown by equation (22). And also affected by the cross terms. As shown in Figure 22A and Figure 22 of the 22β map, the linewidth distribution is distributed over the ellipse of the tilt by the number of aberrations (the system is 22A) The relationship between Z.6 and Z.13, and the relationship between Z9 and z12 in Fig. 22B. In this case, the intersection of these aberrations is sensitive to the change of line width. Fig. 23 shows the intersection The sensitivity of the line width of the line pattern (serial). Also, in the equation (24), at the point S~ of the Η, add the same value of the % of the disc (22), in the equation (24) If only two items are taken out, for example, the form of the following formula (25) is obtained. L=s, lCn, i2+S/5i, "CniCj+s^," Cn?...(10) The tilted ellipse shown in the graph of 22B is actually calculated. In the case of a considerable number of items, it is possible to confirm the existence of the cross-item. The interpretation of the singularity of the singularity of the singularity of the singularity of the singularity of the singularity of the CD-focus curve can be used on the CD- The change of the focus curve is represented by the change of the line width. The movement of A ', ', and β is the second highest. In step 24 of step 24, the imaging simulator is used to make the door empty - _ intended to use the computer 46 system, Measuring point seven, mountain is not, there is a state of aberration

在各里測點求出投影光學系統pL 於實際像差之資呷> 7力風 D-1焦曲線。關 、貝況也可透過主控 42讀出前述戶斤求& 、 ,從記憶裝置 71承出之波面像差來進行。 其次,在步驟304中,模 揭戳用電腦46係用上述步驟 90 1253105 3 02肖下式(26)所不之5次函數,使表示藉由成像模擬來 鼻出 CD -聚焦曲線、傲/由田 ^ 與使用上式(23)所算出之CD-聚焦曲 線之差份之差份函數y、近似。 y\= r 5η(χ- α ny+ δ 4η(χ_ α η)4+ r 3η(χ — α η)3+ 5 2η(χ — α )2 + r 1η(χ- α η) ... (26) 式中 ’ r 5η、占 4η、r 3η、5 2η、r 1η 係 5 次函數 y,n 之各階項之係數。 該各係數γ 5n、5 4n、r 3n、5 2n、r ln也能用包含查 _ 涅克項成份CM項之線性結合來表示。具體而言,奇數階 之項(以下稱為奇數項)之係數r5n、r3n、rln係能用各查 淫克項成份Cn,i項之線性結合來表示,偶數階之項(以下稱 為偶數項)之係數d 4η、δ 2n係能用各查涅克項成份之平方 C n,i2之線性結合來表示。 此處’在一步驟306中,模擬用電腦46係著眼在式 (26)所示之y’n之奇數項,藉由空間像計算來求出查涅克項 對5次、3次、1次之係數7 5n、r 3〆7、之查涅克項之 _ 感度S r 5i、S 7 3i、s r In。第25圖〜第27圖係分別表示 各查涅克項之感度Sr 5i、Sr 3l、sr ^之一例。 在下一步驟308中,模擬用電腦46係著眼在函數v, 】η 之偶數項’藉由空間像計算來求出各查涅克項成份之平方 對Cn/對4階之係數5 4η、2階之係數δ 2η之各查涅克項 之感度S δ &、S δ以。第28圖、第29圖係分別表示各查 淫克項成份之平方Cn i2之感度S (5 4l、S δ 21之一例。 91 1253105 在v驟3〇 1中,模擬用電腦46係使用以下之式 (27)式(28) ’來求出投影光學系統PL之現在像差狀態之 量測點n(n=l〜 里、 33)中之5次、3次、1次之係數75„、γ3η 、r U 4階、2階之係數以η、52η。 y5w = |Sy5.C,.3 73λ = |5y3.c^ , ϊΚ = Σ^ι,Α,/ ---(27) 37 1=1 i=1 ^n-2Sd44Cn/ ό2/ί=|5^Α,2 …(28) i=l 藉由上式,能全部計算表示式(23)所#之函數yn與式 (6)所表不之函數y,n之與之函數y”n(=yn+y,n),量測點 ( )之•聚焦曲線(也考慮變形者)係全部被預測。 第30圖係表示在設定之曝光條件下在各量測點 n(n—1〜33)中’求出代表性所示之量測點k、k+l(k=l〜32) 之CD-聚焦曲線y,,k、y,,…時之模式圖。如第圖所示, 本實施形態之預測方法係執行上述之步驟202〜步驟3〇1 ’藉此’用1〇次函數y’使假定投影光學系統PL之像差 為零時之CD-聚焦曲線近似,在藉由量測點k之查淫克項 成份之線性結合’求出们〇:欠函數y之散焦量謂 之方向及線寬(縱軸)之方向,分別僅偏移,進一 + ,使5次函數,k份變形’藉此來預測量測點…: 。如前述,投影光學系統孔 、 yk 里面上之波面係因量測 點而異,故查涅克項成份C ·也 亍口里釗 °,1也因里測點而異。因此,上 述之y”k、y”k+1係不同之曲線。 92 1253105 圖係精由精密之成像模擬所算出之量測點卜 、33之CD-聚焦曲線之—例,第加圖係藉由上述 之預測方法來預測同一曝光條件、同一圖案之量測點卜 之CD-聚焦曲線之—例。如第Μ圖、第則 圖所不’错由成像模擬< CD_聚焦曲線與藉由上述預測方 法所預敎CD_聚焦曲線係在各量測點非常—致,能高精 度地預測CD-聚焦曲線。即,若執行上述之預測方法的話The projection optical system pL is obtained from the measurement points in each of the points of the actual aberrations > 7 force wind D-1 focal curve. The off-state and the off-state can also be read by the master control 42 by reading the wavefront aberrations from the memory device 71. Next, in step 304, the computer stamp 46 uses the fifth function of the above-mentioned step 90 1253105 3 02 (26) to make the CD-focus curve, the proud focus, by the imaging simulation. The difference function y and approximation of the difference between the field ^ and the CD-focus curve calculated by the above formula (23). y\= r 5η(χ- α ny+ δ 4η(χ_ α η)4+ r 3η(χ — α η)3+ 5 2η(χ — α )2 + r 1η(χ- α η) ... ( 26) where 'r 5η, 4η, r 3η, 5 2η, r 1η are the coefficients of the order terms of the fifth-order function y, n. The coefficients γ 5n, 5 4n, r 3n, 5 2n, r ln are also It can be expressed by a linear combination of CM items including the ng term component. Specifically, the coefficients r5n, r3n, and rln of the odd-order term (hereinafter referred to as an odd-numbered term) can be used for each component Cn. The linear combination of the i terms indicates that the coefficients d 4η, δ 2n of the even order term (hereinafter referred to as the even term) can be expressed by the linear combination of the squares C n, i2 of the components of each Zernike term. In a step 306, the simulation computer 46 focuses on the odd number of y'n shown in the equation (26), and calculates the coefficient of the Zanikek pair for 5 times, 3 times, and 1 time by the spatial image calculation. 7 5n, r 3〆7, the Zernike term _ sensitivity S r 5i, S 7 3i, sr In. Fig. 25 to Fig. 27 show the sensitivity of each Zernike term Sr 5i, Sr 3l, An example of sr ^. In the next step 308, the simulation computer 46 is focused on the function. v, 】the even term of η' is obtained by spatial image calculation to find the square of each Zagnek component. The sensitivity of each of the Cn/fourth-order coefficients 5 4η, the second-order coefficient δ 2η δ &, S δ. Fig. 28 and Fig. 29 show the sensitivity S (5 4l, S δ 21) of the square of the components of each of the components of the sacral component, respectively. 91 1253105 In v 3〇1 The simulation computer 46 uses the following equation (27) (28)' to find the measurement point n (n=l~li, 33) of the current aberration state of the projection optical system PL 5 times, 3 The coefficient of the next and first coefficients 75 „, γ3η , r U 4th order, 2nd order coefficient is η, 52η. y5w = |Sy5.C,.3 73λ = |5y3.c^ , ϊΚ = Σ^ι,Α, / ---(27) 37 1=1 i=1 ^n-2Sd44Cn/ ό2/ ί=|5^Α,2 (28) i=l By the above formula, all expressions (23) can be calculated. The function yn of # and the function y, n of the formula (6) are the function y"n(=yn+y,n), the measurement point ( ), the focus curve (also considering the deformer) are all It is predicted that Fig. 30 shows that the representative measurement points k, k+l (k=l~32) are obtained in each measurement point n (n-1~33) under the set exposure conditions. ) CD-focusing curve y,, k, y,, ... mode diagram. As shown in the figure, the prediction method of the present embodiment performs the above-described step 202 to step 3〇1 'by this', using the 1〇 function y' to make the CD-focus of the assumed projection optical system PL zero. The approximation of the curve, in the linear combination of the components of the singularity of the measurement point k, is found to be: the direction of the defocusing of the under-function y and the direction of the line width (vertical axis), respectively, only offset, Into a +, so that the 5th function, k parts of the deformation 'by this to predict the measurement point...:. As mentioned above, the wavefront on the inside of the projection optical system hole and yk varies depending on the measurement point, so the Charneck component C · also 亍 ° 钊 °, 1 also varies depending on the measurement point. Therefore, the above y"k, y"k+1 are different curves. 92 1253105 The graph is based on the measurement of the precise imaging simulation, and the CD-focus curve of 33. For example, the graph is used to predict the same exposure condition and the measurement point of the same pattern by the above prediction method. CD-focus curve - examples. As shown in the figure and the figure, the error is determined by the imaging simulation < CD_focus curve and the CD_focus curve predicted by the above prediction method is very accurate at each measurement point, and the CD can be predicted with high precision. - Focus curve. That is, if the above prediction method is executed

,則在既定曝光條件下之既定圖案之轉印之際,能高精度 預測C D -聚焦曲線。 第32圖係表不有關線寬偏差△⑶,使用上述所說明 之ZS法之計算結果與提供適當之波面像差直接計算空間 像差之手法之關係。由比較該第32圖與前述之第Η圖可 知’右使用新的ZS法的話’則能格外減低誤差。 由第32 ®也可知,即使不II由成像模擬來進行空間像 計异,用擴張ZS法也能正確計算線寬。Then, the C D -focus curve can be predicted with high precision at the time of transfer of a predetermined pattern under a predetermined exposure condition. Fig. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the calculation result of the ZS method described above and the method of directly calculating the spatial aberration by providing an appropriate wavefront aberration, irrespective of the line width deviation Δ(3). It can be seen from the comparison of the Fig. 32 and the foregoing figure that the "using the new ZS method right" can particularly reduce the error. It can also be seen from the 32nd ® that the line width can be correctly calculated by the extended ZS method even if the spatial image is not calculated by the imaging simulation.

又,在上述之步驟202〜301之說明中,係以透過作業 者等為前提下來進行說明,但只進行作業者等之指定(步驟 2〇2),步驟204以後之處理,模擬用電腦46(或其他電腦 與模擬用電腦連線)當然也能全部進行。也可取代前述之作 業者等之操作,從主電腦等提供指令。藉由變更軟體程式 ’能容易實現這種變形。 在模擬用電腦46等之電腦中,進行上述曝光條件等指 疋以外之處理程式’例如’能在CD(compact disc)、 DVD(digital versatile disc)、MO(magneto-optical disc)或 93 1253105 FD(flexible dlsc)等之資訊記錄媒體所記錄狀態下 銷售品。當然透過網際網路等電氣通訊線路 b為 内容來轉讓等。 把以數位 (評價方法) 使用上述所預測之量測點!〜量測點n之C 線,能評價曝光裝置1〇〇之圖案 來“、、曲 上述,在投影光學 對應量測點,〜n之位置,假定分 二面側’在 形,若在疋刀…配置孤立線圖案之情 右在各I測•點,預測CD_聚焦曲線的話,則在各旦、f| =據在CD-聚焦曲線之偏移,能評價曝光領域IA = 孤立線圖案像之特性(例如,面内均勻性)。 量測第5圖所示’假設使用標線片RT(其係在對應 對縱線Η幸11之位置’配置相互正交之線圖案)之情形,針 3:广線圖案、橫線圖案,分別執行上述之步驟2。2〜步驟 縱線曲線的話,則作成前述第8圖所示之 之⑶·聚焦曲線,根據⑶聚焦曲線 差,也此Sf價各量測點之縱橫線寬差。 即:求出對縱線與橫線各像之CD(線寬)變化之查淫克 μΊΓ象差(查埋克項)組合之交又項之查埋克項感度 二符號在縱橫線相異之組合能找出使VH差 二;=(查埋克項)之組合。其理由係用V線與Η線 cC Λ 2項以外係同一值,故在-差=△ )之計算中,關於^,在縱線與㈣,當 、—,里克項感度S/S',,W)之符號相異時,線寬差 94 1253105 受影響之故。 又,假設在對應量測點1〜η中,分別配置L/S圖案之 情形,若針對該L/S圖案像兩端之線圖案像,來預測各 CD-聚焦曲線的話,則根據CD-聚焦曲線之差,能評價各 量測點兩端像之線寬差,藉此,例如,能評價投影光學系 統PL之慧形像差。 又,若綜合以上之式(21)、式(22)(或式(24))、式(27) 、式(28),用矩陣形式來表示的話,則如以下之式(29)所示In addition, in the description of the above-described steps 202 to 301, the description will be made on the premise that the operator or the like is transmitted, but only the operator or the like is designated (step 2〇2), and the processing after step 204 is performed on the simulation computer 46. (Or other computers connected to the analog computer) Of course, all can be carried out. It is also possible to provide an instruction from a host computer or the like in place of the operation of the aforementioned operator or the like. This modification can be easily realized by changing the software program '. In a computer such as the analog computer 46, a processing program other than the above-mentioned exposure conditions, for example, can be performed on a CD (compact disc), a DVD (digital versatile disc), an MO (magneto-optical disc), or 93 1253105 FD. (flexible dlsc) and other information recording media recorded in the state of sale. Of course, the electronic communication line b such as the Internet is used for the transfer of content. Use the above-predicted measurement points in digital (evaluation method)! ~ The C line of the measuring point n can be used to evaluate the pattern of the exposure device 1", ", and the above, in the position of the projection optical corresponding measurement point, ~n, assuming that the two sides are in shape, if in the frame Knife...Configure the isolated line pattern right at each I test point, predict the CD_focus curve, then in each denier, f| = according to the offset of the CD-focus curve, can evaluate the exposure field IA = isolated line pattern The characteristics of the image (for example, in-plane uniformity). The measurement shown in Fig. 5 assumes that the reticle RT is used (which is arranged in a position corresponding to the vertical line of the vertical line 11). , needle 3: wide line pattern, horizontal line pattern, respectively perform the above step 2. 2 to step the vertical line curve, then make the (3) · focus curve shown in the above figure 8, according to (3) focus curve difference, also The width of the vertical and horizontal lines of each point of the Sf price is measured. That is, the sum of the CD (line width) of the vertical and horizontal lines is determined. The combination of the two symbols in the vertical and horizontal lines can be found to make the VH difference two; = (check the buried items). The V line and the Η line cC Λ are the same value except for the 2 items, so in the calculation of the difference - △), regarding the ^, in the vertical line and (4), when, -, the Rick term sensitivity S/S',, W When the signs are different, the line width difference 94 1253105 is affected. Also, it is assumed that the L/S pattern is respectively arranged in the corresponding measurement points 1 to η, and the L/S pattern is applied to both ends. When the line pattern image is used to predict each CD-focus curve, the line width difference between the images at both ends of each measurement point can be evaluated based on the difference between the CD-focus curves, whereby, for example, the shape of the projection optical system PL can be evaluated. In addition, if the above equation (21), equation (22) (or equation (24)), equation (27), and equation (28) are expressed in a matrix form, the following equation (29) is used. ) shown

a33 AA33 A

H33 A Wa 0 0 0 0 0 0 y533 0 Wj3 0 0 0 0 0 y\ 0 0 Wy 0 0 0 0 = 0 0 0 Wy 0 0 0 y^33 0 0 0 0 Wy 0 0 y\ 0 0 0 0 0 Wd 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Wd 7^33 H ^3362, 0233 ^37,37 ^5,1 sr5,3i 外3,1 ^3,37 SYl,l ^^4,37 岣4 5*ό237 (29)H33 A Wa 0 0 0 0 0 0 y533 0 Wj3 0 0 0 0 0 y\ 0 0 Wy 0 0 0 0 = 0 0 0 Wy 0 0 0 y^33 0 0 0 0 Wy 0 0 y\ 0 0 0 0 0 Wd 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Wd 7^33 H ^3362, 0233 ^37,37 ^5,1 sr5,3i 3,1 ^3,37 SYl,l ^^4,37 岣4 5*ό237 (29)

95 1253105 下。 式中,W α、W yS、W 7、W (5係分別表示如95 1253105 under. Where W α, W yS, W 7 , W (5 lines represent

Wa ^ψγ αι C!,l …Q, C33,] 37 ,37Wa ^ψγ αι C!,l ...Q, C33,] 37 ,37

Cl,2 … ,37 cm2 ς,2ς ,2h,l Ψβ 丰广cli "1,37 C33; C33,22 c 2 33,37Cl,2 ... ,37 cm2 ς,2ς ,2h,l Ψβ Feng cli "1,37 C33; C33,22 c 2 33,37

Cl,l2 Cl,22 …q ,37 c33/ "33,2^33! .·· C 2 33,37 W6 a 2 2 33,1 ^33,2Cl,l2 Cl,22 ...q ,37 c33/ "33,2^33! .·· C 2 33,37 W6 a 2 2 33,1 ^33,2

C 2 33,37 矩陣係因W/5選擇式(21)或式(24)之任—式而相里者 又’上述之式(29)能整理如下。 f^Wa · ZS (30) 面像二係CD_聚焦曲線各係數之矩陣,wa係有關波 面像差之矩陣,ZS係有關查淫克感度之矩陣。 (調整方法) 其次’根據藉由上述之CD-平隹A _ > 4心LD彔焦曲線之預測方法所預 測之C D -聚焦曲線,執彳亍坪彳冑^The C 2 33,37 matrix is based on the W/5 selection equation (21) or the equation (24). The above equation (29) can be organized as follows. f^Wa · ZS (30) The matrix of the coefficients of the two-system CD_focus curve, wa is the matrix of the wavefront aberration, and the ZS is the matrix of the sensitivity of the sensation. (Adjustment method) Next, based on the CDD-focus curve predicted by the above-mentioned CD-flat A _ > 4 heart LD 彔 focal curve prediction method, 彳亍 彳亍 彳胄 ^

At 祝仃冲彳貝曝先裝置100之圖案轉印狀 態之評價方法後,根攄哮士 艨4汗饧結果,針對調整圖案轉印狀 況之調整方法加以說明。又考 ^ 又此處,係以提高面内均勻性( 在如述之步驟1 0 2中所呀令々合 Υ所叹疋之孤立線圖案像)為目標來 調整者。 如前述,對應各量丨 里U η(η=1〜33)之圖案即使全部均 96 1253105 勻,若各夏測點間之CD-聚焦曲線偏離的話,則在該量測 一 點上成像之圖案像也不均勻。因此,本實施形態之調整方 法係如上述,所預測之各量測點之CD_聚焦曲線為了儘量 均勻,調整曝光裝置1〇〇之圖案轉印狀態。以下,針對該 調整方法加以說明,首先,根據該調整方法之算出式加= 說明。 為了使各量測點n(n=1〜33)之CD-聚焦曲線均勻化, 較佳係調整前述丨9個參數,以使前述所求出之α ^、冷、 r 5n、5 4n、r 3n、(5 2n、r ln,在各量測點中儘量成為均籲 勻。此處,使各量測點η(η=1〜33)2αη、万η、^ 占、 、丨3n、5 2n、r 1 η之目標值在量測點間同一條件上,算 出使 α η、yS η、Τ 5η、3 4η、7 3η、3 2η、rln 趨近各目標 值之調整參數之調整量。 如上述,當調整各調整參數時,投影光學系統之 波面像差等會變化。若用各矩陣PARA1P,〜PARA19p,來 =不ϊ測點n(n=l〜33)之前述19個調整參數(將這些參數 分別當作調整參數PARA1〜PARA19)之每單位調整量之上 _ 述矩陣Wa之各要素(即,包含Cni(i=1〜37)項之變化)的話 ,則例如,PARA1P,能用下式來表示。 MM1P' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ▼ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 脚, 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 wy 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ψγ] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 W6} 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ⑽, 97 (31) 1253105At the end of the evaluation method of the pattern transfer state of the 曝 仃 曝 曝 装置 装置 装置 装置 装置 , , , , , , , , , , 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 Also test ^ Here, the goal is to improve the in-plane uniformity (in the case of the isolated line pattern image that is sighed by the sigh in step 102). As described above, even if the patterns of U η (η = 1 to 33) in each amount are uniformly 96 1253105, if the CD-focus curve between the summer measurement points deviates, the pattern imaged at the measurement point is formed. The image is not uniform. Therefore, in the adjustment method of the present embodiment, as described above, the CD_focus curve of each of the predicted measurement points is adjusted to be as uniform as possible, and the pattern transfer state of the exposure apparatus 1 is adjusted. Hereinafter, the adjustment method will be described. First, the calculation formula is added according to the adjustment method. In order to homogenize the CD-focus curve of each measurement point n (n=1 to 33), it is preferable to adjust the above-mentioned nine parameters so that the above-mentioned α ^, cold, r 5n, 5 4n, r 3n, (5 2n, r ln, as much as possible in each measurement point. Here, each measurement point η (η = 1 to 33) 2αη, 10,000 η, ^ 占, 丨 3n, 5 2n, r 1 η target value on the same condition between the measurement points, calculate the adjustment parameters of α η, yS η, Τ 5η, 3 4η, 7 3η, 3 2η, rln approaching each target value As described above, when adjusting the adjustment parameters, the wavefront aberration of the projection optical system changes, etc. If each matrix PARA1P, ~PARA19p is used, the above 19 adjustments of the non-measurement point n (n=l~33) are used. For example, PARA1P, for example, PARA1P, for each element of the parameter Wa (the change of the Cni (i=1~37) term) is used for the parameter (the parameter is taken as the adjustment parameter PARA1 to PARA19). It can be expressed by the following formula: MM1P' 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ▼ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 feet, 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 wy 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ψγ] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 W6} 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (10), 97 (31) 1253105

式中,W a ’、W /3,、W τ,、W ά,分別能用下式來表 示 ^1,1 …A,37 I · · • · ; 33,37In the formula, W a ′, W /3, W τ, and W ά can be expressed by the following formula: ^1,1 ... A, 37 I · · • · ; 33,37

^33.1 * * * Z ]¥β, 7 2 zu ΖΛ 2 ... z 2 • u ^1,37 7 2 Z33,372 1,1 z 1,37^33.1 * * * Z ]¥β, 7 2 zu ΖΛ 2 ... z 2 • u ^1,37 7 2 Z33,372 1,1 z 1,37

V 7 2 Ύ 2 Ί U ·.· Zl,37 1 ^33,1 ^33,2^33,1 z 2 33,37 7 2 厶 33,1 2 ... Z 2 33,2 ^33,37 一式中各矩陣”《,、\^点,、界7,、\¥(^之各要素所 * n,1( 1〜37)係_整參數PARA1之量測點n之C . 之變化。 η’1 因此,如下式(32)所*,若在列向量zs(把上述各係 之感度當作要辛、K,悉+ 罟素)上采上矩陣PARAlpn,的話,就能求 調整參數P ARA1之备置a曰 曰、, 之母早位置之$測點η之係數變化量(例 如’ α n(pl))之列向量β,[ ί ]。 α/Ρι) «33(Ρ1) Α(Ρ1) β^1) y5/户1) 98 1253105V 7 2 Ύ 2 Ί U ··· Zl,37 1 ^33,1 ^33,2^33,1 z 2 33,37 7 2 厶33,1 2 ... Z 2 33,2 ^33,37 In the formula, each matrix ",, \^,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, Η'1 Therefore, as shown in the following equation (32), if the matrix PARAlpn is applied to the column vector zs (using the sensitivity of each of the above-mentioned systems as symplectic, K, and + 罟), adjustment parameters can be obtained. P ARA1 is set to a曰曰, the mother of the early position of the measured point η coefficient change (for example, 'α n (pl)) column vector β, [ ί ]. α / Ρι) «33 (Ρ 1) Α(Ρ1) β^1) y5/household 1) 98 1253105

B'[l] = PARAIP'ZSB'[l] = PARAIP'ZS

r533 A (尸1) (尸1) (32) ri 33 (尸1) (尸1) 033R533 A (corpse 1) (corpse 1) (32) ri 33 (corpse 1) (corpse 1) 033

04/户 D 岣,1) 02广)04/household D 岣,1) 02 wide)

0233㈣ 同樣地,針對調整參數PARA2’〜PARA19,,也能求 出每單位量之量測點η之係數變化量之列向量Β ’ [2]〜 Β,[19]。 此處,將各調整參數調整量之縱向量當作下式(33)所 示之縱向量Ρ。 Ρ = ADJI ADJ2 (33)0233 (4) Similarly, for the adjustment parameters PARA2' to PARA19, the column vector Β '[2]~ Β, [19] of the coefficient variation amount per unit amount of the measurement point η can also be obtained. Here, the longitudinal amount of each adjustment parameter adjustment amount is taken as the longitudinal amount Ρ shown by the following formula (33). Ρ = ADJI ADJ2 (33)

ADJ19 CD_聚焦曲線之係數對調整參數PARA1〜PARA19之 調整量之變化Γ能用下式(34)來表示。 /,= [1] + da/2 · 5, [2] + · · U19 · [19] (34) 此處,係利用調整參數之調整量與與該調整量所帶來 之CD-聚焦曲線之係數之上述關係,進行以下所示之計算 ,來欲圖各量測點圖案之均勻化。即,設CD-聚焦曲線各 99 1253105 係數目標值之列向量為f,現在之久在* t祝隹之各係數之列向量為f,藉 由前述之列向量B,[l]〜1 从人 日 u 乂 L19]之1次結合所形成之矩陣為 B,則這t關係能用下式(3來表示。 (35) 若用最小平方法來解上式的話,則成為下式(36)。 Ρ = (ΒΤ· Β)-ι· BT(ft— f) (36) 式中,BM系前述之矩陣B之轉置矩陣,(βΤ· (Βτ · Β)之反矩陣。 糸 這種調整方法係主控制裝置5〇使用上述之式⑽求 出調整篁之列向量Ρ’算出調整量ADn〜調整量細19。 又,為了使用式(36)來求_向4 p,必須衫各量測點 CD-聚焦曲線之各係數之目標值(即,列向量^),但此處, 較佳係如前述,為了以提高孤立線圖案像之面内:句:為 目標,針對各量測點之函數y',將各階係數之目標值全 部設定在相同之值。 其次,針對調整縱橫線寬差時之調整方法加以說明。 :中,如前述定第5圖所示之標線〜之量測用圖案 、 位置之情形,若執行前述 之預測方法的話,則在同一量測點,在 ⑶-聚焦曲線。 “線圖案,能得到 這種情形,也使用與上述之式(36)同樣之式 整量ADn〜調整量ADJ19,但如前述, 二 处俨λ & ^ 為了在各$測點 月匕付到2條CD·聚焦曲線,係數矩陣匕及f 、、 上述之式(30)之f之要素數(33><7=231)之2倍(即,如), 100 1253105 若將對應同一量測點之縱線圖案及橫線圖案係數之目標值 設定同一值的話,則能算出最減低縱橫線寬差之調整量 ADJ1〜調整量ADJ19。 八人主控制裝置50係依照§己憶裝置42所記憶之調 整量ADJ1〜調整* ADJ19,與前述同樣,藉由成像性能 修正控制器48,調整可動透鏡13i〜13s之位置及方式之至 少一方,與上述之各動作之同時,主控制裝置5〇係依昭 調整量細9,對光源16賦予指令,來偏移照明光此之 波長。The change in the adjustment amount of the ADJ19 CD_focus curve to the adjustment parameters PARA1 to PARA19 can be expressed by the following equation (34). /,= [1] + da/2 · 5, [2] + · · U19 · [19] (34) Here, the adjustment amount of the adjustment parameter and the CD-focus curve brought by the adjustment amount are used. The above relationship of the coefficients is calculated by the following calculations to achieve uniformization of the respective dot patterns. That is, let the CD-focus curve each 99 1253105 coefficient target value column vector be f, and now the column vector of each coefficient in the * t wish is f, by the aforementioned column vector B, [l] ~ 1 from The matrix formed by the combination of the person's day u 乂L19] is B, and the relationship of t can be expressed by the following formula (3). (35) If the least square method is used to solve the above equation, then the following equation is obtained. Ρ = (ΒΤ· Β)-ι· BT(ft— f) (36) where BM is the transposed matrix of the matrix B described above, and the inverse matrix of (βΤ·(Βτ · Β). In the adjustment method, the main control unit 5 calculates the adjustment vector n' of the adjusted 篁 column vector Ρ' using the above equation (10). In order to obtain the _ direction 4 p using the equation (36), it is necessary to Measuring the target value of each coefficient of the CD-focus curve (ie, the column vector ^), but here, preferably, as described above, in order to improve the in-plane: sentence: image of the isolated line pattern image, for each quantity The function y' of the measuring point sets all the target values of the coefficients of the order to the same value. Secondly, the adjustment method for adjusting the width difference of the vertical and horizontal lines is explained. When the prediction method and the position of the reticle to the measurement line shown in Fig. 5 are described, if the above-mentioned prediction method is executed, the (3)-focus curve is at the same measurement point. In the case, the same amount of ADn~adjustment amount ADJ19 as in the above formula (36) is used, but as described above, two 俨λ & ^ in order to pay two CD·focus curves at each of the $ measuring points, The coefficient matrix 匕 and f , and the number of elements of f of the above formula (30) (33 >< 7 = 231) are twice (i.e., as), 100 1253105, if the vertical line pattern corresponding to the same measurement point is When the target value of the horizontal line pattern coefficient is set to the same value, the adjustment amount ADJ1 to ADJ19 which minimizes the width difference of the vertical and horizontal lines can be calculated. The eight-person main control device 50 is adjusted according to the amount of adjustment ADJ1 stored in the device 42. Adjusting *ADJ19, as in the above, at least one of the position and the mode of the movable lenses 13i to 13s is adjusted by the imaging performance correction controller 48, and the main control device 5 is adjusted in accordance with the above-mentioned operations. 9. Give a command to the light source 16 to offset the illumination light. .

,又,在本實施形態中’在投影光學系統PL等之調整 後之狀態下’也可進—步執行上述之步驟202〜步驟3f〇 ,來預測調整後之各量測點 < ❿聚焦曲線,進一步重覆 執行上述之評價方法及調整方 设 n i万忐,使各置測點圖案之轉 狀態逐漸趨近均勻化。 V幣尤乃沃)Further, in the present embodiment, in the state after the adjustment of the projection optical system PL or the like, the above-described steps 202 to 3f can be further performed to predict the adjusted measurement points < The curve further repeats the above-mentioned evaluation method and the adjustment method, so that the rotation state of each of the set point patterns is gradually approached and uniformized. V Coin Younawo)

在製造半導體元件時之曝光製程中,製造元件用: 線片R係裝載在標線“ RST上,藉由前述之動作,士 1知“式之曝光。又’在本實施形態之曝光裝置⑽ ’ §進行上述之步進掃描方々 方式之曝光之際,係根據算if 述曝光領域ΙΑ内之晶圓w 心仅置及方式之調整量Ad 〜ADJ18 ,進行控制係如前述同樣。 又,本實施形態,在Μ出溫,^ 精由曝光條件之設定或標線片 之父換使實際轉印之圖案變 ^ 十 系交更化,因查涅克感度(包含 U圖、第21圖、第23圖、 ^ 3 弟25圖〜第28圖所示之各 101 !2531〇5 涅克項成份之項)變化,故重新求出這些感度,當然必須重 新執行上述之預測方法、評價方法、調整方法。 、—如以上之詳細說明,若依上述預測方法的話,則根據 複數項之線性結合值(分別包含將投影光學系統之波面 像差w(Pj)級數展開所得到之各像差成份 ’ 〜37),能求出CD_聚焦曲線(有關透過投影光學系統In the exposure process for manufacturing a semiconductor device, the component is manufactured: the wire R is mounted on the reticle "RST, and the above-described operation is performed. Further, in the exposure apparatus (10) of the present embodiment, when the exposure by the step-and-scan method described above is performed, the adjustment amounts Ad to ADJ18 of the wafer w center in the exposure area are calculated. The control system is the same as described above. Further, in the present embodiment, the temperature is increased, and the pattern of the exposure condition or the father of the reticle is changed to the actual transfer pattern, which is changed by the Zanike sensitivity (including the U map, the first 21, 23, ^ 3, and the changes in the components of the 101!2531〇5 Nike items shown in Figure 28, so to re-determine these sensitivities, of course, the above prediction method must be re-executed. Evaluation method and adjustment method. - As described in detail above, according to the above prediction method, according to the linear combination value of the complex term (including the aberration components obtained by expanding the wavefront aberration w(Pj) series of the projection optical system respectively~ 37), can find the CD_focus curve (about the transmission through the projection optical system

二所投影之圖案像之變動曲線)。因此,不使用需要龐大 汁异時間之複雜計算所帶來之成像模擬,藉由極單純之運 异(求出包含各像差成份Cn i(n=1〜33,i = 1〜37)項之線性 結合值),在既定曝光條件下,透過既定像差狀態之投影光 學系統PL,能預測有關圖案像之CD_聚焦曲線,根據該預 測結果,能短時間預測圖案之投影像(或轉印像)之特性。 又,若依該預測方法的話,則根據CD_聚焦曲線之移 動里及包含各像差成份Cn i(n=1〜33,i = 1〜37)項之線性結 合,也能算出投影光學系統PL之波面像差w( p0 )所起The curve of the pattern of the two projections). Therefore, instead of using the imaging simulation brought about by the complicated calculations that require a large amount of different time, the extremely simple difference is obtained (the equation including the components of the aberrations Cn i (n = 1 to 33, i = 1 to 37) is obtained. The linear combination value), under a predetermined exposure condition, can predict the CD_focus curve of the pattern image through the projection optical system PL of the predetermined aberration state, and according to the prediction result, the projection image of the pattern can be predicted for a short time (or The characteristics of the print). Moreover, according to the prediction method, the projection optical system can also be calculated based on the linear combination of the movement of the CD_focus curve and the items of the aberration components Cn i (n=1 to 33, i = 1 to 37). The wavefront aberration w( p0 ) of PL

因之CD-聚焦曲線之變形情況,故能進一步高精度地預測 CD-聚焦曲線。 又,若依該預測方法的話,有關像大小軸方向(線寬變 化方向)之CD-聚焦曲線之移動不僅在各像差成份之平方 Cn,in有感度’並且在彼此相異像差成份彼此之交叉項也有 感度。若進一步考慮這些交叉項之線性結合的話,則能更 尚精度地預測像大小轴方向之移動量。 又’若依該預測方法的話,則表示量測點η之變動函 數之變形情況之差份函數之奇數階項之係數係在展開 102 1253105 投影光學系統PL之波面像差W( p,0 )時之各像差成份 Cn,i(n=l〜33,i=l〜37)中,因有感度,故藉由各查涅克項 成份Cn,i之線性結合,能預測差份函數y’n之奇數階項之 係數。又,因差份函數y’n之偶數階項之係數在各查涅克 項成份之平方Cni2有感度,故藉由各查淫克項成份之平方 Cn5l2之線性結合,能預測該偶數階項之係數,故能用短時 間且高精度地預測CD-聚焦曲線之變形。 又’若依上述評價方法的話,則使用上述之預測方法 ,在既定曝光條件下,針對投影光學系統PL之有效視野 内之各里測點,能短時間且高精度地預測針對透過投影光 學系統PL所投影之既定圖案像,故根據該cd-聚焦曲線 ,能短時間高精度評價投影光學系統PL之有效視野内之 既定圖案像之特性(例如,均勻性)。 又’若依使用該評價方法之調整方法的話,則使用本 實施形態之評價方法,評價投影光學系統PL之有效視野 内之既疋圖案像之均勾⑲’根據該評價結果’調整透過投Due to the deformation of the CD-focus curve, the CD-focus curve can be predicted with higher precision. Further, according to the prediction method, the movement of the CD-focus curve about the direction of the size axis (the direction in which the line width changes) is not only in the square of each aberration component Cn,in has the sensitivity 'and the aberration components are mutually different The cross terms also have sensitivity. Further consideration of the linear combination of these cross terms makes it possible to predict the amount of movement in the direction of the size axis more accurately. In addition, if the prediction method is used, the coefficient of the odd-order term of the difference function representing the deformation of the variation function of the measurement point η is in the unfolding 102 1253105 Wavefront aberration W(p, 0) of the projection optical system PL In the time-variation components Cn,i (n=l~33, i=l~37), because of the sensitivity, the difference function y can be predicted by the linear combination of the components of each of the Zernike terms Cn,i. The coefficient of the odd order term of 'n. Moreover, since the coefficient of the even-order term of the difference function y'n is sensitive to the square Cni2 of each Zernike component, the even-order term can be predicted by the linear combination of the squares Cn5l2 of the components of each of the components. With the coefficient, the deformation of the CD-focus curve can be predicted in a short time and with high precision. Further, if the above evaluation method is used, the prediction method for the transmission projection optical system can be predicted in a short time and with high precision for each measurement point in the effective field of view of the projection optical system PL under the predetermined exposure conditions. According to the predetermined pattern image projected by the PL, the characteristics (for example, uniformity) of a predetermined pattern image in the effective field of view of the projection optical system PL can be accurately evaluated in a short time based on the cd-focus curve. Further, if the adjustment method of the evaluation method is used, the evaluation method of the present embodiment is used to evaluate the uniformity image of the 疋 pattern image in the effective field of view of the projection optical system PL, and adjust the transmission according to the evaluation result.

:光學系統PL之既定圖案像之形成狀態。因此,根據 j貝結果’能將既定圖案像之特性調整到所欲狀態(例如, 印像之均勻性之方向)。 又,上述實施形態之預測方法係假定投影光學系】 =像差時’當作調整所求出之⑶-聚焦曲線之函數,、雖 :只有偶數階項之10次函數,但本發明係不被限定在 有’调整函齡夕田士 以上.^ 取兩P自數也可是8次以下,也可是12丨 …、-如何,較佳係調整CD_聚焦曲線之函數為高丨 103 1253105 偶函數。 法,雖把差份函數當 階以下,也可是6階以上 又’上述實施形態之預測方 作5階函數,但該函數也可是4 入 迷貫施形態之預測方法係將對應各量測點配置 之里測用標線片之圖案作為縱線圖案及橫線圖案(即,交叉 圖案)各別設置之圖案、或孤立線圖案,但本發明並不限於 此’可以是複數個平行線圖案(L/S圖案),也可以是交叉圖 !或組合平行線圖案之圖案。又’也可不僅包含縱圖案、 _案,也可包含斜向延伸之線圖案。又,當採用圖 案時’分別用本實施形態之預測方法來預測該l/s圖案兩 端之線圖案之線寬,用本實施形態之評價方法來評價這些 線寬差(即,線寬異常值),與本實施形態之調整方法同樣 ,根據該評價結果,在調整圖案像之形成狀態下,在減低 線寬異常值之大小了,執行曝光的話,則能進行高精度之 曝光。 又,上述實施形態之評價方法,雖將線圖案面内均句 性、縱橫線寬差、、線寬異常值作為評價項目,但本發明並 不限於此’亦讓CD-聚焦曲線將能評價之所有項目作 為e平價項目。 又’上述實施形態之評價方法,雖針對投影光學系統 PL之有效視野之各量測點,分別用短時間且高精度預測, 在既定曝光條件下,透過投影光學系統pL所投影之既定 圖案像之CD-聚焦曲線,根據該CD_聚焦曲線,針對評價 104 1253105 投影光學系統PL之有对 均θ P " 无定圖案像之特性(例如, 杓勾性)之情形加以說明 ★ „ ^ < 5子知方法並不限於此 。亦即,能得到投影光學系統 Λ 一丰/ 之波面像差之資訊,進 ν月b得到有關圖案投影像杳 又〜1冢之貝矾。又,也可者廣杳、、曰古 感度對前述投影像(其係根據 一土先 —^ 骒坆二貝矾,使用查涅克多項式 ,在將波面像差級數展開複數 ^ ± 克項中,使該相互作 用影響前述投影像特性之任咅杳 又仕心查涅克項之組合之交又項)之 ’史化’來評價前述圖幸傻夕胜 為士 、 口茶像之特性。即使在這種情形,也考: The state in which the predetermined pattern of the optical system PL is formed. Therefore, the characteristics of the predetermined pattern image can be adjusted to the desired state (for example, the direction of the uniformity of the print) according to the result of the j-be. Further, the prediction method of the above embodiment assumes that the projection optical system = "when aberration" is a function of the (3)-focus curve obtained by the adjustment, and although there is only a tenth order function of the even order term, the present invention does not. It is limited to the 'adjusted function of the age of Xi Tianshi. ^ Take two P from the number can also be 8 times or less, but also 12 丨 ..., - how, better to adjust the CD_ focus curve function is higher 丨 103 1253105 even function . The method, although the difference function is below the order, but also the sixth-order function of the above-mentioned embodiment of the difference function of the sixth-order or higher, but the function may also be a predictive method of the four-in-one mode, which will be configured corresponding to each measurement point. The pattern of the reticle is used as a pattern of a vertical line pattern and a horizontal line pattern (ie, a cross pattern), or an isolated line pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a plurality of parallel line patterns ( The L/S pattern) can also be a cross-pattern! or a pattern of combined parallel line patterns. Further, it may include not only a vertical pattern, a case, but also a line pattern extending obliquely. Further, when the pattern is used, the line widths of the line patterns at both ends of the l/s pattern are predicted by the prediction method of the present embodiment, and the line width difference (that is, the line width abnormality is evaluated by the evaluation method of the present embodiment). In the same manner as the adjustment method of the present embodiment, in the state in which the pattern image is formed, when the line width abnormal value is reduced and the exposure is performed, high-precision exposure can be performed. Further, in the evaluation method of the above-described embodiment, the line pattern in-plane uniformity, the vertical and horizontal line width difference, and the line width abnormal value are used as evaluation items, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the CD-focus curve can be evaluated. All projects are considered as e-parity projects. Further, in the evaluation method of the above-described embodiment, the respective measurement points of the effective field of view of the projection optical system PL are predicted in a short time and accurately, and the predetermined pattern image projected through the projection optical system pL under a predetermined exposure condition is used. CD-focus curve, according to the CD_focus curve, for the evaluation 104 10453105 projection optical system PL has a description of the characteristics of the θ P " undefined pattern image (for example, 杓 hook) ★ „ ^ &lt The method of knowing the 5th is not limited to this. That is, the information of the wavefront aberration of the projection optical system Λ一丰/, can be obtained, and the image of the pattern projection image is obtained in the month of the month. It is possible to use the wide-ranging and sensible sensations on the above-mentioned projection images (which are based on a soil-first-^ 骒坆二贝矾, using the Chanek polynomial, and expanding the wavefront aberration series into a complex ^ ± gram term) This interaction affects the 'historical' of the combination of the above-mentioned projection image characteristics and the combination of the Zonikek item, and evaluates the characteristics of the above-mentioned figure. This situation is also tested

慮查涅克感度對前述投影像(豆得 取u、係I知所未考慮之該相互作 用影響圖案投影像特性之任意查^項之組合之交叉項)之 變化,來評價圖案像之特性,故能更高精度地評價圖案像 之特性。 又,上述實施形態之評價方法,係根據使用前述之式 (36)所算出之最佳調整量,在主控制裝置5〇之控制下,藉 由成像性能修正控制器4"自動進行調整者,不限定在 此,也可根據前述調整量,用手動調整投影光學系統之成 像性能等。 又,在上述實施形態之預測方法中,能考慮各種之變 形例。又,上述實施形態,係藉由下述一連串之處理來說 明·根據CD-聚焦曲線之預測方法、用所預測之cd-聚焦 曲線來评價曝光裝置1 〇〇之圖案轉印狀態之評價方法、根 據該評價結果來調整圖案轉印狀態之調整方法、該調整後 進行曝光之曝光方法;但不必用一連串之處理來進行所有 的方法’本發明之預測方法、評價方法、調整方法係分別 105 1253105 獨立或任意組合來執行者。 之後,評價方法、調整方法 法之各種變形例之後執行者 方法及其變形例之執行後, 價方法、調整方法、曝光方 之各種項目當作評價項目之 法、藉由步進重複方式之曝 方法、曝光方法。 持續上述實施形態之預測方法 曝光方法也是在這些預測方 。又’在上述實施形態之預測 除了能適用上述實施形態之評 法之外,當然也能適用將上述 評價方法、藉由手動之調整方 光方法等各種評價方法、調整To evaluate the characteristics of the pattern image by considering the change in the image of the image of the above-mentioned projection image (the cross-term of the combination of any of the parameters of the image that affects the image of the image) Therefore, the characteristics of the pattern image can be evaluated with higher precision. Further, in the evaluation method of the above-described embodiment, the optimum adjustment amount calculated by the above formula (36) is automatically adjusted by the imaging performance correction controller 4" under the control of the main control unit 5? The present invention is not limited thereto, and the imaging performance and the like of the projection optical system may be manually adjusted in accordance with the aforementioned adjustment amount. Further, in the prediction method of the above embodiment, various modifications can be considered. Further, the above-described embodiment is explained by a series of processes described below. The evaluation method of the pattern transfer state of the exposure apparatus 1 is evaluated based on the prediction method of the CD-focus curve and the predicted cd-focus curve. According to the evaluation result, the method of adjusting the pattern transfer state and the exposure method after the adjustment are performed; however, it is not necessary to perform all the methods by a series of processes. The prediction method, the evaluation method, and the adjustment method of the present invention are respectively 105. 1253105 Performers independently or in any combination. After that, after the execution method and its variants are executed in various modifications of the evaluation method and the adjustment method, the price method, the adjustment method, and the various items of the exposure method are used as the evaluation item method, and the exposure method is repeated by the step-and-repeat method. Method, exposure method. The prediction method that continues the above embodiment is also in the prediction method. Further, in the prediction of the above-described embodiment, in addition to the evaluation of the above-described embodiment, various evaluation methods such as the above-described evaluation method and the manual adjustment method can be applied and adjusted.

你 述貫施形態中,就投影光學系統之波 量測所使用之波面像差量測器而言,也可使用全體 狀具有與晶圓保持器能更換之形狀之波面像差量測器體 種該波面像差量測器也能將晶圓或晶圓保持器搬 到晶圓台WST t ,外B m y 曰… “固自WST,使用搬出之搬送“ 曰日51裝載器等),進行自動 對曰…t 订自動搬迗。並且’上述實施形態"In the case of the description, in the case of the wavefront aberration measuring device used for the wave measurement of the projection optical system, it is also possible to use a wavefront aberration measuring body having a shape that can be replaced with the wafer holder. The wavefront aberration measuring device can also move the wafer or wafer holder to the wafer table WST t, and the outer B my 曰... "fixed from the WST, using the carry-out transfer", the next day 51 loader, etc. Automatically 曰...t order automatic relocation. And the above embodiment "

门字波面像差量測裝置8〇自由裝卸,也可當」 疋°又置。此時’也可只將波面像差量測裝置80之一 $ t設^晶圓台,將其他部份配置在晶圓台之外部。又, 風::轭形恶’係忽視波面像差量測裝置8〇之受光用另 = 像差者’但也可考慮該波面像差來決定投細 用前述美國專利第二=…中,,吏 之产带,,,Μ唬專所揭示之量測用標線片The door wavefront aberration measuring device 8〇 can be freely loaded and unloaded, and can also be set as “疋°. At this time, it is also possible to set only one of the wavefront aberration measuring devices 80 to the wafer table, and to arrange the other portions outside the wafer table. In addition, the wind:: yoke type ignoring ignores the wavefront aberration measuring device 8〇, and the other is the same as the aberration, but the wavefront aberration can also be used to determine the thinning. , the production line of the 吏 吏, ,, Μ唬 Μ唬 之 之 之 揭示 揭示

來m斟曰门 猎由曝先裝置所備有之調準系、統ALG 基準f 曰所轉印之形成置測用圖案潛像之 圖案潛像之位置偏離當檢測量測用圖案潛像之 106 1253105 情形,也可使用光阻或使用朵并 九磁材料等來作為晶圓等基板The position of the latent image of the latent image forming the test pattern transferred by the alignment system and the ALG reference f 备 is offset from the latent image of the detection measurement pattern. 106 1253105 In the case, it is also possible to use a photoresist or a doped nine-magnetic material as a substrate such as a wafer.

上之感光層。藉由這此方法,I * 不必透過作業者或服務工程 師,能藉由曝光裝置100全自私乂 ^ t ^ , 目動進仃刖述之投影光學系統 PL之調整。 又’在上述實施形悲中,係移動投影光學系統pL之 光學元件來調整成像性能者,但不限於此,也可加在該驅 動機構 '或取代該機構’例如’使用變更投影光學系統PL 之光學元件間之氣體壓力之機構’使帛將標線# r移動或 傾斜到投影光學系統光軸方向之機構,或變更標線與晶目鲁 間所配置之平行平面板之光學厚度機構等。但是,上述實 施形態係使用19個調整參數者,但該調整參數之數與種 類也可任意,例如,也可不包含晶圓表面(晶圓平台wst) 之驅動量或照明光EL之波長偏移等。 又,上述實施形態,係針對使用掃描曝光裝置來作為 曝光裝置之情形加以說明,但不限於此,例如,也可使用 步進重複型曝光裝置。 就這種情形之曝光裝置之用途而言,並不限於半導體 _ 製造用之曝光裝置,例如,亦能廣泛應用於能將液晶顯示 元件圖案轉印在角型玻璃板之液晶用曝光裝置、電漿顯示 或有機EL等之顯示裝置、攝影元件(Ccd等)、薄膜磁頭 、微機及DNA晶片等之曝光裝置。又,為了製造半導體 元件等之微元件、光曝光裝置、EUV曝光裝置、X線曝光 裝置、及電子線曝光裝置等所使用之標線片或遮光罩,本 發明也能適用在將電路圖案轉印在玻璃基板或矽晶圓等曝 107 1253105 光裝置。 又,上述實施形態之曝光裝置之光源,不限於&雷射 二ArF準分子雷射、KrF準分子雷射等紫外脈衝光源,也 能使用連續光源’例如,使用發出g線(波長為436nm)、i 線(波長為365nm)等之輝線之超高壓水銀燈。並且,也可 使用X線,特別係Euv光等來作為照明光EL。The photosensitive layer on it. By this method, I* does not have to pass through the operator or the service engineer, and the exposure device 100 can be self-contained by the exposure device 100 to visually adjust the projection optical system PL. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the optical element of the projection optical system pL is moved to adjust the imaging performance, but is not limited thereto, and may be added to the drive mechanism 'or replace the mechanism', for example, using the change projection optical system PL. The mechanism of the gas pressure between the optical elements is a mechanism for moving or tilting the reticle #r to the optical axis direction of the projection optical system, or changing the optical thickness mechanism of the parallel plane plate disposed between the reticle and the crystal lens. . However, in the above embodiment, 19 adjustment parameters are used. However, the number and type of the adjustment parameters may be arbitrary. For example, the driving amount of the wafer surface (wafer platform wst) or the wavelength shift of the illumination light EL may not be included. Wait. Further, although the above embodiment has been described with respect to the case where the scanning exposure device is used as the exposure device, the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, a step-and-repeat type exposure device may be used. The use of the exposure apparatus in this case is not limited to the semiconductor-exposure apparatus for manufacturing, and can be widely applied to, for example, an exposure apparatus for liquid crystal which can transfer a liquid crystal display element pattern to a prismatic glass plate. An exposure device such as a display device such as a slurry display or an organic EL, a photographic element (Ccd, etc.), a thin film magnetic head, a microcomputer, and a DNA wafer. Further, in order to manufacture a reticle or a hood used for a micro component such as a semiconductor element, a light exposure device, an EUV exposure device, an X-ray exposure device, and an electron beam exposure device, the present invention is also applicable to switching a circuit pattern. It is printed on a glass substrate or a silicon wafer, etc., exposed to 107 1253105 optical devices. Further, the light source of the exposure apparatus of the above-described embodiment is not limited to an ultraviolet pulse source such as a & laser two ArF excimer laser or a KrF excimer laser, and a continuous light source can be used, for example, a g-line is emitted (wavelength is 436 nm). ), an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp with a bright line such as an i-line (wavelength of 365 nm). Further, an X-ray, in particular, Euv light or the like can be used as the illumination light EL.

又’也可使用用#斜(或铒與镱之兩者)之光纖放大器 來放大從刪+導體雷㈣光纖雷射所振盈之紅外域、或 可視域之單-波長雷射光,&用非線性光學結晶,波形轉 換為紫外光之高階譜波。又,投影光學系統之倍率不僅是 縮小系統,而且也可是等倍及放大系統之任一種。又就 投影光學系統而言’不限於折射系統,也可使用具有反射 光學元件與折射光學元件之反射折射系統或只使用反射光 子疋件之反射系統。又,當使用反射折射系統或反射系統 來作為技影光學系統PL時,就前述之可動光學元件而言 ,係變更反射光學元件(凹面鏡或反射鏡等)之位置等來 凋整投影光學系統之成像特性。又,就照明光EL而言, 特別是使用Ah雷射光、或EUV光等時,也能將投影光學 系統PL當作全反射系統(只由反射光學元件所構成)。但是 ,當使用Ah雷射光或EUV光等時,標線片R也能當作反 射型。 又,當製造曝光裝置1〇〇等之際,首先,將包含複數 個透鏡元件、反射鏡等光學元件等之照明光學系統1 2當 作單元單體加以組裝,並且,把投影光學系統pL當作單 108 1253105 缔力乂、、且破。又,將由許多機械元件所構成之標線片a李 你炎々: 當作早元加以組裝。又,為了發捏 為各單元之所欲性能,進行光學 及電氣性調整等。Χ,〜: = Γ 機調整、 投影光學2 …周整之際,特別係能針對 '先子糸統PL’使用上述實施形態所說明之投影 統之调整方法、或透過投影光學系統(包含 此之評價方法之至少-部份)之圖案像特性之調整方法持;; 行調整。 π 進 其次,將照明光學系統12與投影光學系統PL等組壯 t曝光裝置本體内,並且,將標線片台系統與晶圓台系: 4安裝在曝光裝置本體内,連接配線及配管。 其次,針對照明光學系統12與投影光學系統進一 :進行光學性調整。這是因為安裝在曝光裝置之前及後, :些光學系統’特別係投影光學系統PL t成像性能微妙 變化之故。本實施形態、,係在組裝於該曝光裝置本體後, 進行投影光學系統PL之光學性調整時,將前述之波面像 差量測裝置80安裝在晶圓台WST,與前述同樣的,量測 波面像差,將該波面像差之量測結果輸入電腦,用與前述 同樣之步驟,例如,算出各透鏡元件之6自由度方向分別 之調整量,將該算出結果顯示在該電腦之顯示器上。並且 ,依照該顯示,由技術者(作業者)等調整各透鏡元件。藉 此,確實滿足期望之成像性能之投影光學系統pL之調整 便告完成。又,在該階段,因能判斷不能修正之像差,主 要係高階像差,係自動調整困難之像差,故最好是能再調 109 1253105 整透鏡之安裝等。 又田藉由上述再調整無法得到所欲之性能時,則必 2部份透鏡再加工或更換。又,為了易於進行投影光學 二’” PL之光學元件之再加工,在將投影光學系統凡組裝 -凌置本體則,使用專用之波面量測裝置等來量測波 面像差,根據該量測結果,特定需要再加工之光學元件之 有無及位置等,也可將該光學元件之再加工與其他光學元 件之再調整同時進行。 /然後’進—步進行综合調整(電氣調整、動作確認等) ▲错此’旎製造本實施形態之曝光裝i ι〇等曝光裝置, 該曝^裝置能使用高精度調整光學特性之投影光學系統π 、,將才不線# R之圖案高精度地轉印在晶® w上。又,曝 光裝置之製造較佳係在溫度及潔淨度等受控制之潔淨室來 進行。 (元件製造方法) 其次,針對微影製程使用上述曝光裝置之元件製造方 法加以說明。 第33圖係表^件叩或⑶等半導體晶片、液晶面 板、CCD、薄膜磁頭、微機器等)製造例之流程圖。如第 33圖所不,百先,在步驟4〇ι(設計步驟)中,進行元件之 功能及性能設計(例如,半導體元件之電路料等), 用來實現4功此之圖案設計。其次,在步冑術(遮光罩 作步驟)中’製作形成所設計之電路圖案之遮光罩。另_ ^ 面在γ驟403(晶圓製造步驟)中,使用石夕晶等材料,來 110 1253105 製造晶圓。 其次,在步驟404(晶圓處理步驟)中,係使用步驟4㈧ 〜步驟4〇3所準備之遮光罩與晶圓,如後述,藉由微以 術等,將實際電路形成在晶圓上。其次,在步驟4〇5(元件 組裝步驟)中,使用步驟404所處理之晶圓’進行元件=裝 。在該步驟405中,視需要,包含切割製程、接合製程:Also, it is also possible to use a fiber amplifier with # oblique (or both 铒 and 镱) to amplify the single-wavelength laser light from the infrared domain or the visible region of the laser beam that is oscillating from the ray (4) fiber laser, & With nonlinear optical crystallization, the waveform is converted to a high-order spectral wave of ultraviolet light. Further, the magnification of the projection optical system is not only a reduction system but also any one of the equal magnification and amplification systems. Further, as far as the projection optical system is concerned, it is not limited to the refractive system, and a reflection refraction system having a reflective optical element and a refractive optical element or a reflection system using only a reflective photo element can be used. Further, when a catadioptric system or a reflection system is used as the technical optical system PL, the position of the reflective optical element (concave mirror, mirror, etc.) is changed to the projection optical system in the above-described movable optical element. Imaging characteristics. Further, in the case of the illumination light EL, in particular, when the Ah laser light or the EUV light is used, the projection optical system PL can be regarded as a total reflection system (only composed of a reflective optical element). However, when Ah laser light or EUV light or the like is used, the reticle R can also be regarded as a reflection type. In addition, when the exposure apparatus 1 or the like is manufactured, first, an illumination optical system 12 including an optical element such as a plurality of lens elements and mirrors is assembled as a unit cell, and the projection optical system pL is used as a projection unit. Make a single 108 1253105. In addition, a reticle a consisting of a number of mechanical components, Li Yan, is assembled as an early element. Further, in order to perform the desired performance for each unit, optical and electrical adjustments are performed. Χ,~:= 调整 Machine adjustment, projection optics 2...When the whole process is completed, the adjustment method of the projection system described in the above embodiment or the transmission projection system can be used for the 'Prince Privet PL'. The method of adjusting the pattern image characteristics of at least part of the evaluation method; πInto Next, the illumination optical system 12 and the projection optical system PL are assembled in a body of the exposure apparatus, and the reticle stage system and the wafer stage system 4 are attached to the exposure apparatus body to connect the wiring and the piping. Next, the illumination optical system 12 and the projection optical system are further advanced: optical adjustment is performed. This is because before and after the exposure apparatus, some of the optical systems' are particularly subtle changes in the imaging performance of the projection optical system PLt. In the present embodiment, when the optical adjustment of the projection optical system PL is performed after being incorporated in the main body of the exposure apparatus, the wavefront aberration measuring device 80 is mounted on the wafer table WST, and the measurement is performed in the same manner as described above. Wavefront aberration, the measurement result of the wavefront aberration is input to a computer, and the adjustment amount of each of the 6-degree-of-freedom directions of each lens element is calculated by the same procedure as described above, and the calculation result is displayed on the display of the computer. . Further, according to the display, each lens element is adjusted by a technician (operator) or the like. As a result, the adjustment of the projection optical system pL which satisfies the desired imaging performance is completed. In addition, at this stage, since it is possible to judge the aberration that cannot be corrected, it is mainly a high-order aberration, and the aberration is automatically adjusted. Therefore, it is preferable to re-adjust the installation of the full lens of 109 1253105. When Umeda fails to obtain the desired performance by the above re-adjustment, the two lenses must be reworked or replaced. Further, in order to facilitate the reworking of the optical element of the projection optical two-"PL, when the projection optical system is assembled, the wavefront aberration is measured using a dedicated wavefront measuring device, and the measurement is performed according to the measurement. As a result, the presence or absence and position of the optical element that needs to be reworked can be performed simultaneously with the re-processing of the optical element and the re-adjustment of other optical elements. / Then, the overall adjustment (electrical adjustment, operation confirmation, etc.) is performed. ▲ Incorrectly, the exposure apparatus such as the exposure apparatus i 〇 is manufactured in this embodiment, and the exposure apparatus can use the projection optical system π which adjusts the optical characteristics with high precision, and the pattern of the line #R is rotated with high precision. It is printed on the crystal wafer w. Further, the exposure apparatus is preferably manufactured in a controlled clean room such as temperature and cleanliness. (Component manufacturing method) Next, the component manufacturing method using the above exposure apparatus is applied to the lithography process. Fig. 33 is a flow chart showing a manufacturing example of a semiconductor wafer, a liquid crystal panel, a CCD, a thin film magnetic head, a micromachine, etc., as shown in Fig. 33. In step 4 (design step), the function and performance design of the component (for example, the circuit material of the semiconductor component, etc.) is used to realize the pattern design of the fourth function. Secondly, in the stepping technique (the hood) In the step), a hood for forming the designed circuit pattern is formed. In the gamma step 403 (wafer manufacturing step), a wafer is manufactured using a material such as Shi Xijing to 110 1253105. Next, at step 404 In the (wafer processing step), the hood and the wafer prepared in the steps 4 (8) to 4 4 are used, and the actual circuit is formed on the wafer by micro-operation or the like as will be described later. Next, in step 4 In 〇5 (component assembly step), the wafer processed by step 404 is used to perform component=loading. In this step 405, if necessary, the cutting process and the bonding process are included:

及封裝製程(晶片密封)等製程。 衣S 最後,在步驟406(檢查步驟)中,進行步驟4〇5所製成And packaging process (wafer sealing) and other processes. Finally, in step 406 (inspection step), step 4〇5 is made.

之兀件之動作確認試驗、耐久性試驗等檢查。經過該掣程 後,元件便告完成,將元件出貨。 、壬 第34圖係表示半導體元件中之上述步冑4〇4之詳細流 程例。第34 ®中,在步驟411(氧化步驟)中,使晶圓之: 面氧化。在步驟412(CVD步驟)中,在晶圓表面形成絕緣 膜。在步^ 413(電極形成步驟)中,藉由蒸㈣電極形成 在晶圓上。在步驟414(離子植入步驟)中,將離子植入到 晶圓。以上之各步驟411〜步驟414係構成晶圓處理各階Check the test, durability test, etc. After the process, the component is completed and the component is shipped. And Fig. 34 is a view showing a detailed flow chart of the above steps 4 to 4 in the semiconductor device. In the 34th ®, in step 411 (oxidation step), the wafer is surface-oxidized. In step 412 (CVD step), an insulating film is formed on the surface of the wafer. In step 413 (electrode forming step), a vapor (four) electrode is formed on the wafer. In step 414 (ion implantation step), ions are implanted into the wafer. Each of the above steps 411 to 414 constitutes a step of wafer processing.

段之前處理製程,在各階段,視需要之處理,選擇性地執 行0 在晶圓製程之各階段,若上述之前處理製程完成的話 ’則如以下所述’執行後處理製帛。在該後處理製程中, 首先,在步驟415(光阻形成步驟)中,將感光劑塗布在晶 圓上。其次’在步冑416(曝光步驟)中,藉由上述所說明 之曝光裝置及曝光方法’將遮光罩之電路圖案轉印在晶圓 上。其次,在步驟417(顯影步驟)中,將曝光之晶圓顯影 111 1253105 在步驟41 8(飿刻步驟)中,藉由钮刻來除去光阻 份以外部份之霞φ 路出構件。又,在步驟419(光阻除去步 中,將蝕刻完成不要之光阻除去。 * 重複這些前處理製程與後處理製程,藉此在晶圓切 成多重電路圖案。 〃 若使用U上所$明之本實施形態之元件製造方法的話 、’,則在曝光製程(步驟416)中,因使用上述實施形態之曝 光裝置’故能實現有效減低縱線圖案與橫線圖案之轉印像 彼此之線寬差、或孤立圖案之線寬均勾性之良好曝光。因 此,能提高最終製品(元件)之良率,且能提高該生產性。The process is processed before the segment, and at each stage, the process is selectively performed as required. At each stage of the wafer process, if the above-mentioned prior process is completed, the post-processing is performed as described below. In this post-treatment process, first, in step 415 (photoresist forming step), a sensitizer is coated on the crystal circle. Next, in step 416 (exposure step), the circuit pattern of the hood is transferred onto the wafer by the exposure apparatus and the exposure method described above. Next, in step 417 (development step), the exposed wafer is developed 111 1253105. In step 41 8 (the engraving step), the portion of the light-emitting portion other than the photoresist is removed by button etching. Further, in step 419 (the photoresist removal step, the photoresist is removed by etching. * Repeat these pre-processing and post-processing processes to cut the wafer into multiple circuit patterns. 〃 If using U on $ According to the element manufacturing method of the present embodiment, in the exposure process (step 416), since the exposure apparatus of the above embodiment is used, it is possible to effectively reduce the line of the transfer images of the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line pattern. The width difference or the line width of the isolated pattern is well exposed. Therefore, the yield of the final product (element) can be improved, and the productivity can be improved.

如以上之說明,本發明之 適用於相互正交之線圖案像之 之調整。又,本發明之預測方 投影光學系統之圖案像之特性 適用於評價透過投影光學系統 調整方法係適用於調整透過投 狀態。又,本發明之曝光方法 轉印在物體上。又,本發明之 之生產。 才又影光學糸統之調整方法係 投影所使用之投影光學系統 法及程式係適用於預測透過 。又,本發明之評價方法係 之圖案像之特性。本發明之 影光學系統之圖案像之形成 及曝光裝置係適用於將圖案 元件製造方法係適用於元件As explained above, the present invention is applicable to the adjustment of mutually orthogonal line pattern images. Further, the characteristics of the pattern image of the predictive projection optical system of the present invention are suitable for evaluation. The transmission optical system adjustment method is suitable for adjusting the transmission state. Further, the exposure method of the present invention is transferred onto an object. Further, the production of the present invention. The method of adjusting the optical system is the projection optical system used in projection and the program is suitable for predicting transmission. Further, the evaluation method of the present invention is a characteristic of a pattern image. The pattern image forming and exposure apparatus of the shadow optical system of the present invention is suitable for applying the pattern element manufacturing method to the element.

【圖式簡單說明】 (一)圖式部分 第1圖’係概略表示本發明之一實施形態之曝光裝置 構成圖。 112 !253l〇5 圖之波面像差 第2圖,係表示第 ®測裝置之截面圖 ,從微透 從微透鏡 案像彼此 之流程圖BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS (1) Schematic portion Fig. 1 is a schematic view showing the configuration of an exposure apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention. 112 !253l〇5 Wavefront aberration of the figure Figure 2 is a cross-sectional view of the first measuring device, from micro-transparent from the microlens

第3A圖,係表示光學系統中不存在 鏡陣列射出光束之圖。 T 第3Β圖,係表示光學系統中存在像差時, 陣列射出光束之圖。 第4圖,係表示以調整正交2軸方向之線圖 之線寬差為目的之投影光學系統PL之調整方法Fig. 3A is a view showing the absence of the beam emitted from the mirror array in the optical system. T Figure 3 is a diagram showing the beam emitted by the array when there is aberration in the optical system. Fig. 4 is a view showing an adjustment method of the projection optical system PL for the purpose of adjusting the line width difference of the line graph in the orthogonal two-axis direction.

第5圖,係從圖案面側來看量測用標線片之平面圖。 開 明 第6A〜6F圖,係根據將投影光學系統之波面像差展 之查淫克多項式之第9項與第12項之值變化,用來說 光瞳面之波面錯亂方式之圖。 第7A〜7F ,係根據將投影光學系統之波面像差展 開之查淫克多項式之第4項與第5項之值變化,用來說明 光瞳面之波面錯亂方式之圖。Fig. 5 is a plan view of the reticle for measurement from the side of the pattern side. Kaiming Figures 6A to 6F are diagrams showing the wavefront disorder of the pupil plane based on the values of the ninth and the twelfth items of the singularity polynomial of the wavefront aberration of the projection optical system. 7A to 7F are diagrams for explaining the wavefront disorder of the pupil plane based on the values of the fourth and fifth terms of the Detective Polynomial which spreads the wavefront aberration of the projection optical system.

第8圖,係用來說明對應縱線圖案與橫線圖案之最佳 聚焦位置之差,產生縱線圖案像(V)與橫線圖案像(H)之線 寬差情況之CD-聚焦線圖。 弟9圖’係表示使用波長為248·3nm之KrF雷射作為 光源,照明p =0.75之2/3 ,裒帶照明條件,投影光學系統 PL之數值孔徑(ΝΑ) = 0·68時,轉印量測用標線片上之圖案 斤得到之光阻像之線寬量測之結果所得到之縱橫線之線寬 差(實驗結果)之一例圖。 113 1253105 第Η)久,係更詳細表示第9圖之UW又 m之。P伤(上3段之部份)圖(等高線圖)。 第u圖,係更詳細表示第9圖之Zi2=_H — 40m;l之部份(上2段之部份)圖。 差2 12A〜12D圖,係用來說明第9圖之各等高線圖意 義之圖。 第13圖’係表示在既定條件下’藉由模擬所求出之像 差間之交又項之計算結果一例之圖表。 第14圖,係表示有關線寬偏差△ CD之暴 Sensitivity)之計算結果一例之圖。 =15圖,係表示有關線寬偏差Acd,使用習知zs法 之計算結果與使用空間像之計算結果之關係圖。 第16圖,係表示一實施形態之預測方法之流程圖(其 一 )〇 第17 A圖,係表示1 〇階函數之一例圖,第丨7B圖係 表示該調整誤差一例之圖。 第1 8圖’係表示查涅克感度s |之一例圖。 第19圖,係表示一 50m λ--50m λ ,用10m λ間距 來计异11點聚焦方向之移動量,使用最小平方法,來計 算直線斜率之計算結果之一例圖。 第2 0圖,係表示在用與第1 9圖之情形同樣之像計算 所侍到之11點之線寬變化量之計算結果中,假定二階函 數’使用最小平方法之近似結果一例之圖。 第21圖,係表示查涅克感度s召i之一例圖。 114 1253105 第22A圖’係表示&與z"之串訊圖,第22b圖係表. 示z9與z12之串訊圖。 第23圖,係表示各交叉項感度之一例圖。 第24圖,係表示一實施形態之預測方法之流程圖(其 2) ° /、 第25圖,係表示查涅克項之感度Sr 51之感度例圖。 第26圖,係表示查涅克項之感度之感度例圖。 第27圖’係表示查埋克項之感度^ η之感度例圖。 第28圖,係表示查涅克項之感度s占w之感度例圖。籲 第29圖,係表示查涅克項之感度“2丨之感度例圖。 第30圖,係表示求出cd—聚焦曲線y,,k、…時之動 作的不思圖。 第31Α圖’係表示藉由精密之成像模擬來算出代表性 之量測點之CD-聚焦曲線之一例圖,第31Β圖係表示藉由 本發明之一實施形態之預測方法所預測之同一曝光條件、 用同一圖案之代表性之量測點之CD_聚焦曲線之一例圖。 第32圖,係表示在線寬偏差中,關於△ CD,使用新 _ 的ZS法之計算結果與空間像之計算結果之關係圖。 第33圖’係表示用來說明本發明之元件製造方法之實 施形態之流程圖。 第34圖,係表示第33圖之步驟204之詳細流程圖。 (二)元件代表符號Figure 8 is a CD-focus line for explaining the difference between the best focus position of the vertical line pattern and the horizontal line pattern, and the line width difference between the vertical line pattern image (V) and the horizontal line pattern image (H). Figure. The figure 9 shows that the KrF laser with a wavelength of 248·3 nm is used as the light source, the illumination p = 0.75 of 2/3, the illumination condition of the pupil, and the numerical aperture (ΝΑ) of the projection optical system PL = 0·68. An example of the line width difference (experimental result) of the vertical and horizontal lines obtained by the measurement of the line width of the photoresist image obtained by the pattern on the reticle. 113 1253105 Dijon) For a long time, the UW and m of Figure 9 are more detailed. P injury (part of the last 3 paragraphs) map (contour map). Figure u is a more detailed diagram showing Zi2 = _H - 40m; part of l (part of the last two paragraphs) in Figure 9. The difference 2 12A to 12D is a diagram for explaining the meaning of each contour map of Fig. 9. Fig. 13 is a graph showing an example of the calculation result of the intersection between the aberrations obtained by the simulation under the predetermined conditions. Fig. 14 is a view showing an example of the calculation result of the line width deviation ΔCD. The =15 graph is a graph showing the relationship between the calculation result of the conventional zs method and the calculation result using the space image. Fig. 16 is a flow chart showing a prediction method of an embodiment (Part 1). Fig. 17A is a diagram showing an example of a 1st order function, and Fig. 7B is a diagram showing an example of the adjustment error. Fig. 18 is a diagram showing an example of the Chanek sensitivity s |. Fig. 19 is a diagram showing an example of the calculation result of the linear slope by using a minimum square method by using a distance of 10 m λ to calculate the movement amount of the 11-point focusing direction by a distance of 50 m λ - 50 m λ . Fig. 20 is a diagram showing an example of the approximate result of the second-order function 'using the least squares method in the calculation result of the line width variation of 11 points which is the same as the image calculation in the case of Fig. 19. . Fig. 21 is a diagram showing an example of the Chanek sensitivity s calling i. 114 1253105 Figure 22A shows the cross-talk between & and z", and Figure 22b shows the cross-talk between z9 and z12. Fig. 23 is a view showing an example of the sensitivity of each cross term. Fig. 24 is a flow chart showing a method for predicting an embodiment (2) ° / and Fig. 25, showing an example of the sensitivity of the sensitivity of the Chanek term Sr 51. Fig. 26 is a diagram showing the sensitivity of the sensitivity of the Chanek term. Fig. 27 is a diagram showing the sensitivity of the sensitivity η of the gram. Figure 28 is a diagram showing the sensitivity of the Senig's term s to w. In the 29th figure, the sensitivity of the Chanek term is shown as an example of the sensitivity of the 2nd. The 30th figure shows the action of finding the cd-focus curve y, k, . 'A diagram showing an example of a CD-focus curve for calculating a representative measurement point by sophisticated imaging simulation, and FIG. 31 is a view showing the same exposure condition predicted by the prediction method of one embodiment of the present invention, using the same An example of a CD_focus curve of a representative measurement point of a pattern. Fig. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the calculation result of the ZS method using the new _ and the calculation result of the space image with respect to ΔCD in the line width deviation. Figure 33 is a flow chart showing an embodiment of the method for manufacturing a component of the present invention. Figure 34 is a detailed flow chart showing the step 204 of Figure 33. (2) Symbol of the component

EL IAR 曝光用照明光 照明領域 115 1253105 ΙΑ 照射領域(曝光領域) LB 雷射光束 Μ 反射鏡 PL 投影光學系統 R 標線片 RST 標線片台 TS 控制資訊 W 晶圓 WST 晶圓台 11 室 12 照明光學系統 13 折射光學元件 13广 135 透鏡元件 15 光瞳開口光圈 16 光源 17 光透過窗 20 照度均勻化系統 22 光積分器(複眼透鏡) 24 照明系統開口光圈板 28A 第1中繼透鏡 28A 第2中繼透鏡 30A 固定標線片遮簾 30B 可動標線片遮簾 32 聚光透鏡EL IAR Exposure Lighting Field 115 12553105 照射 Irradiation field (exposure field) LB laser beam 反射 mirror PL projection optical system R reticle RST marking station TS control information w wafer WST wafer table 11 chamber 12 Illumination optical system 13 Refracting optical element 13 wide 135 Lens element 15 Optical aperture aperture aperture 16 Light source 17 Light transmission window 20 Illumination equalization system 22 Light integrator (flip eye lens) 24 Illumination system aperture diaphragm 28A 1st relay lens 28A 2 relay lens 30A fixed reticle blind 30B movable reticle blind 32 concentrating lens

116 1253105 42 記憶裝置 44 顯示裝置 45 輸入裝置 46 模擬用電腦 48 成像性能修正控制 50 主控制裝置 54R 標線片干涉計 54W 晶圓干涉計 60a 照射系統 60b 受光系統 80 波面像差量測裝置 82 框體 82a 圓形之開口 84 受光光學系統 84a 物鏡 84b 中繼透鏡 84c 彎曲反射鏡 84d 準直透鏡 84e 微透鏡陣列 86 受光部 88 玻璃蓋 100 曝光裝置116 1253105 42 Memory device 44 Display device 45 Input device 46 Analog computer 48 Imaging performance correction control 50 Main control device 54R Screen interferometer 54W Wafer interferometer 60a Irradiation system 60b Receiver system 80 Wavefront aberration measuring device 82 Frame Body 82a Circular opening 84 Receiving optical system 84a Objective lens 84b Relay lens 84c Curved mirror 84d Collimating lens 84e Microlens array 86 Light receiving portion 88 Glass cover 100 Exposure device

117117

Claims (1)

W105 % i2:中:該2階旋轉對稱成份項係4階c。繼份項之第 4/“疋轉對稱成份項係4階〇θ成份項之第9項。 ,其中,/明專利範圍第2項之投影光學系統之調整方法 1 3項,二2 P“疋轉對稱成份項係4 15皆Sin2 β成份項之第 、广旋轉對稱成份項係4階〇θ成份項之第9項。 ,其中如Λ請專利範圍第2項之投影光學系統之調整方法 面,以π :亥第1製程係藉由直接量測該投影光學系統之波 取得該波面像差之資訊。W105 % i2: Medium: The 2nd order rotational symmetry component is 4th order c. In the fourth item of the sub-item, the ninth item of the fourth-order 〇 θ component of the symmetry component is ninth item. Among them, the adjustment method of the projection optical system of item 2 of the patent scope is 1 3, 2 2 P The symmetrical component system 4 15 is the ninth term of the Sin2 β component term, and the wide rotational symmetry component term is the fourth order 〇 θ component term. For example, in the adjustment method of the projection optical system of the second item of the patent scope, the information of the wavefront aberration is obtained by directly measuring the wave of the projection optical system by the π:Hai 1st process. ,其6中如Λ請專利範15第2項之投影光學系統之調整方法 ^ °亥第1製程,係就該第1面上所配置之尺寸相異 ^ Χ第1線圖案與該第2線圖案在像形成時之最佳 二、彳置的差#,於各組進行量測,根據該量測結果,推 疋/ 2卩自碇轉對稱成份項之資訊來作為該波面像差之資訊 〇In the sixth method, the adjustment method of the projection optical system of the second paragraph of Patent No. 15 is the first method of the first embodiment, and the size of the first surface is different from the first line pattern and the second line. The line pattern is optimal at the time of image formation, and the difference between the two sets is measured in each group. According to the measurement result, the information of the symmetrical component is used as the wavefront aberration. Information 、如申請專利範圍第2項之投影光學㈣之調整方法 ’其:,在㈣3製程,係在該2階旋轉對稱成份項之大 小不疋零,且該第3製程所量測之該線寬差不是零時,根 據忒2階旋轉對稱成份項之大小與該線寬差調整該投影光 學系統,以使該線寬差趨近設計值的方式調整該投影光學 系統,以使與該2階旋轉對稱成份項同一階數之旋轉對稱 成份項之大小最佳化。 8、如申請專利範圍第丨項之投影光學系統之調整方法 ,其中,該第2製程包含: 像开》成裝私’係在該第2面上所配置之物體上形成該 119 1253105 第1、第2線圖案之像;以及 線寬量測製程,係量測形成在該物體上之該第1線圖 案像之線寬的第1線寬、與形成在該物體上之該第2線圖 案像之線寬的第2線寬。 "" 9、如申請專利範圍第丨項之投影光學系統之調整方法 ’其中’該第3製程,係藉由構成該投影光學系統之至少 1個光學元件之至少丨自由度方向的位置控制、以及部= 光程中之氣體的壓力控制之至少一方,來控制該第2光學 特性之大小。 + 1〇、如中請專利範圍第1項之投影光學S統之調整方 法’其中’該帛1線圖案係縱線圖案,該第2線圖案係 線圖案; ' ί' 該第1光學特性與第2光學特性,係經由以下製程 決定: 對該縱線圖案像與該橫線圖案像之各線寬變化求出查 涅克項組合之交叉項中之查涅克感度的製程;以及 — 求出該《叉項中之查淫克感度符號在縱橫線相異之查 克項彼此之組合的製程。 、11、如申請專利範圍第i項之投影光學系統之調整方 法’其中’該帛1製程所取得之資訊係該投影光學系統之 波面像差之資訊; 該第1及第2光學特性,係使用查淫克多項式,在級 數展開㈣i製程所取得之波面像差之複數個查埋克項中 ’同一階數且種類相異成份之項。 120 1253105 2、一種曝光方法,係透過投影光學系統將第1面上 之電路圖案轉印至配置在第2面上之物體,其特徵在於, 包含: 調整製程,係使用申請專利範圍第1〜1 1項中任一項 之投影光學系統之調整方法,來調整該投影光學系統;以 及 轉印製程,係使用該調整後之投影光學系統,將該電 路圖案轉印在該物體上。 ^ 13、一種曝光裝置,係透過曝光用光學系統將形成在 _ 遮光罩之圖案轉印至物體上,其特徵在於: 、具備以申請專利範圍第1項之投影光學系統之調整方 去所调整之投影光學系統,來作為該曝光用光學系統。 ^ 14、一種投影光學系統之調整方法,該投影光學系統 人:第1面上之圖案像投影在第2面上,其特徵在於, 含: I 、第1製程,係取得包含該投影光學系統第丨光學特性 之光學特性的資訊;以及 g 第2製程’係根據該第1製程所取得之該第1光學特 性之值、以及該第!面上所配置之延伸於既定方向之第\ 圖案之線見和與該第i線圖案正交之第2線圖案之線寬 的差’調整該投影光學系統,以控制f 2光學特性之大小 、,f第2光學特性係因與該第1光學特性之相互作用,而 對错由該投影光學系續艰4、产贫 乎“成在弟2面上之㈣1線圖案像 見與該弟2線圖案像線寬的線寬差造成影響。 、 121 1253105 、 士申δ青專利範圍第14項之投影光學系統之調整方 線圖案·,該第1線圖案係縱線圖案,該第2線圖案係橫 安::光予特性與第2光學特性,係經由對該縱線圖 Λ X秩線圖案像之各線寬變化求出查涅克組 又項中之杏、、 〜人 / # ~涅克感度之製程、以及求出該交叉項中之查涅 克:度付號在縱橫線相異之查涅克項彼此之組合之製程來 決定。For example, the adjustment method of the projection optics (4) of the second application of the patent scope is as follows: in the (4) 3 process, the size of the second-order rotationally symmetric component is not zero, and the line width measured by the third process is measured. When the difference is not zero, the projection optical system is adjusted according to the size of the second-order rotational symmetry component and the line width difference, so that the line-width difference approaches the design value to adjust the projection optical system to make the second order The size of the rotationally symmetric component of the same order of the rotationally symmetric component is optimized. 8. The method of adjusting a projection optical system according to the scope of the patent application, wherein the second process comprises: forming a 119 1253105 on the object disposed on the second surface. And a line width measurement process for measuring a first line width of a line width of the first line pattern image formed on the object and the second line formed on the object The pattern is like the second line width of the line width. "" 9. The method of adjusting the projection optical system of the second paragraph of the patent application, wherein the third process is by at least one optical component constituting the projection optical system. At least one of the control and the pressure control of the gas in the portion = optical path controls the magnitude of the second optical characteristic. + 1〇, as in the adjustment method of the projection optical S system of the first item of the patent scope, 'the '1-line pattern is a vertical line pattern, the second line pattern is a line pattern; ' ί' the first optical characteristic And the second optical characteristic is determined by the following process: a process of determining the Channier sensitivity in the cross term of the combination of the Zernike terms for the line width of the vertical line pattern image and the horizontal line pattern image; and The process of the combination of the Chuck items in the cross-section and the Chuck items in the cross-section. 11. The method for adjusting the projection optical system of claim i of the patent scope 'where the information obtained by the process 1 is the information of the wavefront aberration of the projection optical system; the first and second optical characteristics are Using the singularity polynomial, in the series of wavefront aberrations obtained by the series expansion (4) i process, the items of the same order and different types of components are found. 120 1253105 2. An exposure method for transferring a circuit pattern on a first surface to an object disposed on a second surface through a projection optical system, comprising: an adjustment process, using a patent application scope 1 to 1 The method for adjusting a projection optical system according to any one of the items 1 to adjust the projection optical system; and the transfer process for transferring the circuit pattern onto the object using the adjusted projection optical system. ^ 13. An exposure apparatus for transferring a pattern formed on a hood to an object through an optical system for exposure, characterized in that: the adjustment of the projection optical system of the first application of the patent scope is adjusted. The projection optical system serves as the optical system for exposure. ^14. A method of adjusting a projection optical system, wherein the pattern image on the first surface is projected on the second surface, and includes: I, a first process, and the projection optical system is included Information on the optical characteristics of the second optical characteristic; and g the second process ' is the value of the first optical characteristic obtained by the first process, and the first! Adjusting the projection optical system to control the optical characteristics of f 2 by the difference between the line width of the pattern of the pattern extending in the predetermined direction and the line pattern of the second line pattern orthogonal to the i-th line pattern , f, the second optical characteristic is due to the interaction with the first optical characteristic, and the right and wrong by the projection optical system continues to struggle 4, the production of poor ("four" 1 line pattern image on the 2nd face of the brother and the brother The 2-line pattern affects the line width difference of the line width. 121 1253105, the adjustment square line pattern of the projection optical system of the 14th item of the Shishen δ Qing patent range, the first line pattern is a vertical line pattern, the second line The line pattern is horizontal and horizontal: the light pre-characteristic and the second optical characteristic are obtained by changing the line width of the vertical line graph 秩 X-rank line pattern image to obtain the apricot in the Zagnek group, and the person/# ~ The process of the Nike sensitivity, and the process of determining the combination of the Zanike:degree payment number in the cross-term is different from the combination of the Zanike items in the vertical and horizontal lines. + 16、一種曝光方法,係透過投影光學系統將第丨面上 %路圖案轉印至配置在第2面上之物體,其特徵在於, 一風调整製程,係使用中請專利範圍第14或15項之投影 "予系、、先之调整方法,來調整該投影光學系、统;以及 轉印製程,係使用該調整後之投影光學系統,將該電 路圖案轉印在該物體上。+16. An exposure method is to transfer a %-way pattern on the first surface to an object disposed on the second surface through a projection optical system, wherein a wind adjustment process is used in the patent range 14 or The projection of the 15 items, the adjustment method, and the adjustment method to adjust the projection optical system, and the transfer process, use the adjusted projection optical system to transfer the circuit pattern onto the object. …17、-種曝光裝置’係透過曝光用光學系、統將形成在 U光罩之圖案轉印在物體上,其特徵在於·· 、、具備使用中請專利範圍第14項之投影光學系統之調整 方法所《之投影光學系統,來作為該曝光用光學系統。 乂 8種技衫光學系統之調整方法,該投影光學系統 係將第i面上之圖案像投影在第2面上,其特徵在於,包 取得該投影光學系統之波面像差資訊的製程; 取得關於該圖案投影像之資訊的製程;以及 122 1253105 調整製程,係考慮使用查涅克多項式將該波面像差予 以級數展開後之複數個查涅克項中,其相互作用對該投影 像特性造成影響之任意查涅克項組合之交叉項對該投影像 之特性變化的查涅克感度,來調整該投影光學系統。 19、 如申請專利範圍第18項之投影光學系統之調整方 法’其中’該圖案包含線圖案; 該投影像之特性包含該線圖案之線寬。 20、 一種曝光方法,其係透過投影光學系統,將第i 面上之電路圖案轉印至配置在第2面上之物體,其特徵在 _ 於,包含: 調整製程,其係使用申請專利範圍第丨8項或第19項 之投影光學系統之調整方法,來調整該投影光學系統;以 及 轉印製程,其係使用該調整後之投影光學系統,將該 電路圖案轉印在該物體上。 21、 一種曝光裝置,其係透過曝光用光學系統,將形 成在遮光罩之圖案轉印在物體上,其特徵在於: _ 具備使用申請專利範圍第1 8項之投影光學系統之調整 方法所凋整之投影光學系統,來作為該曝光用光學系統。 、22、一種曝光裝置之製造方法,該曝光裝置係透過投 影光學系統,將形成在遮光罩之圖案轉印至物體上,其特 徵在於: 包含使用申請專利範圍第1〜1 1、14、1 5、1 8、1 9中 任項之投影光學系統之調整方法,來調整該投影光學系 123 1253105 統的製程。 23、一種曝光裝置,係使用能量束來照明第}面上所 配置之圖案,透過投影光學系統將該圖案轉印至配置在第 2面上之物體上,其特徵在於,具備: 光學特性量測裝置,係用以量測包含該投影光學系統 之第1光學特性的光學特性; 線寬量測裝置,係分別量測藉由該投影光學系統在該 第2面上所形成之該第丨面上延伸於既定方向之第1線圖 案像、和與此第1線圖案正交之第2線圖案像之線寬; 像形成狀態調整裝置,係調整以該投影光學系統形成 之圖案像之形成狀態;以及 ^ 控制裝置,係根據以該光學特性量測裝置所量測之該 弟1光學特性之值,以及以該線寬量測裝置所量測之該第 1線圖案像線寬之帛i線寬與該第2線圖案像線寬之第2 線寬的線寬差,使用該像形成狀態調整裝置,來控制由於 與該第1力學特性之相互作用而對該線寬差造成影響的第 2光學特性之大小。 3 24、如申請專利範圍第23項之曝光裝置,其中,該光 子特性量測裝置,係量測該投影光學系統之波面像差之波 面像差量測裝置。 / 25、如申請專利範圍第24項之曝光裝置,其中,該第 12學特性,係使用查涅克多項式來級數展開以該波面像 ^測裝置所量測之波面像差之查淫克項巾4 p皆以上之任 思2階旋轉對稱成份項,而該第2光學祕,係與該2階 124 以3l〇5 轉对%成份項同一階數之旋轉對稱成份項。 26 tb 、如申請專利範圍第25項之曝光裝置,其中,該2 疋轉對稱成份項係4階2 0成份之第12項及第13項之 任—工苜 士 只<- 、’該旋轉對稱成份項係4階〇 θ成份之第9項。 办旦、如申請專利範圍第23項之曝光裝置,其中,該線 見里測襄置’包含用以量測形成在該第2面上之該各圖案 之投影像的空間像量測器。 ’、 28、如申請專利範圍第23項之曝光裝置, 寬量測梦罟—人 衣直’包含拍攝形成在該第2面上所配置之物體上 籲 之像的攝影裝置。 ,、29、如申請專利範圍第23項之曝光裝置,其中,該像 形成狀怨调整裝置,係在構成該投影光學系統之至少^個 光學元件之至ψ 1 , 产 少1自由度方向之位置調整,一部份光程中 炅體壓力之5周整,該能量束之波長偏移量之調整,以及 有關該圖案所形成之圖案形成構件及該物體之至少一方之 該投影光學系統光軸方向之調整中,至少進行一種調整。 30、-種兀件製造方法,係包含微影製程,其特徵I · 於: 該微影製程係使用申請專利範圍第13、17、21、23〜 29項中之任-項之曝光裝置來進行曝光。 31、-種圖案像特性之預測方法,係預測透過投影光 學系統所形成之圖案像之特性,其特徵在於,包含: 根據將该投影光學系統之波面像差使用既定式進行級 數展開所知到之刀別包含各像差成份的複數項之線性結合 125 1253105 虫:异出變動曲線(顯示像尺寸相對於偏離最 =在既㈣光條件下透過該投影光學㈣所投影之既置( =τ散焦量之變動)之起因於波面像差的移= Χ ^所出之移動量來預測該變動曲線。 32、 W請專利範圍第31項之圖案像特性之 其中’两階於該預測製程之前,進 曝光條件下,假定該投影光學系統中無像差時’·=既定 來求出該像之尺寸相對於散隹量 "板擬 文焦里的變動之變動曲線,而庶 所求出的變動曲線趨近於高階函數之製程。 33、 如中請專利範圍第32項之圖案像特性之預 来該預測製程,係根據該各像差成份(係將該既定眼 :“牛下之該各像差成份對該散焦量之感度作為各個之二 旦之線性結合,算出有關該變動曲線於該散焦量方向之移 動置, 根據該各像差成份(係將在該既定曝光條件下之士亥 產成份之平方對該像大小變化之感度作為各個之係幻平方 之線性結合’算出有關該變動曲線於像大 動量。 々问之移 34、如申請專利範圍第33項之圖案像特性之預測方法 ’其中’該預測製程’除前述各像差成份平方之線性结合 外,亦根據該各交又項(係將該既定曝光條件下彼此相異:: 像差成份彼此間之交又項對該像大小變化方 各個係數)之線性結合,算出有關該變動曲線;J = 之移動量。 126 1253105 35、 如申請專利範圍第32項之圖案像特性之預測方法 ,其中,該高階函數係僅由偶數階項所構成之函數。 36、 如申請專利範圍第31項之圖案像特性之預測方法 一中,邊預測製程,係根據分別包含該各像差成份之複 $項之線性結合,算出該變動曲線之該波面像差所起因之 變形情況,根據該移動量及該變形情況,來預測該變動曲 線。 ,37、如申請專利範圍第%項之圖案像特性之預測方法 :其中’在該預測製程之前’進一步包含:高階假設在該 无定曝光條件下該投影光學系統無像差時,藉由模擬來求 出表示該像大小對該散焦量變動之變動曲線,而使所求出 的變動曲線趨近於高階函數之製程。 以、如申請專利範圍第37項之圖案像特性之預測方法 其中,在該預測製程之前,進一步包含算出製程,該製 王係透過實際像差狀態之該投影 、 收从 尤予糸統,在該既定曝光 才、算出有關投影後之該圖案像之該變動曲線; 5亥預測製程,求出差份函數(传― 鶫叙》& H A、 (係表不根據使該移動量所 . I近似之同階函數、與表示用該算出製程所 求出之變動曲線函數之差份), 該變動曲線之變動情況。作為起因於該波面像差之 39、 如申請專利範圍第38 ,其中,該算出製程係以模擬方寺性之預測方法 40、 如申請專利範圍第38項之 ,其中,該預測製程係根據該各成、:性之預測方法 像差成份(係將在該既定曝 127 1253105 光ίτ、件下之5亥各像差成份平方對該差份函數之偶數階項之 感度作為各個之係數)平方之線性結合,算出該差份函數之 偶數階項之係數; 該預測製程係根據該各像差成份(係將在該既定曝光條 件下之忒各像差成份對該差份函數之奇數階項之感度作為 各個之係數)平方之線性結合,算出該差份函數之奇數階項 之係數。 ' 41、如申請專利範圍第31項之圖案像特性之預測方法 ”中”亥既定之式係查淫克多項式,該各像差成份係各籲 查涅克項之係數。 ^ 42 種圖案像特性之評價方法,係評價透過投影光 學系統之圖案像的特性,其特徵在於,包含: 預測製程,係針對該投影光學系統之有效視野内之至 少1個量測點,使用申請專利範圍第31〜41項中任一項 之預測方法,在既定曝光條件下,透過該投影光學系統, 以、j麦動曲線(係表示有關投影在該至少1個量測點之既 疋圖案像’該像大小對來自最佳聚焦位置之散焦量之變籲 :以及 ^ 评價製裎,係根據該預測結果,來評價該既定圖案俊 之特性。 ' 3如申晴專利範圍第42項之圖案像特性之評價方法 ’其中’該既定圖案係對應該投影光學系統之有效視野内 之各複數個量測點來配置; 特丨生包含该投影光學系統之有效視野内該像之均句 128 1253105 ,44、如申請專利範圍第42項之圖案像特性之評價方法 投=岛該既定圖案係包含2個線圖案,其係設置:與該 製:: :之光軸方向正交之平面上彼此正交;該預測 x王’係於每一該線圖案預測該變動曲線。 ,45、如申請專利範圍第44項之圖案像特性之評價方法 其中,該評價製程,係評價線圖案像彼此之線寬 為該像特性。 F...17, the type of exposure apparatus 'transfers the optical system of the exposure, and the pattern formed on the U-shield is transferred onto the object, and is characterized by the projection optical system of the 14th item of the patent scope in use. The projection optical system of the adjustment method is used as the optical system for exposure.调整 8 method for adjusting an optical system of a technical shirt, wherein the projection optical system projects a pattern image on the i-th surface on a second surface, and is characterized in that a process for acquiring wavefront aberration information of the projection optical system is obtained; The process of information on the pattern projection image; and 122 1253105 adjustment process, considering the use of the Chanek polynomial to spread the wavefront aberration in a plurality of Zernike terms, the interaction of the projection image characteristics The projection optical system is adjusted by the cross-term of any combination of the Zernike items that affects the Chanek sensitivity of the characteristics of the projected image. 19. The method of adjusting the projection optical system of claim 18, wherein the pattern comprises a line pattern; the characteristic of the projected image comprises a line width of the line pattern. 20. An exposure method for transferring a circuit pattern on an i-th surface to an object disposed on a second surface through a projection optical system, wherein the method comprises: an adjustment process, wherein the patent application scope is used The method of adjusting the projection optical system of item 8 or item 19 to adjust the projection optical system; and the transfer process for transferring the circuit pattern onto the object using the adjusted projection optical system. 21. An exposure apparatus for transferring a pattern formed on a hood onto an object through an optical system for exposure, characterized in that: _ having an adjustment method using a projection optical system of claim 18 The entire projection optical system serves as the optical system for exposure. 22. A method of manufacturing an exposure apparatus for transferring a pattern formed on a hood to an object through a projection optical system, comprising: applying the patent scopes 1 to 11, 1 and 1, 5. The adjustment method of the projection optical system of any of the items of 8, 8 and 19 to adjust the process of the projection optical system 123 1253105. An exposure apparatus for illuminating a pattern disposed on a surface by using an energy beam, and transferring the pattern to an object disposed on the second surface through a projection optical system, comprising: an optical characteristic amount Measuring device for measuring optical characteristics including a first optical characteristic of the projection optical system; and a line width measuring device for measuring the third surface formed by the projection optical system on the second surface a first line pattern image extending in a predetermined direction and a line width of a second line pattern image orthogonal to the first line pattern; and an image forming state adjusting device for adjusting a pattern image formed by the projection optical system a state of formation; and a control device based on the value of the optical characteristic of the younger one measured by the optical characteristic measuring device, and the line width of the first line pattern measured by the line width measuring device The line width difference between the 帛i line width and the second line width of the second line pattern line width is controlled by the image forming state adjusting device to control the line width difference due to the interaction with the first mechanical property. Influence of the second light The size characteristics. The exposure apparatus of claim 23, wherein the photon characteristic measuring device measures a wavefront aberration measuring device for wavefront aberration of the projection optical system. / 25. The exposure apparatus of claim 24, wherein the twelfth characteristic is to use a Chanek polynomial to expand the wavefront aberration measured by the wavefront image measuring device. The turban 4 p is more than the second-order rotational symmetry component, and the second optical secret is a rotationally symmetric component of the second order 124 with the same order of 3% 〇5 to the % component. 26 tb, such as the exposure device of claim 25, wherein the 2 疋 对称 symmetry component is the 12th and 20th components of the 4th order 20th component - the work gentleman only <-, 'the The rotationally symmetric component term is the ninth term of the fourth-order 〇θ component. For example, the exposure apparatus of claim 23, wherein the line includes a spatial image measuring device for measuring projection images of the patterns formed on the second surface. For example, in the exposure apparatus of claim 23, the wide-measurement nightmare-human clothing' includes a photographing apparatus for photographing an image formed on an object disposed on the second surface. The exposure device of claim 23, wherein the image formation control device is configured to at least one optical element constituting the projection optical system to produce a degree of freedom of one degree of freedom. Position adjustment, 5 weeks of the body pressure in a part of the optical path, the adjustment of the wavelength shift of the energy beam, and the optical axis direction of the projection optical system of at least one of the pattern forming member formed by the pattern and the object In the adjustment, at least one adjustment is made. 30. A method for manufacturing a component, comprising a lithography process, wherein the lithography process is performed by using an exposure device of any one of claims 13, 17, 21, 23 to 29 of the patent application scope. Exposure. 31. A method for predicting a pattern image characteristic, which predicts a characteristic of a pattern image formed by a projection optical system, comprising: knowing a series expansion based on a wavefront aberration of the projection optical system using a predetermined expression The knife has a linear combination of the plural items of the aberration components. 125 1253105 Insect: the variation curve of the display (the image size is relative to the deviation = the projection of the projection optics (4) under the condition of the (four) light (= The variation of the τ defocus amount is caused by the shift of the wavefront aberration = Χ ^ to predict the variation curve. 32. W Please select the pattern image characteristic of the 31st patent range, 'two orders for the prediction. Before the process, under the exposure conditions, assuming that there is no aberration in the projection optical system, '·= is determined to determine the variation curve of the size of the image relative to the variation of the amount of divergence. The obtained variation curve approaches the process of the higher-order function. 33. The prediction process of the pattern image characteristic of the 32nd item of the patent scope is based on the aberration components (the established eye: " The sensitivity of each of the aberration components to the defocus amount is linearly combined as a binary value, and the movement of the variation curve in the direction of the defocus amount is calculated, and the aberration component is determined according to the predetermined component. Under the exposure condition, the square of the composition of the product of the Shih-Hai is the linear combination of the change of the size of the image as the linear combination of the magical squares of each system'. Calculate the large momentum of the change curve. 々 移 34, as in the scope of patent application 33 The method for predicting the pattern image characteristics, wherein the 'predictive process' is in addition to the linear combination of the squares of the aberration components described above, and also according to the respective intersections (which are different from each other under the predetermined exposure conditions:: aberration components are mutually different A linear combination of the coefficients of the image size change, and the calculation of the variation curve; J = the amount of movement. 126 1253105 35, as in the prediction method of the pattern image characteristics of claim 32, wherein The higher-order function is a function consisting only of even-order terms. 36. As in the prediction method 1 of the pattern image characteristic of claim 31, the edge prediction process, Deformation of the wavefront aberration caused by the variation curve is calculated based on a linear combination of the complex items including the respective aberration components, and the variation curve is predicted based on the amount of movement and the deformation. 37 The method for predicting the pattern image characteristics of the item % of the patent application scope: wherein 'before the prediction process' further comprises: a high-order assumption that the projection optical system has no aberration under the undetermined exposure condition, and the representation is obtained by simulation The variation of the image size on the variation of the defocus amount, and the obtained variation curve is approximated to the process of the higher-order function. The prediction method of the pattern image characteristic according to the 37th patent of the patent application, wherein the prediction is Before the process, the process further includes calculating the process, and the king system transmits the projection curve of the actual aberration state, and receives the variation curve of the pattern image after the projection is determined by the predetermined exposure; For the process, find the difference function (transfer - 鶫 》 》 & HA, (the table is not based on the same amount of function, and the representation Calculating the change process the obtained difference curve function parts), the variation curve of the situation changes. 39, as the result of the wavefront aberration, as in the forty-eighth of the patent application, wherein the calculation process is a method for predicting a square temple, 40, as in claim 38, wherein the prediction process is based on Each component, the prediction method of the aberration is the aberration component (the sensitivity of the even-order term of the difference function is squared as the coefficient of each of the differential components of 127 1253105 ίτ, the square of each aberration component) Linearly combining, calculating a coefficient of an even order term of the difference function; the prediction process is based on the aberration components (the odd-order terms of the difference function of each aberration component under the predetermined exposure condition) The sensitivity is linearly combined as the square of each coefficient, and the coefficients of the odd-order terms of the difference function are calculated. '41. For example, the method for predicting the pattern image characteristics of Article 31 of the patent application scope is the formula for judging the singularity polynomial, and the aberration components are the coefficients of each of the SAR. ^ 42 evaluation methods for pattern image characteristics, which are characteristics for evaluating a pattern image transmitted through a projection optical system, comprising: a prediction process for using at least one measurement point in an effective field of view of the projection optical system The prediction method according to any one of claims 31 to 41, wherein the projection optical system is passed through the projection optical system under a predetermined exposure condition, and the projection of the projection is at the at least one measurement point. The pattern image is called 'the size of the image, and the defocus amount from the best focus position is changed: and ^ evaluation system is based on the prediction result to evaluate the characteristics of the predetermined pattern. ' 3 Such as Shen Qing patent range 42 The evaluation method of the pattern image characteristic of the item 'where the predetermined pattern is arranged corresponding to each of the plurality of measurement points in the effective field of view of the projection optical system; the characteristic includes the image in the effective field of view of the projection optical system Clause 128 1253105, 44, evaluation method of pattern image characteristics according to item 42 of the patent application scope. The island is determined to have two line patterns, which are set: The :: : the optical axis direction is orthogonal to each other on the plane orthogonal to each other; the prediction x king ' is predicted in each of the line patterns to predict the variation curve. 45, the evaluation of the pattern image characteristics as in the 44th article of the patent application scope In the method, the evaluation process is such that the line width of the evaluation line pattern images is the image characteristic. 46、 如申請專利範圍第42項之圖案像特性之評價方法 其中,該既定圖案係包含2個線圖案,其係設置在盘 又衫光學系統之光軸方向正交之平面上彼此平行;^ Λ w亥預測製私,係於每一該線圖案預測該變動曲線。 47、 如申請專利範圍第46項之圖案像特性之評價方法 ’其中,該評價製程,係評價線圖案像彼此之線寬差來作 為該像特性。 < 48、一種圖案像形成之調整方法,係調整透過投影光 學系統之圖案像之形成狀態,其特徵在於,包含·· 評價製程,係使用申請專利範圍第42項之評價方法, 來评價對應該投影光學系統之有效視野内之至彡工個量測 點所配置之既定圖案像之特性;以及 周1衣耘係根據該評價結果,來調整透過該投影光 學系統之该既定圖案像之形成狀態。 49、如申請專利範圍帛48項之圖案像形成之調整方法 八中 ^ "周1 ‘各,係使用關於該測量點之用以調整該 129 1253105 既定圖案像之形成狀態的調整參數之單位調整量之該各像 差成份之變化量’在該既定曝光條件下該各像差成份對該 既定圖案像大小變化之感度,以及有關表示該既定圖案像 大小對該散焦量變動之變動曲線之各階項係數之目標值之 偏離’來异出該調整參數之調整量,根據所算出之調整量 ,來調整該既定圖案像之形成狀態。46. The method for evaluating the pattern image characteristics of claim 42 wherein the predetermined pattern comprises two line patterns which are disposed parallel to each other on a plane orthogonal to the optical axis direction of the optical system of the disk and the shirt; Λ whai predicts the private sector, which is predicted by each line pattern. 47. An evaluation method of pattern image characteristics according to item 46 of the patent application scope, wherein the evaluation process is a line width difference between the evaluation line pattern images as the image characteristic. < 48. A method for adjusting a pattern image formation, wherein a state in which a pattern image transmitted through a projection optical system is formed is characterized in that the evaluation process is included in the evaluation method using the evaluation method of item 42 of the patent application scope. The characteristic image of the predetermined pattern disposed in the effective field of view of the projection optical system to the completion measurement point; and the week 1 clothing system adjusts the predetermined pattern image transmitted through the projection optical system according to the evaluation result Forming state. 49. If the patent image range is 48, the adjustment method of the pattern image formation is performed in the middle of the method, and the unit of the adjustment parameter for adjusting the formation state of the 129 1253105 predetermined pattern image is used. The amount of change of the aberration components of the adjustment amount is a sensitivity of the aberration component to the size of the predetermined pattern image under the predetermined exposure condition, and a variation curve indicating the variation of the defocus amount of the predetermined pattern image size. The deviation of the target value of each of the coefficient coefficients is different from the adjustment amount of the adjustment parameter, and the formation state of the predetermined pattern image is adjusted based on the calculated adjustment amount. 50、如申請專利範圍第49項之圖案像形成之調整方法 ,其中,該評價製程,係分別評價對應該投影光學系統之 有效視野内之複數個量測點所配置之既定圖案像之特性; 4。周t製程,係使有關該變動曲線同一次項之係數之 目標值,在該量測點間相同。 51、如申請專利範圍第49項之圖案像形成之調整方法 ’其中’ t既定圖案包含複數個圖案日夺,使有關該變動曲 線同一次項之係數之目標值在該圖案間相同。 之調整方法 將第1面 ’其特徵在50. The method for adjusting the pattern image formation according to claim 49, wherein the evaluation process separately evaluates characteristics of a predetermined pattern image arranged by a plurality of measurement points in an effective field of view of the projection optical system; 4. The weekly t process is such that the target value of the coefficient of the same term of the variation curve is the same between the measurement points. 51. The method of adjusting the pattern image formation according to item 49 of the patent application scope, wherein the predetermined pattern comprises a plurality of pattern diverges such that the target value of the coefficient of the same term of the variation curve is the same between the patterns. The adjustment method will be the first side' 以 52、 如申請專利範圍第49項之圖案像形成 其中’係使用最小平方法來求出該調整量。 53、 一種曝光方法,係透過投影光學系統, 上之電路圖案轉印在第2面上所配置之物體上 於’包含: 項之調整方法 之形成狀態; °周整製程,係使用申請專利範圍第43 ^周'透過该投影光學系統之該圖案圖像 及 130 1253105 54 種 於: 元件製造方法,係包含微影製程,其特徵在 該微影製程係、使用申請專利範㈣53項之曝光方法。 -二:種圖案像特性之評價方法,係評價透過投影光 干糸、,先之像的特性,其特徵在於,包含: 取侍忒投影光學系統之波面像差資訊之製程; 取:有關該圖案之投影像資訊之製程;以及 =製& ’係考慮查淫克感㈣該投影像(係使用查淫 t :將該波面像差加以級數展開後之複數個杳“項 用對該投影像特性造成影響之任意^項 之組5之父叉項)之特性變化,來評價該圖案像特性。 56如巾4專利範圍第μ項之圖案像特性之評 ,其中,該圖案包合綠 、 ^ 之線寬。 ^線圖案,該投影像特性包含該線圖案 ^ 57、一種圖案像形成之調整方法,係調整透過投影光 予糸統之圖案像之形成狀態,其特徵在於,包含: 評價製程,俦你田士 _ 士 係使用申請專利範圍第55項 來評價對應該投影光貝之…貝方法, 點所阶署夕 、先干糸統之有效視野内之至少1個量測 所置之既定圖案像之特性;以及 調整製程,其係根據該評價結果 學系統之該既定圖案像之形成狀態。Μ透過^ 58、一種曝弁古 面上之圖案轉印在第面其係透過:影光學系、統’… ,包含: 2面上所配置之物體上’其特徵在於 】31 1253105 凋整製程,係使用申請專利範圍第57項之調整方法, 來調整透過投影光學系統之該圖案像之形成狀態;以及 轉印製程,係在該調整後之像的形成狀態下,透過該 投影光學系統,將該圖案轉印在該物體上。 59、-種元件製造方法’係包含微影製程 於: 該微影製程係使用申請專利範圍第58項之曝光方法。 ,60、—種記錄媒體’係、記錄有用以使電腦執行透過投 影光學系統之圖案像特性之預測,其特徵在於·· 該程式係使電腦執行下列程序,亦即,根據分別包含 使用既定式將該投影光學系統之波面像差級數展開所得到 之各像差成份的複數項之線性結合,來算出移動量(與在既 定曝光條件下透過該投影光學系統所投影之既定圖案之像 相關,顯示相對於來自最佳聚焦位置之散焦量之該像之尺 寸變動的變動曲線因該波面像差所造成者),根據該所算出 之移動量來預測該變動曲線的預測程序。 61、 如申請專利範圍第6〇項之記錄媒體,其中,該程 式係在該預測步驟之前,進一步使該電腦執行下列程序, 亦即假定在該既定曝光條件下該投影光學系統無像差時所 求之,使顯示該像大小對該散焦量之變動的變動曲線趨近 於高階函數的程序。 62、 如申請專利範圍第6丨項之記錄媒體,其中,今^ 式係使笔細執行以下程序,來作為該預測程序: 根據將在該既定曝光條件下該各像差成份對該散焦旦 132 1253105 之感度作為各個之係數的該各像差成份之線性結合,來預 測有關该變動曲線於散焦量方向之移動量的程序丨以及 根據將在該既定曝光條件下該各像差成份對該像大小 變化之感度作為各個之係數的該各像差成份平方之線性結 合,來預測有關該變動曲線於像大小之變化方向之移動量 的程序。 63、 如申請專利範圍第62項之記錄媒體,其中,該程 式係使該電腦執行下列程序,來作為該預測程序,即除^ 述各像差成份平方之線性結合外,亦根據該各交又項(係將 該既定曝光條件下彼此相異之像差成份彼此間之交又項對 該像大小變化方向之感度作為各個係數)之線性結合,算出 有關該變動曲線於像大小變化之移動量的程序。 开 64、 如申請專利範圍第61項之記錄媒體,其中,該高 階函數係僅由偶數階項所構成之函數。 / ^ 65、如申請專利範圍第6〇項之記錄媒體,直 式係使該電腦執行下列程序,來作為預測程序,亦即栝"In the case of 52, the pattern image is formed as in the 49th article of the patent application, wherein the adjustment amount is obtained by using the least square method. 53. An exposure method, wherein the circuit pattern on the second surface is transferred to the object disposed on the second surface through the projection optical system, and the forming method of the method includes: The 43th week 'the pattern image through the projection optical system and 130 1253105 54 are used in: the component manufacturing method includes a lithography process, and the lithography process is characterized by the exposure method of the patent application model (IV) 53 items. . - 2: a method for evaluating the characteristics of a pattern image, which is a characteristic for evaluating the image transmitted by the projection light, and characterized by comprising: a process for taking the wavefront aberration information of the projection optical system; The process of casting the image information of the pattern; and the = system & 'reviewing the sensation of the sensation (4) the projection image (using the smuggling t: the wavefront aberration is expanded by the series of numbers) The characteristics of the pattern image are evaluated by changing the characteristics of the parental term of the group 5 of any item affected by the image characteristics. 56 The evaluation of the pattern image characteristics of the item μ of the towel 4 patent range, wherein the pattern is included The line width of the green and ^. The line pattern includes the line pattern 57, a method for adjusting the pattern image formation, and adjusts the formation state of the pattern image transmitted through the projection light to the system, and is characterized in that : Evaluation process, 俦 田 _ _ 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士 士Placed The characteristic of the predetermined pattern image; and the adjustment process, which is based on the state of formation of the predetermined pattern image of the evaluation result system. Μ Through the image of an exposed ancient surface, the pattern is transferred on the first surface: The optical system, the system '..., contains: on the object arranged on the two sides, which is characterized by the fact that 31 1253105 is used to adjust the pattern image transmitted through the projection optical system using the adjustment method of the 57th patent of the patent application. And a transfer process for transferring the pattern onto the object through the projection optical system in a state in which the adjusted image is formed. 59. The method for manufacturing a component includes a lithography process The lithography process uses the exposure method of claim 58. 60, a recording medium, which is useful for predicting the image characteristics of a computer through a projection optical system, characterized in that The program causes the computer to execute the following procedures, that is, according to the respective developments of the wavefront aberration series of the projection optical system using the predetermined formula. Linearly combining a plurality of terms of the aberration component to calculate a movement amount (corresponding to an image of a predetermined pattern projected through the projection optical system under a predetermined exposure condition, displaying the image with respect to a defocus amount from a best focus position) The variation curve of the dimensional change is caused by the wavefront aberration, and the prediction program of the fluctuation curve is predicted based on the calculated movement amount. 61. The recording medium according to the sixth aspect of the patent application, wherein the program Before the predicting step, the computer is further caused to execute the following procedure, that is, to assume that the projection optical system has no aberrations under the predetermined exposure condition, so as to display the variation of the image size to the defocus amount. A program that approximates a higher-order function. 62. The recording medium of claim 6 of the patent application, wherein the current system performs the following procedure as the prediction program: according to the predetermined exposure condition The respective aberration components are linearly combined with the sensitivity of the defocused denier 132 1253105 as the respective aberration components of the respective coefficients to predict the relevant The program 丨 of the amount of movement of the motion curve in the defocus amount direction and the linear combination of the square components of the coefficients of the respective aberration components as the respective coefficients under the predetermined exposure conditions A program for predicting the amount of movement of the variation curve in the direction of change in image size. 63. The recording medium of claim 62, wherein the program causes the computer to execute the following procedure as the prediction program, that is, in addition to linearly combining the square components of the aberration components, Further, a linear combination of the aberrations of the mutually different aberration components under the predetermined exposure conditions and the sensitivity of the image size change direction as a coefficient is calculated, and the movement of the variation curve in the image size is calculated. Quantity of programs. Open 64. The recording medium of claim 61, wherein the higher order function is a function consisting only of even order terms. / ^ 65. If the recording medium of the sixth paragraph of the patent application is applied, the computer directly executes the following procedures as a predictive program, that is, 栝" 分別包含該各像差成份之複數項之線性結合,瞀 ▲ ’_u出€亥變鸯 曲線起因於該波面像差之變形狀況,根據該移 ^ 形狀況,來預測該變動曲線的程序。 〇〇、如曱睛專利範圍第65項之記錄媒體,其中, 式係在該預測程序之前,進一步使該電腦執行下列。 亦即假定在該既定曝光條件下該投影光學系統無像= 求之,使顯示該像大小對該散焦量之變動的變動曲 於高階函數的程序。 133 1253105 67、如申請專利範圍第66 貝之έ己錄媒體,JL中,該寇 序係在該預測程序之前,逸一 八 Λ ^ 、务 進—步使該電腦執行,在該既定 曝先條件下,透過實際傻# Η 投影光學系統,算出 有關投衫後之既定圖案像, 程序· μ像大小對該散焦量之變動的 作為该預測程序,你雷聪说> 舌曰十 使電^執仃求出高階函數(根據該禾 動Ϊ來移動)與變動函數( 山数(以上述异出程序求出者)之差份遠 數’來作為起因於該波傻 ®诼是之该變動曲線之變動情況白ίThe linear combination of the plurality of terms of the aberration components is respectively included, and the 瞀 ▲ ' _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _记录, such as the recording medium of the patent scope of the 65th item, wherein the system further enables the computer to perform the following before the prediction procedure. That is, it is assumed that the projection optical system has no image under the predetermined exposure condition, so that the variation of the image size to the variation of the defocus amount is displayed in the program of the higher order function. 133 1253105 67. If the application of the patent scope is 66th, it is recorded in the media. In JL, the order is before the forecasting process, and the computer is executed in the first step. Under the condition, through the actual silly # Η projection optical system, calculate the predetermined pattern image after the shirting, the program μ image size changes the defocus amount as the prediction program, you said: The electric power is used to determine the difference between the higher-order function (moving according to the motion) and the variation function (the number of mountains (the one obtained by the above-mentioned different program) is the cause of the wave. The change in the curve is white 程序。 /8、如中請專利範圍第67項之記錄媒體,丨中,該程 式係使該電腦執行以下程序,來作業該預測程序: :、根據D亥各像差成份(係將在該既定曝光條件下該各像 差成份平方對該歸函數之偶數階項之感度作為各個之係 )平方之線J·生結合,來預測該差份函數之偶數階項之係數 的程序;以及program. /8. For the recording medium of the 67th patent scope, the program is to enable the computer to execute the following procedure to operate the prediction program: : According to the D Hai aberration components (the system will be in the established exposure) The procedure for predicting the coefficients of the even-order terms of the difference function by combining the sensitivity of the aberration components to the even-order terms of the return function as a line of the respective squares. 係根據該各像差成份(係將在該既定曝光條件下該各像 差成份對該差份函數之奇數階項之感度作為各個之係數)之 線丨生、、々合’來預測該差份函數之奇數階項之係數的程序。 69、 如申凊專利範圍第60〜68項中任一項之記錄媒體 ’其中’該既定式係查涅克多項式,該各像差成份係各查 淫克項之係數。 70、 一種曝光方法,其係透過投影光學系統,將第j 面上之圖案轉印在第2面上所配置之物體上,其特徵在於 ’包含: 134 1253105 調整製程,係使用申請專利範圍第48項之調整方法, 來調整透過投影光學系統之該圖案像之形成狀態;以及 轉印製程,係在該調整後之像的形成狀態下,透過該 才又衫光學糸統’將該圖案轉印在該物體上 71、一種元件製造方法,係句 匕含微影製程,其特徵在 於: 申睛專利範園 該微影製程係使用 第70項之曝光方法。 拾壹、圖式: 如次頁Predicting the difference based on the line of each of the aberration components (the sensitivity of the aberration components of the difference function as the respective coefficients under the predetermined exposure conditions) The procedure for the coefficients of the odd-order terms of a function. 69. The recording medium of any one of claims 60 to 68, wherein the predetermined form is a Chanek polynomial, and the respective aberration components are coefficients of each of the obscenity terms. 70. An exposure method for transferring a pattern on a j-th surface onto an object disposed on a second surface through a projection optical system, wherein the method comprises: 134 1253105 adjusting a process, using a patent application scope 48th adjustment method for adjusting the formation state of the pattern image through the projection optical system; and the transfer process, in the formation state of the adjusted image, the pattern is transferred through the optical system Printed on the object 71, a component manufacturing method, the system includes a lithography process, and is characterized in that: the lithography process of the application of the lithography process uses the exposure method of item 70. Pick up, pattern: like the next page 135135
TW092104373A 2002-03-01 2003-03-03 Projection optical system adjustment method, prediction method, evaluation method, adjustment method, exposure method, exposure device, recording medium, and device manufacturing method TWI253105B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2002056116 2002-03-01

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW200400540A TW200400540A (en) 2004-01-01
TWI253105B true TWI253105B (en) 2006-04-11

Family

ID=37565006

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW092104373A TWI253105B (en) 2002-03-01 2003-03-03 Projection optical system adjustment method, prediction method, evaluation method, adjustment method, exposure method, exposure device, recording medium, and device manufacturing method

Country Status (1)

Country Link
TW (1) TWI253105B (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI639886B (en) * 2017-10-23 2018-11-01 Powerchip Technology Corporation Method for maintaining reticle stage

Families Citing this family (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN100533661C (en) 2004-07-12 2009-08-26 株式会社尼康 Determination method of exposure conditions, exposure method, exposure device and components manufacturing method
US7743357B2 (en) * 2006-05-31 2010-06-22 Synopsys, Inc. Method and apparatus for determining a process model that models the impact of CAR/PEB on the resist profile
US8451427B2 (en) 2007-09-14 2013-05-28 Nikon Corporation Illumination optical system, exposure apparatus, optical element and manufacturing method thereof, and device manufacturing method
US8379187B2 (en) 2007-10-24 2013-02-19 Nikon Corporation Optical unit, illumination optical apparatus, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI639886B (en) * 2017-10-23 2018-11-01 Powerchip Technology Corporation Method for maintaining reticle stage

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW200400540A (en) 2004-01-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TWI220999B (en) Measuring method of image formation characteristic, exposure method, exposure apparatus and its adjustment method, manufacture method of device, and recording medium
JP4352458B2 (en) Projection optical system adjustment method, prediction method, evaluation method, adjustment method, exposure method and exposure apparatus, exposure apparatus manufacturing method, program, and device manufacturing method
KR100927560B1 (en) Image forming state adjusting system, exposure method and exposure apparatus, and program and information recording medium
TWI234195B (en) Pattern determining method and system, method of manufacturing mask, adjusting method of imaging performance, exposure method and apparatus, information recording medium
KR100893516B1 (en) Imaging characteristics measuring method, imaging characteristics adjusting method, exposure method and system, program and recording medium, and device producing method
CN100517569C (en) Optical characteristic measuring device and measuring method, exposure device and method, and device manufacturing method
TW200908086A (en) Exposure method and electronic device manufacturing method
JP2006332168A (en) Measuring method, exposing method and exposing device
JP2002250677A (en) Wave front aberration measuring method, wave front aberration measuring instrument, aligner, device manufacturing method, and device
TW200908085A (en) Exposure apparatus, exposure method, and method for manufacturing electronic device
KR20090040228A (en) Exposure apparatus and method of manufacturing device
JP2008263193A (en) Exposure method and manufacturing method for electronic device
TW201250290A (en) Illumination optical system, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method
TW201007369A (en) Exposure apparatus, correction method, and device manufacturing method
TWI253105B (en) Projection optical system adjustment method, prediction method, evaluation method, adjustment method, exposure method, exposure device, recording medium, and device manufacturing method
JP2002170754A (en) Exposure system, method of detecting optical characteristic, and exposure method
JP4793683B2 (en) Calculation method, adjustment method, exposure method, image forming state adjustment system, and exposure apparatus
JP2009194107A (en) Generation method for database of effective light-source shape, optical-image calculation method, program, exposure method, and device manufacturing method
JP2003203853A (en) Aligner and its method, and manufacturing method for microdevice
JP2006279028A (en) Method and device for measuring aberration, method and device for exposure and method of adjusting projection optical system
JP2003021914A (en) Optical characteristic measuring method, optical characteristic measuring device, and exposure device
JP2003045795A (en) Optical characteristics measurement method, adjustment and exposure method of projection optical system, and manufacturing method of aligner
TW200905409A (en) Exposure method and manufacturing method for electronic device
JP2005129557A (en) Aberration measurement device, aligner, aberration measurement method, exposure method, and device manufacturing method
JP2006234517A (en) Optical characteristic measurement method and instrument, substrate used for the measurement method, and exposure method and device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
MM4A Annulment or lapse of patent due to non-payment of fees